AR M201 Service Manual

SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZAR203E/S2E
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM/DIGITAL COPIER
MODEL
CONTENTS
AR-203E AR-203E X AR-M200 AR-M201 AR-5420
(The descriptions of the AR-203E X are same as those of the AR-203E unless otherwise specified.)
[1] GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 [2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 [3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 [4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 [5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 [6] COPY PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 [7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1 [8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 [9] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1 [10] SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 [11] MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1 [12] USER PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1 [13] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1 [14] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 1
Parts marked with are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
SHARP CORPORATION
This document has been published to be used for after sales service only. The contents are subject to change without notice.
CAUTION
This product is a class 1 laser product that complies with 21CFR 1040 of the CDRH standard and IEC825. This means that this machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. This laser radiation is not a danger to the skin, but when an exact focusing of the laser beam is achieved on the eyes retina, there is the danger of spot damage to the retina. The following cautions must be observed to avoid exposure of the laser beam to your eyes at the time of servicing. 1) When a problem in the laser optical unit has occurred, the whole optical unit must be exchanged as a unit, not as individual parts. 2) Do not look into the machine with the main switch turned on after removing the developer unit, toner cartridge, and drum cartridge. 3) Do not look into the laser beam exposure slit of the laser optical unit with the connector connected when removing and installing the optical system. 4) The middle frame contains the safety interlock switch. Do not defeat the safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into the switch slot.
CAUTION
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION, WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED. AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
VARO !
AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA NKYMTTMLLE LASERSTEILYLLE L KATSO STEESEEN.
VORSICHT
UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, WENN ABDECKUNG GEFFNET UND SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG BERBRCKT. NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN. LASER WAVE LENGTH : 770 ~ 795nm Pulse times : 12.88s 12.88ns/7mm Out put power : MAX 0.2mW
ADVARSEL
USYNLIG LASERSTRLNING VED BNING, NR SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER UDE AF FUNKTION. UNDG UDSAETTELSE FOR STRLNING.
VARNING !
OSYNLIG LASERSTRLNING NR DENNA DEL R PPNAD OCH SPRREN R URKOPPLAD. BETRAKTA EJ STRLEN. STRLEN R FARLIG.
At the production line, the output power of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.18 MILLI-WATT PLUS 20 PCTS and is maintained constant by the operation of the Automatic Power Control (APC). Even if the APC circuit fails in operation for some reason, the maximum output power will only be 15 MILLI-WATT 0.1 MICRO-SEC. Giving and accessible emission level of 42 MICRO-WATT which is still-less than the limit of CLASS-1 laser product.
Caution This product contains a low power laser device. To ensure continued safety do not remove any cover or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel.
VAROITUS! LAITTEEN KYTTMINEN MUULLA KUIN TSS KYTTOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KYTTJN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTVLLE NKYMTTMLLE LASERSTEILYLLE.
VARNING - OM APPARATEN ANVNDS P ANNAT STT N I DENNA BRUKSANVISNING SPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVNDAREN UTSTTAS FR OSYNLIG LASERSTRLNING, SOM VERSKRIDER GRNSEN FR LASERKLASS 1.
The foregoing is applicable only to the 220V model, 230V model and 240V model.
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
CONTENTS
[1] [2] GENERAL 1. Major functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 SPECIFICATIONS 1. Basic Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2. Operation specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 3. Copy performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 4. GDI printer (AR-203E only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 5. SPLC printer (AR-M200/M201). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 6. Scan function (AR-203E/M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 [3] CONSUMABLE PARTS 1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 A. Europe Subsidiary (AR-203E/5420/M200/M201), SCA/SCNZ (AR-203E/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 B. Asia Subsidiary (AR-203E/M201). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 C. SMEF/Distributor (AR-203E/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 D. SRH (AR-203E/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 2. Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3. Production control number (lot No.) identification . . . . . 3-2 4. Toner cartridge replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 [4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 1. Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 2. Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 3. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 A. AR-203E/5420 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 B. AR-M200/M201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 4. Motors and solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 5. Sensors and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 6. PWB unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 7. Cross sectional view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 [5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 1. Copier installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 2. Cautions on handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 3. Checking packed components and accessories. . . . . . 5-1 4. Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5. Removing protective packing materials . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 6. Developer unit installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 7. Toner cartridge installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 8. Loading paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 9. Power to copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 10. Software (AR-203E/M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 A. Before installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 B. Installing the software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 C. Setting up Button Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 11. Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 A. USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 12. Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 13. Scanner moisture-proof kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 A. Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 B. Precautions at installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 C. Attachment method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 [6] COPY PROCESS 1. Functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 2. Outline of print process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 3. Actual print process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 [8] [7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 1. Outline of operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 2. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 A. Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 B. Optical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 C. Drive system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 3. Laser unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 A. Basic structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 B. Laser beam path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 C. Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 4. Fuser section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 A. General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 5. Paper feed section and paper transport section . . . . . . 7-4 A. Paper transport path and general operations . . . . . . 7-4 6. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/ document transport (Duplex model) (AR-M201 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 A. Initial state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 B. Front copy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 C. Back copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 7. Shifter (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 1. High voltage section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 B. Drum replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 C. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 D. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 E. Charger wire cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 F. Charger wire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 2. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 3. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 4. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 5. Tray paper feed/transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 6. Manual paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 D. Pressure plate holder attachment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 7. Rear frame section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Power section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION 1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 A. Overall block diagram (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . 13-1 B. Overall block diagram (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . 13-2 2. Actual wiring diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 A. MCU PWB (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 B. MCU PWB (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 C. SPF unit (AR-203E optional only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 D. RSPF unit (AR-M200/M201 optional only) . . . . . . . 13-5 E. 2nd cassette unit (AR-203E/M200/M201 optional only) . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 F. Network box and FAX (AR-M200/M201 optional only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 3. Signal name list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 4. Circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 A. MCU PWB (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 B. MCU PWB (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 C. OPE PWB (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37 D. OPERATION PWB (AR-M200/M201). . . . . . . . . . 13-38 [14] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 1. Initial setting (Serial number setting procedures) . . . . 14-1 2. Download procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 3. Version acquisition procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 4. EEPROM data acquisition procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 5. Installing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
9. DV unit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 A. Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 B. DV seal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 C. DV blade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 D. DV doctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 E. DV sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 10. Duplex motor section (AR-M201 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 11. Reverse roller section (AR-M201 only). . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 A. List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 B. Disassembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 C. Assembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22 [9] ADJUSTMENTS 1. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 B. Image position adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 2. Copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 A. Copy density adjustment timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 B. Note for copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment . . . . . . . 9-4 D. Features of copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 E. Copy density adjustment procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 3. High voltage adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 A. Main charger (Grid bias). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 B. DV bias check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 4. Duplex adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory for duplex copying (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy mode (AR-M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 5. Automatic black level correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 [10] SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 1. Entering the simulation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 2. Key rule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 3. List of simulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 4. Descriptions of various simulations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 5. Trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 A. Trouble codes list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 B. Details of trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 [11] MAINTENANCE 1. Maintenance table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 2. Maintenance display system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 3. Remaining toner indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 [12] USER PROGRAM 1. Functions that can be set with user programs . . . . . . 12-1 2. Toner save mode (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 3. User programs (AR-203E/5420) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 4. User programs (AR-M200/M201) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 A. Copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 B. Print mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
[1] GENERAL
1. Major functions
Configurations
Item CPM (A4) PPM (A4) SB/ MB MB MB MB MB 2 Tray SPF R-SPF Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt (2.0 Hi) Color GDI SPLC EDuplex Shifter Scanner printer printer SORT (2.0 full) (2.0 Hi) AR-M201 20CPM 20PPM Opt Opt USB RJ45 FAX Opt External NIC Opt
Model AR-203E 20CPM 15PPM

AR-5420 20CPM AR-M200 20CPM 20PPM
Descriptions of items
CPM: PPM: SB/MB: 2 Tray: SPF: R-SPF: Color Scanner: GDI printer: SPLC printer: E-SORT: Duplex: Shifter: USB: RJ45: FAX: External NIC: : : Copy speed (Copies Per Minute) Print speed (Print Per Minute) SB = Manual feed single bypass, MB = Manual feed multi-bypass Second cassette unit (AR-D33) Original feed unit (AR-SP9) Duplex original feed unit (AR-RP9) Color scanner function GDI printer function with USB. SPLC printer function with USB. Electronic sort function Auto duplex copy/print function Job separator function Interface port (USB) Interface port (Network) FAX function (AR-FX13) AR-NB2A
AR-203E/AR-5420 AR-M200/AR-M201
(Options)
AR-RP9
Descriptions of table
Standard provision No function or no option available
AR-D33
Opt: Option
AR-SP9
AR-NB2A
AR-FX13
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 GENERAL 1 - 1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic Specifications
Item Type Copy system Segment (class) Copier dimensions Weight (Approximately) Desktop Dry, electrostatic Digital personal copier AR-203E/5420: 518mm (W) x 445mm (D) x 298mm (H) (20-1/2" (W) x 17-5/8" (D) x 11-3/4" (H)) AR-M200/M201: 518mm (W) x 452mm (D) x 298mm (H) (20-1/2" (W) x 17-7/8" (D) x 11-3/4" (H)) AR-203E/5420: 16.6kg (36.5 lbs.) Toner cartridge not included AR-M200: 19.8kg (43.7 lbs.) AR-M201: 20.5kg (45.2 lbs.)
2. Operation specifications
Paper feed section Section, item Paper feed system AB system Tray paper feed section Details Paper size Paper weight Paper feed capacity Kinds Remark Paper size Paper weight Paper feed capacity Kinds Remark Paper size Paper weight Paper feed capacity Kinds Remark Paper size Paper weight Paper feed capacity Kinds Remark Paper exit section Originals Exit way Capacity of output tray Original set Max. original size Original kinds Original size detection Scanning system CCD sensor Lighting lamp 1 tray (250 sheets) + multi-bypass (50 sheets) A4, B5, A5 (Landscape) 56 - 80g/m2 250 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper User adjustment of paper guide available A4, B5, A5, B6, A6 (Landscape) 56 - 128g/m2 50 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP, Label, Envelop (Single copy) User adjustment of paper guide available 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2" (Landscape) 15 - 21 lbs. 250 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper User adjustment of paper guide available 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2", 3-1/2" x 5-1/2" (Landscape) 15 - 34.5 lbs. 50 sheets Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP, Label, Envelop (Single copy) User adjustment of paper guide available Face down 200 sheets Center Registration (left edge) A4 (8-1/2" x 14") sheet, book None 3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp 600 dpi CCFL 560Vrms 2.8W Output: R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel / Input: A/D 16 bits (12 bits actual) Writing to OPC drum by the semiconductor laser 600 dpi OPC (30) 25K Saw-tooth charging with a grid, / (-) scorotron discharge (+) DC corotron system (-) DC corotron system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development system Counter blade system (Counter to rotation)
Multi-bypass paper feed section
Inch system
Tray paper feed section
Multi-bypass paper feed section
Optical section
Scanning section
Resolution Type Voltage Power consumption
Output data Writing section Image forming Writing system Laser unit Photoconductor Charger
Developing Cleaning
Resolution Type Life Charging system Transfer system Separation system Developing system Cleaning system
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 1
Fusing section
Section, item Fusing system Upper heat roller Lower heat roller Heater lamp
Details Type Type Type Voltage Power consumption Voltage Frequency Max. Average (during copying) Average (stand-by) Pre-heat mode Auto power shut-off mode Heat roller system Teflon roller Silicon rubber roller Halogen lamp 220 - 240V / 120V 800W 220 - 240V / 120V Common use for 50 and 60Hz Less than 1000W AR-203E/5420: 350Wh/H or less AR-M200/ M201: 380Wh/H or less 80Wh/H AR-203E/5420: 25Wh/H or less AR-M200/ M201: 28Wh/H or less AR-203E/5420: 8.8W or less AR-M200/ M201: 12.5W or less
Electrical section
Power source Power consumption
3. Copy performance
Section, item Copy magnification Fixed magnification ratios Details AR-203E/5420: 3 Reduction + 2 Enlargement (AB system: 50, 70, 86, 100, 141, 200%) (Inch system: 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200%) AR-M200/M201: *1 4 Reduction + 3 Enlargement (AB system: 25, 50, 70, 86, 100, 141, 200, 400%) (Inch system: 25, 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200, 400%) 25 - 400% (376 steps in 1% increments) 50 - 200% when using SPF (151 steps in 1% increments) 5 steps AR-203E/5420: 8.0 seconds (When user program 24 is set to OFF) 10.7 seconds (When user program 24 is set to ON) AR-M200/M201: 8.0 seconds (paper: A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), exposure mode: AUTO, copy ratio: 100%) 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 99 1 - 4mm 4mm or less 0.5mm or more (per side) 4.5mm or less (total of both sides) same size: 3.0mm or less (OC) / 4mm or less (SPF) Enlarge: 1.5mm or less (OC) / 3mm or less (SPF) Reduction (50%): 6.0mm or less (OC) / 8mm or less (SPF) 0 sec. Immediately the ready lamp is lit. 0 sec. Immediately the ready lamp is lit. 0 sec. Jam recovery condition: Recovery time from 60 sec of door open.
Zooming magnification ratios Manual steps (manual, photo) Copy speed First-copy time *2 (Approximately)
AB system A4 (Landscape) AB system B5 (Landscape) Inch system 8-1/2" x 11" (Landscape) Max. continuous copy quantity Void
Copy speed (CPM) Copy speed (CPM) Copy speed (CPM)
Same size Enlargement Reduction Same size Enlargement Reduction Same size Enlargement Reduction Leading edge Trailing edge Side edge void area Leading edge
Void area
Image loss
Warm-up time Power save mode reset time Paper jam recovery time
*1: If a value greater than 200% or smaller than 50% is selected when the RSPF is used, the magnification ratio is automatically set to 200% or 50%. *2: The first-copy time is measured after the power save indicator turns off following power on, using the document glass with the polygon rotating in the copy ready state and "Selection of copy start state" set to ON in the user programs (A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), paper fed from paper tray). The first-copy time may vary depending on machine operating conditions and ambient conditions such as temperature.
4. GDI printer (AR-203E only)

Print speed Duplex Memory Interface Emulation Resolution Supported OS WHQL support *1: Engine Resolution *2: By running change Max. 15ppm (excluding bypass tray, paper size A4, 8.5" x 11") (Variable depending on the PC performance) No 8MB USB 2.0 (Full speed) GDI 600dpi *1 Win 98 / Me / 2000 / XP / Vista Yes *2
5. SPLC printer (AR-M200/M201)

Print speed First print time Duplex ROPM Memory Interface Network Emulation MIB support Resolution Supported OS WHQL support Application *1: Engine Resolution *2: Running change Max. 20ppm (Paper size: A4, excluding manual paper feed)
Varies depending on the PC performance.
8 sec. (without data transfer time) Yes (AR-M201 only) Yes 64MB USB2.0 (Hi Speed) Option: Network expansion kit the AR-NB2A SPLC (JBIG GDI) No 600dpi *1 Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home Edition/Professional, Windows Vista Yes *2 Status window
6. Scan function (AR-203E/M200/M201)

Type Scanning system Light source Resolution Originals Output data Scan range Flat Bed Color Scanner Original table/SPF/RSPF 3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp (2 pcs of CCFL) Optical: 600 x 1200dpi Setting range: 50 - 9600dpi (Preview resolution is fixed at 75dpi) Sheet type / Book type R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel A/D 16 bits (12 bits actual) OC/SPF/RSPF: 216mm (H) x 356mm (V) (8.5" (H) x 14.0" (V)) Original position: Left Center SPF/RSPF position: Right Center OC/SPF: Max. 2.88ms/line TWAIN / WIA (Only XP, Vista) / STI AR-203E: USB2.0 (Full speed support) AR-M200/M201: USB2.0 (Hi speed support) Button Manager / Sharpdesk / Composer Yes Yes only when the RSPF is installed (AR-M200/M201) Win 98 / Me / 2000 / XP / Vista No Yes *1
Scan speed Protocol Interface Scanner utility Scan key/lamp Duplex scan Supported OS Void area WHQL supported *1: By running change
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS

1. Supply system table
A. Europe Subsidiary (AR-203E/5420/M200/M201), SCA/SCNZ (AR-203E/M201)
No. 1 Name Toner cartridge (Black) Developer Content Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g) Polyethylene bag Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g) 10 10 10 Life 80K (8K x 10Pcs) 250K (25K x 10Pcs) 25K Product name AR-208LT (A4 6% document) AR-208LD Packing form One carton of the AR-208LT includes 10 toner cartridges. One carton of the AR-208LD includes 10 developers. One carton of the collective package includes 10 units of the AR-152DM.
Drum kit
Drum Drum fixing plate
1 1
AR-152DM
B. Asia Subsidiary (AR-203E/M201)

No. 1 Name Toner cartridge (Black) Developer Content Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g) Polyethylene bag Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g) 10 10 10 Life 80K (8K x 10Pcs) 250K (25K x 10Pcs) 25K Product name AR-208CT (A4 6% document) AR-208CD Packing form One carton of the AR-208CT includes 10 toner cartridges. One carton of the AR-208CD includes 10 developers. One carton of the collective package includes 10 units of the AR-152DR.
Drum kit
1 1
AR-152DR
C. SMEF/Distributor (AR-203E/M201)
No. 1 Name Toner cartridge (Black) Developer Content Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g) Polyethylene bag Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g) 10 10 10 Life 80K (8K x 10Pcs) 250K (25K x 10Pcs) 25K Product name AR-208ET (A4 6% document) AR-208CD Packing form One carton of the AR-208ET includes 10 toner cartridges. One carton of the AR-208CD includes 10 developers. One carton of the collective package includes 10 units of the AR-152DR.
Drum kit
1 1
AR-152DR
D. SRH (AR-203E/M201)
No. 1 Name Toner cartridge (Black) Developer Content Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g) Polyethylene bag Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g) 10 10 10 Life 80K (8K x 10Pcs) 250K (25K x 10Pcs) 25K Product name AR-208CT-C (A4 6% document) AR-208CD-C Packing form One carton of the AR-208CT-C includes 10 toner cartridges. One carton of the AR-208CD-C includes 10 developers. One carton of the collective package includes 10 units of the AR-152DR-C.
Drum kit
1 1
AR-152DR-C
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 1
2. Environmental
The environmental conditions for assuring the copy quality and the machine operations are as follows:
3. Production control number (lot No.) identification

<Toner cartridge>
(1)
Normal operating condition

Production month Production day Destination code (Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.) Production place (SOCC: Fixed to B.) End digit of year Version No.
Temperature: 20 - 25C Humidity: 65 5%RH
(2)
Acceptable operating condition
Humidity (RH) 85% 60%

<Drum cartridge>
The label on the drum cartridge shows the date of production. (SOCC production)
20%
10C
(3) Transport condition
30C
35C
Production month Production day Destination code (Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.) Production place (SOCC: Fixed to B.) End digit of year Version No.
Humidity (RH) 90% 60%
15%
25C
(4) Supply storage condition
30C
40C
Humidity (RH) 90%
Production control label attachment position
20%
5C
45C
Production control label attachment position(*1)
*1: The production control label is not attached to the cartridge of a China product.
<Developer>
Sub lot Production day Production month End digit of year Production place
4. Toner cartridge replacement

1) Open the front and side cabinets of the copier. 2) Keep holding Toner lever, and 3) Carefully pull out Toner unit from the copier.
3 1
4) Put Toner unit in a collection bag immediately after removing it from the copier
Note: Never carry exposed Toner unit. Be sure to put it in the collection bag.
[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES

1. Appearance
Interface Interface
1 USB connector (AR-203E) 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 6

1 4 7 10 13 Original cover Front cover Side cover Paper output tray Handle 2 5 8 11 14 Document glass Paper tray Side cover open button Paper output tray extension Power cord 3 6 9 12 Operation panel Multi-bypass tray Bypass tray paper guides Power switch
USB connector (AR-M200/M201)
2. Internal
Toner cartridge Drum cartridge
2 3
4 5
1 4
Front cover Transfer charger
2 5
Side cover Charger cleaner
Fusing unit release lever
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 1
3. Operation panel
A. AR-203E/5420
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14
1 Exposure mode selector key and indicators Use to sequentially select the exposure modes: AUTO, MANUAL or PHOTO. Selected mode is shown by a lit indicator. Alarm indicators Developer replacement required indicator Misfeed indicator Toner cartridge replacement required indicator *1 Maintenance indicator SPF misfeed indicator (AR-203E only)
15
2
16
17
Light and dark keys and indicators Use to adjust the MANUAL or PHOTO exposure level. Selected exposure level is shown by a lit indicator. Use to start and terminate user program setting. SPF indicator (AR-203E only)
9 11
Copy ratio display (%) key Use to verify a zoom setting without changing the zoom ratio. Use to check the number of originals that must be returned to the document feeder tray if an original misfeed occurs while using the SPF. SCAN key and indicator (AR-203E only) *2, *3 Start key and indicator Copying is possible when the indicator is on. Press to start copying Use to set a user program. Tray select key Use to select a paper feed station (paper tray or multi-bypass tray). ZOOM keys and indicator Use to select any reduction or enlargement copy ratio from 25% to 400% in 1% increments. (When the SPF is being used, the zoom copy ratio range is 50% to 200%.) Clear key Press to clear the display, or press during a copy run to terminate copying. Press and hold down during standby to display the total number of copies made to date. When toner density is lower than a specified level, the toner cartridge replacement indicator lights up to warn the user. If the toner cartridge is not replaced in that time, the ready lamp changes to blinking and then start to supply the toner after around 10 copies. (Cartridge replacement lamp continues to light.) If toner density is not back to specific level after two minutes, the ready indicator goes out and toner developer indicator starts blinking, and the copier stops. Also when the toner quantity is insufficient, the lamp is lighted.
Copy ratio selector key and indicators Use to sequentially select preset reduction/enlargement copy ratios. Selected copy ratio is shown by a lit indicator. Display Displays the specified copy quantity, zoom copy ratio, user program code, and error code.
10 12
ONLINE key and indicator (AR-203E only) Lights up when the unit is used as a printer and scanner. *2 Power save indicator Lights up when the unit is in a power save mode.
13
14
Paper feed location indicators Light up to show the selected paper feed station. Copy quantity keys Use to select the desired copy quantity (1 to 99). Use to make user program entries.
15
16
17
*1: Toner cartridge replacement
Start indicator On: Indicates the unit is ready for copying or scanning is being performed. Blinking: The indicator blinks in the following situations: When a print job is interrupted. When reserving a copy job. When toner is being replenished during a copy or print job. Off: The indicator is off in the following situations: During copying or scanning. The unit is in the auto power shut-off mode. When a misfeed or error has occurred. ONLINE indicator The ONLINE key is pressed and on line and off line are changed. On: Indicates the unit is ready for printing or scanning is being performed. (On line) Blinking: Printing or data is being received from a computer. Off: Copying is being performed. (Off line)
*2: Indicators on the operation panel The ONLINE indicator and the start ( state of the printer or scanner.
SCAN indicator ONLINE indicator
) indicator indicate the
Start indicator Power save indicator
Power save indicator On: Indicates the unit is in a power save mode. Blinking: Indicates that the unit is initializing (when the side cover is opened and closed or the power turned off and on). SCAN indicator On: The SCAN ( ) key has been pressed and the unit is in scanner mode. Blinking: A scan job is being executed from the computer, or scan data is stored in the units memory. Off: The unit is in the copy mode. *3: Using the SCAN key to begin scanning Note: Scanning is not possible during a copy job. If the SCAN ( ) key is pressed during a print job, the scan job will be stored. When scanning an original that has been placed in the SPF, only one original can be placed unless you are using Sharpdesk. 1) Press the SCAN ( ) key. The unit enters scan mode.
2) Place the original you wish to scan on the document glass/ SPF. 3) Press the right copy quantity key to display the number of the application that you wish to use for scanning. The application numbers are initially as follows.
Application number SC2 SC3 SC4 SC5 SC6
Application launched E-mail (your standard e-mail program in the Windows OS you are using) Fax (if a fax program is installed) OCR (if an OCR program is installed) Microsoft Word (if installed) Filing (if a Filing program is installed) ) key.
4) Press the start (
Scanning will start and the scanned data will be transferred to the application.
B. AR-M200/M201
For Europe
Display
READY TO COPY. 100% A4 0
1 2 2
1 2 1
2 1
18
19
20
21
6 7
For SCA/SCNZ/Asia
8 9 10 11
12 13 14
15
16
17
Display
READY TO COPY. 100% A4 0
18
19
20
21
6 7
8 9 10 11
12 13 14
15
16
17
[MODE SELECT] key / Mode indicators Press this key to select the mode. The indicator of the selected mode lights (copy, printer, scanner, fax indicators). Numeric keys Use these to enter the number of copies and other numerical settings. The keys can also be used to select items in function setting menus. Power save indicator This lights up when the power save function is activated. Error indicator This lights steadily or blinks when a paper misfeed or other error occurs. Tray location indicator Indicates the selected paper tray. The indicator blinks when the tray is out of paper during operation or is not closed properly. [2-SIDED SCAN] key ( ) [2-SIDED COPY] key ( ) Press to select the automatic two-sided copying mode. [ ] key ( ), [ ] key ( ), [OK]/[ENTER] key Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to select an item in a function setting menu.
2 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1
Display This shows messages indicating the machine status and any problems that occur, as well as user programs and function setting menus. [CLEAR] key ( ) Use this to clear the set number of copies, as well as cancel a job that is in progress. When a setting menu appears, use this key to move back to the previous menu level. RSPF indicator This lights up when an original is placed in the RSPF. [TRAY SELECT] key ( ) Use to select the paper tray that has the desired paper for copying. [MENU] key Press this key to select the paper size for copying, to configure a user program or to display the total count. [E-SORT/SP.FUNC] key ( ) Press to select the sort function, 2 IN 1 copy function, or margin shift function. [EXPOSURE] key ( ) Use to switch from auto exposure adjustment to text mode or photo mode. [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) This returns all functions to the default settings. When pressed in a setting menu, this returns the settings and display to the initial state.
5 7
6 8
10
11
12
13
14
15
Press the [OK]/[ENTER] key to enter a selection. [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key Press to select an enlargement or reduction ratio. To select a preset ratio setting, press the [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key and select the desired preset ratio. To select a ratio that is not preset, press the [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key, select the preset ratio that is closest to the desired ratio, and then press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to increase or decrease the ratio in increments of 1%. [START] key ( ) / Ready indicator The ready indicator lights up when copying or scanning is possible. To begin copying, press the [START] key ( ). The [START] key ( ) is also pressed to return to normal operation from auto power shut-off mode. Shows the selected paper size. A checkmark " " appears when the exposure has been changed, or when two-sided copying, sort, 2 IN 1, or margin shift is selected.
16
17
18
Shows the current copy ratio.
19 21
20
Shows the number of copies that has been entered with the numeric keys.
4. Motors and solenoids
9 6
8
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Part name Main motor Scanner motor Toner motor Cooling fan motor Resist roller solenoid Paper feed solenoid Multi paper feed solenoid Duplex motor Shifter motor Control signal MM MRMT TM VFM RRS CPFS1 MPFS DMT SFTM
Function / Operation Drives the copier. Drives the optical mirror base (scanner unit). Supplies toner. Cools the optical, fusing section. Resist roller rotation control solenoid Cassette Paper feed solenoid 1 Multi manual pages feed solenoid Devices the duplex paper transport section (AR-M201 only) Drives the shifter. (AR-M200/M201)
5. Sensors and switches
4 5
7
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name Scanner unit home position sensor POD sensor PPD2 sensor Cassette detection switch PD1 sensor (AR-M200/M201) PPD1 sensor Door switch Signal MHPS POD PPD2 CED1 PD1 PPD1 DSW Type Transmission sensor Transmission sensor Transmission sensor Micro-switch Micro-switch Transmission sensor Micro-switch Function Scanner unit home position detection Paper exit detection Paper transport detection 2 Cassette installation detection Paper width detect Paper transport detection 1 Door open/close detection (safety switch for 24V) Output "H" at home position "H" at paper pass "L" at paper pass "H" at cassette insertion "H" at A4 size or less "L" at A4 size or more "L" at paper pass 1 or 0V of 24V at door open
6. PWB unit
5 1
2 11
9 6
10 4 3 7
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Name Exposure lamp invertor PWB Main PWB (MCU) Operation PWB High voltage PWB CCD sensor PWB LSU motor PWB TCS PWB LSU PWB FAX-operation PWB Power PWB Modem PWB Function Exposure lamp (CCFL) control Copier control Operation input/display High voltage control For image scanning For polygon motor drive For toner sensor control For laser control FAX operation input (AR-FX13 option) AC power input, DC voltage control FAX control (AR-FX13 option)
7. Cross sectional view

1 2 4 3 16 5
15
6 7 8 9 10
14
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Part name Scanner unit Exposure lamp LSU (Laser unit) Paper exit roller Shifter roller Main charger Heat roller Pressure roller Drum Transfer unit Pickup roller Manual paper feed tray Manual paper feed roller PS roller unit Paper feed roller Paper transport roller Paper transport roller 2
13
12
11
Function and operation Illuminates the original with the copy lamp and passes the reflected light to the lens unit (CCD). Exposure lamp (CCFL) Illuminates original Converts the original image signal into laser beams and writes onto the drum. Roller for paper exit (AR-203E/5420) Transports and shifts paper in the back-forth direction of the machine. (AR-M200/M201) Provides negative charges evenly to the drum surface. Fuses toner on the paper. (Teflon roller) Fuses toner on the paper. (Silicon rubber roller) Forms images. Transfers images onto the drum. Picks up the manual feed paper. (In multi feed only) Tray for manual feed paper Transport the paper from the manual paper feed port. Takes synchronization between the lead edge and the rear edge of the paper. Picks up a sheet of paper from the cassette. Transports of a paper. Transports of a paper. (AR-M200/M201)
[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

1. Copier installation
Improper installation may damage the copier. Please note the following during initial installation and whenever the copier is moved. Caution: If the copier is moved from a cool place to a warm place, condensation may form inside the copier. Operation in this condition will cause poor copy quality and malfunctions. Leave the copier at room temperature for at least 2 hours before use. Do not install your copier in areas that are: damp, humid, or very dusty
2. Cautions on handling
Be careful in handling the copier as follows to maintain the performance of this copier. Do not drop the copier, subject it to shock or strike it against any object.
Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct sunlight. exposed to direct sunlight Doing so will damage the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge, causing poor print quality.
poorly ventilated Store spare supplies such as drum cartridges and toner cartridges in a dark place without removing from the package before use. If they are exposed to direct sunlight, poor print quality may result. Do not touch the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge. Doing so will damage the surface of the cartridge, causing poor print quality. subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes, e.g., near an air conditioner or heater.
3. Checking packed components and accessories

Open the carton and check if the following components and accessories are included.
The copier should be installed near an accessible power outlet for easy connection. Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets the specified voltage and current requirements. Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded. Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for servicing and proper ventilation.
Operation manual
Software CD-ROM
20cm (8")
20cm (8")
Drum cartridge (installed in unit)
10cm (4")
10cm (4")
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 1
4. Unpacking
Be sure to hold the handles on both sides of the unit to unpack the unit and carry it to the installation location.
2) Remove the CAUTION tape from the front cover and remove the two protective pins from the fusing unit by pulling the strings upward one at a time.
Protective pins CAUTION tape

3) Push gently on both sides of the front cover to open the cover.
5. Removing protective packing materials

1) Remove all pieces of tape shown in the illustration below. Then open the original cover and remove protective materials.
4) Remove the locking tape of the developer unit. 5) Remove the screw which is fixing the copier and Developer unit. 6) Remove Developer unit slowly from the copier. 2) Release the scan head locking switch. The scan head locking switch is under the document glass. If the switch is locked ( ), the unit will not operate. Unlock the switch ( ) as shown below.
Grasp here and turn in the direction of the arrow.
5 3
(A)
Lock
Unlock
To lock the scan head locking switch, hold up the catch in illustration (A) and turn the center knob counter-clockwise 90 degrees until you hear a click.
4
7) Remove the screw (1 pc). 8) Remove Upper developer unit.
6. Developer unit installation

1) Open the multi-bypass tray, and then open the side cover.
9) Shake the aluminum bag to stir developer. 10) Supply developer from the aluminum bag to the top of the MX roller evenly.
7. Toner cartridge installation

1) To prevent against uneven distribution of toner, hold Toner unit with both hands and shake it several times horizontally.
2) Hold the section of Toner unit shown in the figure below, remove the packing tape, and remove the cushion. 3) Pull out the cushion in the arrow direction.
Note: Be careful not to splash developer outside Developer unit. 11) Attach Upper developer unit and fix it with a screw. 12) Rotate the MG roller gear to distribute developer evenly.
4) Insert Toner unit carefully into the copier. 5) Insert until the hook is engaged with the copier as shown in the figure below.
Note: Never rotate the gear in the reverse direction. Note: When carrying Developer unit, do not tilt it extremely as shown with the arrow in the figure below. (Prevention of splash of developer)
6) Pull out the shutter in the arrow direction.
13) Insert Developer unit carefully into the copier. Note: Quick insertion may result in splash of developer. Be sure to insert carefully. 14) Confirm that Developer unit is completely inserted to the bottom of the machine, fix Developer unit and the machine with a screw. 15) Completion of Developer unit installation Note: Do not hold and carry the shutter. Otherwise the shutter may drop and Toner unit may drop. 7) Completion of Toner unit installation Close the front and side cabinets.
8. Loading paper
1) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out until it stops.
10. Software (AR-203E/M200/M201)

The CD-ROM that accompanies the machine contains the following software:
MFP driver
Printer driver The printer driver enables you to use the printer function of the machine. 2) Remove the pressure plate lock. Rotate the pressure plate lock in the direction of the arrow to remove it while pressing down the pressure plate of the paper tray. The printer driver includes the Print Status Window. This is a utility that monitors the machine and informs you of the printing status, the name of the document currently being printed, and error messages. Please note that the Print Status Window does not operate when the machine is used as a network printer. Scanner driver* The scanner driver allows you to use the scanning function of the machine with TWAIN-compliant and WIA-compliant applications.
Sharpdesk* (Excluding AR-203E X)

3) Store the pressure plate lock which has been removed in step 2). To store the pressure plate lock, rotate the lock to fix it on the relevant location. Sharpdesk is an integrated software environment that makes it easy to manage documents and image files, and launch applications.
Button Manager*
Button Manager allows you to use the scanner menus on the machine to scan a document. *: The scanning feature can only be used with computers that are connected to the machine by a USB cable.
Pressure plate lock
A. Before installation
Hardware and software requirements
4) Adjust the paper guides on the paper tray to the copy paper width and length. Squeeze the lever of paper guide (A) and slide the guide to match with the width of the paper. Move paper guide (B) to the appropriate slot as marked on the tray. Check the following hardware and software requirements in order to install the software. Computer type Operating system*2 *3 Display Hard disk free space Other hardware requirements IBM PC/AT or compatible computer equipped with a USB 2.0/1.1*1 Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional*4, Windows XP Professional*4, Windows XP Home Edition*4, Windows Vista*4 1024 x 768 dots (XGA) display with 16bit 150 MB or more An environment on which any of the operating systems listed above can fully operate
Paper guide (B) Paper guide (A)

5) Fan the paper and insert it into the tray. Make sure the edges go under the corner hooks. Note: Do not load paper above the maximum height line ( Exceeding the line will cause a paper misfeed. ).
*1: Compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Home Edition or Windows Vista preinstalled model standardly equipped with a USB port. *2: Printing is not available in MS-DOS mode. *3: The machine does not support printing from a Macintosh environment. *4: Administrator's rights are required to install the software using the installer.
Installation environment and usable software

The following table shows the drivers and software that can be installed for each version of Windows and interface connection method. Cable 6) Gently push the paper tray back into the unit. USB Operating Printer Scanner Button Sharpdesk system driver driver Manager 1 Windows 98/ Available* Available Me/2000/XP/ Vista
9. Power to copier
Ensure that the power switch of the unit is in the OFF position. Plug the other end of the power cord into the nearest outlet. Turn the power switch on the left side of the unit to the "ON" position. The start ( ) indicator will light up and other indicators which show the initial settings of the operation panel will also light up to indicate the ready condition.
*1: The printer driver that is installed will vary depending on the type of connection between the machine and your computer. Install the software according to the Operation Manual.
B. Installing the software

Note: The screen images in this manual are mainly for Windows XP. With other versions of Windows, some screen images may be different from those in this manual. In the following explanations it is assumed that the mouse is configured for right hand operation. If an error message appears, follow the instructions on the screen to solve the problem. After the problem is solved, the installation procedure will continue. Depending on the problem, you may have to click the "Cancel" button to exit the installer. In this case, reinstall the software from the beginning after solving the problem. 1) The USB cable must not be connected to the machine. Make sure that the cable is not connected before proceeding. If the cable is connected, a Plug and Play window will appear. If this happens, click the "Cancel" button to close the window and disconnect the cable. Note: The cable will be connected in step 13). 2) Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's CD-ROM drive. 3) Click the "start" button, click "My Computer", and then doubleclick the CD-ROM icon. In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, click "Computer", and then double-click the CD-ROM icon. In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click "My Computer", and then double-click the CD-ROM icon. 4) Double-click the "setup" icon. In Windows Vista, if a message screen appears asking you for confirmation, click "Allow". 5) The "SOFTWARE LICENSE" window will appear. Make sure that you understand the contents of the software license, and then click the "Yes" button. Note: You can show the "SOFTWARE LICENSE" in a different language by selecting the desired language from the language menu. To install the software in the selected language, continue the installation with that language selected. 6) Read the "Readme First" in the "Welcome" window and then click the "Next" button. 7) To install all of the software, click the "Standard" button and go to step 12). To install particular packages, click the "Custom" button and go to next step.
8) Click the "MFP Driver" button. Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on packages that are selected.
9) Select "Connected to this computer" and click the "Next" button. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Caution: If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway". If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes". 10) You will return to the window of step 8). If you wish to install Button Manager or Sharpdesk, click the "Utility Software" button. If you do not wish to install the Utility Software, click the "Close" button and go to step 12). Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer.
Installing the Utility Software 11) Click the "Button Manager" or the "Sharpdesk" button. Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on packages that are selected. Follow the on-screen instructions.
14) Follow the instructions in the plug and play window to install the driver. Follow the on-screen instructions. Caution: If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway". If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes". This completes the installation of the software. If you installed Button Manager, set up Button Manager as explained in "C. Setting up Button Manager". If you installed Sharpdesk, the Sharpdesk setup screen will appear. Follow the instructions in the screen to set up Sharpdesk.
(1)
Connecting a USB cable
Follow the procedure below to connect the machine to your computer. A USB cable for connecting the machine to your computer is not included with the machine. Please purchase the appropriate cable for your computer. Caution: Caution: In Windows 98/Me/2000, if the following screen appears, click the "Skip" button or the "Continue" button as appropriate to continue the Sharpdesk installation. If "Skip" is selected, the Sharpdesk installation will continue without installing Sharpdesk Imaging. If "Continue" is selected, Sharpdesk Imaging will be installed. If Imaging for Windows is installed on your computer, Sharpdesk Imaging will overwrite Imaging for Windows. USB is available with a PC/AT compatible computer that was originally equipped with USB and had Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP or Windows Vista preinstalled. Do not connect the USB cable before installing the printer driver. The USB cable should be connected during installation of the printer driver. Note If the machine will be connected using a USB 2.0 port of your computer, please purchase a USB cable that supports USB 2.0. To obtain the fastest USB 2.0 data transfer speed, "USB2.0 MODE SWITCH" in the machine's user programs must be set to "HI-SPEED". For more information, see "[12] USER PROGRAM". (AR-M200/M201 only) Use the machine's "HI-SPEED" mode only when using a computer that is running Windows 2000/XP/Vista. Even when the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver is used, it may not be possible to obtain full USB 2.0 speed if a PC card supporting USB 2.0 is used. To obtain the latest driver (which may enable a higher speed), contact the manufacturer of your PC card. 12) When installing is finished, click the "Close" button. Caution: If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway". If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes". A message will appear instructing you to connect the machine to your computer. Click the "OK" button. Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer. 13) Make sure that the power of the machine is turned on, and then connect the USB cable. Windows will detect the machine and a Plug and Play screen will appear. Connection is also possible using a USB 1.1 port on your computer. However, the specifications will be USB 1.1 specifications (FullSpeed). 1) Insert the cable into the USB connector on the machine.
(AR-203E)
(AR-M200/M201)
2) Insert the other end of the cable into your computer's USB port.
(2)
Using the machine as a shared printer (AR-203E/M200/M201)
5) Click the "Add Network Port" button. In Windows Vista, the "Add Network Port" button does not appear.
If the machine will be used as a shared printer on a network, follow these steps to install the printer driver in the client computer. Note: To configure the appropriate settings in the print server, see the operation manual or help file of your operating system. 1) Perform steps 2) through 6) in "Installing the software". 2) Click the "Custom" button.
6) Select the network printer that is shared and click the "OK" button. Ask your network administrator for the server name and printer name of the machine on the network.
3) Click the "MFP Driver" button. Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on packages that are selected.
7) In the printer port selection window, verify the network printer that is shared and whether the machine is to be used as the default printer, make the selections and click the "Next" button. Follow the on-screen instructions. Caution: If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway". If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes". 4) Select "Connected via the network" and click the "Next" button. 8) You will return to the window of step 3). Click the "Close" button. Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" button to restart your computer. This completes the installation of the software.
C. Setting up Button Manager

Button Manager is a software program that works with the scanner driver to enable scanning from the machine. To scan using the machine, Button Manager must be linked with the scan menu on the machine. Follow the steps below to link Button Manager to scanner events.
(1)
Windows XP/Vista
1) Click the "start" button, click "Control Panel", click "Printers and Other Hardware", and then click "Scanners and Cameras". In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, select "Control Panel" and click "Hardware and Sound", and then click "Scanners and Cameras".
2) Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" icon and select "Properties" from the "File" menu. In Windows Vista, select "Properties" from the "Organize" menu. 3) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab. 4) Select "SC1:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu.
(2)
Windows 98/Me/2000
1) Click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and then click "Control Panel". 2) Double-click the "Scanners and Cameras" icon. Note: If the "Scanners and Cameras" icon does not appear in Windows Me, click "view all Control Panel options". 3) Select "SHARP AR-XXXX" and click the "Properties" button. In Windows Me, right click "SHARP AR-XXXX" and click "Properties" in the pop-up menu. 4) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab. 5) Select "SC1:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu.
5) Select "Start this program" and then select "Sharp Button Manager T" (AR-203E) or "Sharp Button Manager S" (AR-M200/ M201) from the pull-down menu.
6) Select "Sharp Button Manager T / S" in "Send to this application".
6) Click the "Apply" button. 7) Repeat Steps 4) through 6) to link Button Manager to "SC2:" through "SC6:". Select "SC2:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu. Select "Start this program", select "Sharp Button Manager T / S" from the pull-down menu, and then click the "Apply" button. Do the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:". When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button to close the screen. Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6). The scan settings for each of scan menu 1 through 6 can be changed with the setting window of Button Manager. For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the procedures for configuring Button Manager settings, see "Button Manager Settings" in the Online Manual.
Note: If other applications are shown, deselect the checkboxes for the other applications and leave only the Button Manager checkbox selected. 7) Click the "Apply" button. 8) Repeat Steps 5) through 7) to link Button Manager to "SC2:" through "SC6:". Select "SC2:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu. Select "Sharp Button Manager T / S" in "Send to this application" and click the "Apply" button. Do the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:". When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button to close the screen. Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6). The scan settings for each of scan menus 1 through 6 can be changed with the setting window of Button Manager. For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the procedures for configuring Button Manager settings, see "Button Manager Settings" in the Online Manual.
11. Interface
A. USB
Connector
Type-B connector
13. Scanner moisture-proof kit

If the machine is installed in a highly humid environment, you can alleviate dew condensation inside the scanner by installing the scanner moisture-proof kit described below.
Cable
Shielded twisted pair cable (2 m (6 feet) Max.: high-speed transmission equivalent)
A. Components
Scanner moisture-proof kit (DKIT-0016QSZZ) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Name Scanner condensation prevention mylar Optical right hole mylar B Scanner motor metal plate cushion Scanner upper surface cushion Scanner motor lower mylar Scanner UPG mylar J3 Fan housing cushion Part code PSHEZ0493QSZZ PSHEZ0469QSZZ PMLT-0106QSZZ PMLT-0105QSZZ PSHEP0600QSZZ PSHEP0599QSZZ PMLT-0108QSZ1 Qty 3 2 2 1 1 1 1
Pin configuration
The pin numbers and signal names are listed in the following table. Pin No. 1 2 3 4 Signal name +5V -DATA +DATA GND
B. Precautions at installation
Clean the position where each cushion/mylar is attached with industrial alcohol before the work.
C. Attachment method
Turn the main switch to the "OFF" position and remove the power plug from the outlet. 1) Remove the document cover. Remove the document cover from the copier.
12. Moving
Moving instructions
When moving the unit, follow the procedure below. Note: When moving this unit, be sure to remove the toner cartridge in advance. 1) Turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the outlet. 2) Open the side cover and front cover, in that order. Remove the toner cartridge and close the front cover and side cover, in that order. To open and close the side cover and front cover, and to remove the toner cartridge. 3) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out until it stops. 4) Push the center of the pressure plate down until it locks in place and lock the plate using the pressure plate lock which has been stored in the front of the paper tray. 5) Push the paper tray back into the unit. 6) Lock the scan head locking switch. Note: When shipping the unit, the scan head locking switch must be locked to prevent shipping damage. 7) Close the multi-bypass tray and the paper output tray extension, and attach the packing materials and tape which were removed during installation of the unit. 8) Pack the unit into the carton.
2) Remove the rear cabinet. Remove the four screws and then remove the rear cabinet.
1 2
3) Remove the rear cover for the document glass. <1> Remove the two screws and then remove the right glass holder. <2> Slide the rear cover for the document glass to remove it. <3> Remove the table glass.
Attach along the edge of the projection (the yellow line in the diagram below).
5) Attach the Optical right hole mylar B at the 2 positions shown in the diagrams below which are at the top of the rear side of the main unit. Note: The holes should be covered with the mylar. 4) Attach the Scanner condensation prevention mylar at the 3 positions on the rear side of the main unit as described below. Note: The hole should be covered with the mylar. Align the edge of the mylar to the R part (the yellow line in the diagram below) so that the hole of the metal plate is covered as much as possible. Attach along the edge of the cushion (the yellow line in the diagram below). Align with the inside line of the bent part (the yellow line in the diagram below).
Stick the excessive part on the side.
Align the edge of the mylar to the R part (the yellow line in the diagram below) so that the hole of the metal plate is covered as much as possible.
Align with the raised part (the yellow line in the diagram below). Match the center of the mylar (in the horizontal direction) to the center of the raised part.
Stick the excessive part on the side.
6) Attach the Scanner motor metal plate cushion at 1 position on the attachment plate of the motor on the rear side of the main unit. Note: The hole on the top of the motor unit should be covered with the mylar. Align the edge of the metal plate and the edge of the cushion (the yellow line in the diagram below).
Bend the part which is sticking out to the rear side of the scanner and attach to the surface.
Press the cushion at the steps shown in the diagram so that there will be no gap. Press the cushion to make sure all the holes are covered. 8) Bend the edge of the Scanner motor lower mylar and stick together.
20mm - 25mm
Press and attach the cushion aligning it to the metal plate so that there will be no gap between them.
Stick together.
Stick together.
9) Attach the Scanner motor lower mylar at 1 position under the motor attachment plate on the rear side of the main unit. Note: The mylar should cover the hole under the motor unit. 7) Attach the Scanner upper surface cushion on the top and the rear side at the rear side of the main unit. Align the cushion with the side of the raised part (the yellow line in the diagram below). Attach matching the hole (the yellow mark in the diagram) and along with the side edge (the yellow arrow in the diagram). Disconnect the motor harness from the connector and take off the snap band from the hole.
Do not cover this hole.
Align the edge of the cushion with the edge of the metal plate.
Press the mylar with a sharp-pointed stick or something so that it is stuck correctly.
10) Attach the Scanner motor metal plate cushion covering the bottom part of the Scanner motor lower mylar. Note: The hole under the motor unit should be covered. Attach the cushion to cover the gap between the mylar and the metal plate (the yellow mark).
Stick the lower part of the cushion to the mylar, too.
13) Attach the Fan housing cushion to the cooling fan at the position shown in the diagram below. Cover the top and the right side of the fan housing when you see the fan housing from the backside of the machine. Note: Please make sure the double-sided tape is not exposed where the cushion is sticking out from the edge of the fan housing.
Press the cushion with a sharp-pointed stick or something to fill the gap between the mylar and the metal plate.
View from the arrow A

11) Attach the motor connector and the snap band to the original position.
Back side
Reference position Attach the cushion leaving 3 - 7mm from the edge.
12) Attach the Scanner UPG mylar J3 to cover the hole on the right side of inside of the scanner. Note: The mylar should cover the hole shown by the arrow in the diagram. Attach along with the bent part of the metal plate and align the edge of the mylar with the line shown in the diagram (the yellow line in the diagram).
3 - 7mm
Attach the cushion leaving 3 - 7mm from the edge so that the gap between the Fan housing cushion and the filter of the rear cabinet is filled for sure. 14) Attach the parts removed in the items 1), 2), and 3). AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 12
[6] COPY PROCESS

An OPC drum is used for the photoconductor. (Structure of the OPC drum layers) OPC layer (20 microns thick) Pigment layer (0.2 to 0.3 microns thick) Aluminum drum
1. Functional diagram
Main charger Laser beam Cleaning blade
MG roller
Drum
Transfer unit Resist roller

(Basic operation cycle)
Semiconductor laser
Focus correction lens
Main high voltage unit
Exposure Charge
Saw tooth
Toner
Drum Developing
Cleaning
Cleaning blade
Developer
Waste toner box
PS roller
To face down tray
Paper release
Fusing
Separation
Transfer
Synchronization with drum
Manual feed
Heat roller Heater lamp
Electrode
Transfer charger Transfer high voltage unit
Cassette paper feed
Print process
Paper transport route
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 COPY PROCESS 6 - 1
2. Outline of print process

This printer is a non-impact printer that uses a semiconductor laser and electrostatic print process. This printer uses an OPC (Organic Photo Conductor) for its photoconductive material. First, voltage from the main corona unit charges the drum surface and a latent image is formed on the drum surface using a laser beam. This latent image forms a visible image on the drum surface when toner is applied. The toner image is then transferred onto the print paper by the transfer corona and fused on the print paper in the fusing section with a combination of heat and pressure. Step-1: Charge Step-2: Exposure
Latent image is formed on the drum.
Step-2: Exposure (laser beam, lens) A Laser beam is generated from the semiconductor laser and controlled by the print pattern signal. The laser writes onto the OPC drum surface through the polygon mirrors and lens. The resistance of the OPC layer decreases for an area exposed by the laser beam (corresponding to the print pattern signal). The beam neutralizes the negative charge. An electrostatic latent image is formed on the drum surface.
Semiconductor laser
Step-3: Developing Latent image formed on the drum is then changed into visible image with toner. Step-4: Transfer The visible image (toner image) on the drum is transferred onto the print paper. Step-5: Cleaning Residual toner on the drum surface is removed and collected by the cleaning blade. Step-6: Optical discharge Residual charge on the drum surface is removed, by semiconductor laser beam.
Exposure (semiconductor laser) OPC layer Pigment layer Aluminum drum
Drum surface charge after the exposure OPC layer Pigment layer Aluminum layer
3. Actual print process

Step-1: DC charge A uniform negative charge is applied over the OPC drum surface by the main charging unit. Stable potential is maintained by means of the Scorotron charger. Positive charges are generated in the aluminum layer.
Non-image area
Image area
About DC5.5KV ( 580V/ 400V)
Step-3: Developing (DC bias) A bias potential is applied to the MG roller in the two component magnetic brush developing method, and the toner is charged negative through friction with the carrier. Non-image area of the drum surface charged with negative potential repel the toner, whereas the laser exposed portions where no negative charges exist, attract the toner. As a result, a visible image appears on the drum surface.
Step-4: Transfer The visible image on the drum surface is transferred onto the print paper by applying a positive charge from the transfer corona to the backside of the print paper.
:Carrier (Magnetized particle) :Toner (Charge negative by friction) (N) (S) Permanent magnet (provided in three locations)
N S N
About DC 5.2kV
DC 400V 8V
MG roller
Step-5: Separation Since the print paper is charged positively by the transfer corona, it is discharged by the separation corona. The separation corona is connected to ground. Step-6: Cleaning Toner remaining on the drum is removed and collected by the cleaning blade. It is transported to the waste toner collecting section in the cleaning unit by the waste toner transport roller.
Toner is attracted over the shadowed area because of the developing bias.
Step-7: Optical discharge (Semiconductor laser) Before the drum rotation is stopped, the semiconductor laser is radiated onto the drum to reduce the electrical resistance in the OPC layer and eliminate residual charge, providing a uniform state to the drum surface for the next page to be printed. When the electrical resistance is reduced, positive charges on the aluminum layer are moved and neutralized with negative charges on the OPC layer.
Start
1) Because the grid potential is at a low level, the drum potential is at about -400V. (Carrier may not be attracted though the carrier is pulled towards the drum by the electrostatic force of 400V. 2) Developing bias (-400V) is applied when the photoconductor potential is switched from LOW to HIGH. 3) Once developing bias (-400V) is applied and the photo conductor potential rises to HIGH, toner will not be attracted to the drum.
Semiconductor laser
Stop
The reverse sequence takes place. Retaining developing bias at an abnormal occurrence Function The developing bias will be lost if the power supply was removed during print process. In this event, the drum potential slightly abates and the carrier makes deposits on the drum because of strong static power. To prevent this, the machine incorporates a function to retain the developing bias for a certain period and decrease the voltage gradually against possible power loss. Basic function Normally, the developing bias voltage is retained for a certain time before the drum comes to a complete stop if the machine should stop before completing the normal print cycle. The developing bias can be added before resuming the operation after an abnormal interruption. Therefore, carrier will not make a deposit on the drum surface.
Charge by the Scorotron charger

Function The Scorotron charger functions to maintain uniform surface potential on the drum at all times, It control the surface potential regardless of the charge characteristics of the photoconductor. Basic function A screen grid is placed between the saw tooth and the photoconductor. A stable voltage is added to the screen grid to maintain the corona current on the photoconductor. As the photoconductor is charged by the saw tooth from the main corona unit, the surface potential increases. This increases the current flowing through the screen grid. When the photoconductor potential nears the grid potential, the current turns to flow to the grid so that the photoconductor potential can be maintained at a stable level.
Process controlling
Function The print pattern signal is converted into an invisible image by the semiconductor laser using negative to positive (reversible) developing method. Therefore, if the developing bias is added before the drum is charged, toner is attracted onto the drum. If the developing bias is not added when the drum is charged, the carrier is attracted to the drum because of the strong electrostatic force of the drum. To avoid this, the process is controlled by adjusting the drum potential and the grid potential of the Scorotron charger. Basic function Voltage added to the screen grid can be selected, high and low. To make it easily understood, the figure below shows voltage transition at the developer unit.
0 START STOP
Print potential
Toner attract potential 2)
Developing bias
3)
1) Low
4)
High
Time
Drum potential
[7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS

1. Outline of operation
The outline of operation is described referring to the basic configuration.
(Basic configuration)
AR-M200/M201
(Option) Scanner section FAX modem FAX
Operation section
CCD
(Option) USB FAX I/F

USB
Network Box
Network
MCU (Main control/image process section)
Printer/ Scanner I/F
PC USB
AR-203E/M200/M201
LSU (Laser unit) Laser diode, Polygon mirror lens Laser beam
Paper exit Fusing section
Process section Printer section
Paper transport section
Cassette paper feed section
Manual paper feed section
(Outline of copy operation)

Setting conditions 1) Set copy conditions such as the copy quantity and the copy density with the operation section, and press the COPY button. The information on copy conditions is sent to the MCU. Image scanning 2) When the COPY button is pressed, the scanner section starts scanning of images. The light from the copy lamp is reflected by the document and passed through the lens to the CCD. Photo signal/Electric signal conversion 3) The image is converted into electrical signals by the CCD circuit and passed to the MCU. Image process 4) The document image signal sent from the CCD circuit is processed under the revised conditions and sent to the LSU (laser unit) as print data. Electric signal/Photo signal (laser beam) conversion 5) The LSU emits laser beams according to the print data. (Electrical signals are converted into photo signals.) 6) The laser beams are radiated through the polygon mirror and various lenses to the OPC drum.
Printing 7) Electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC drum according to the laser beams, and the latent images are developed to be visible images (toner images). 8) Meanwhile the paper is fed to the image transfer section in synchronization with the image lead edge. 9) After the transfer of toner images onto the paper, the toner images are fused to the paper by the fusing section. The copied paper is discharged onto the exit tray.
(Outline of printer operation)

The print data sent from the PC are passed through the NIC PWB (in case of network connection) and the MCU to the LSU. The procedures after that are the same as above 5) and later.
(Outline of scanner operation)

The scan data are passed through the MCU to the PC according to the conditions requested by the operations with the operation panel.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 1
2. Scanner section
A. Scanner unit
The scanner unit in the digital copier scans images. It is composed of the optical unit and the drive unit. The optical unit performs scanning in the main scan direction with the light receiving elements (color CCD). The drive unit performs scanning in the sub scanning direction by moving the optical unit.
Spectral sensitivity characteristics (Standard characteristics)
B. Optical system
Two white lamps are used as the light source. Light radiated from the light source is applied to the document on the document table. The reflected light from the document is reflected 4 times by No. 1 - No. 3 mirrors and passed through the reduction lens to form images on the light-receiving surface of 3line CCD. The light-receiving surface of the color CCD is provided with 3 line scanning sections for RGB. Separate images scanned in each color section are overlapped to complete color scanning. (When PC scanning) The resolution is 600dpi. When copying, only the green component is used to print with the printer. The color component for printing can be switched to red or blue by the service simulation.
100
100.0
Relative sensitivity
Wavelength [nm]
(Spectrum characteristics of the color CCD)
10
Sensitivity
75 50
50.2 45.4
25
380
480
580
680
780
7 3 5 4
(Optical unit) 1 4 7 10 Table glass Mirror 1 CCD PWB Original 2 5 8 Optical unit Mirror 2 Lamp 3 6 9 Lens Mirror 3 Reflector
Wavelength [nm]
(Spectrum characteristics of the lamp)
C. Drive system
The drive system is composed of the scanner motor, the pulley gear, the idle pulley, the idle gear, the belt 473, the belt 190, and the shaft. The motor rotation is converted into reciprocated movements of the belt 473 through the idle gear, the pulley gear, the belt 190, and the idle pulley to drive the optical unit.
3
1 4 7 Scanner motor Belt 473 Shaft
6
2 5 8 Pulley gear Belt 190 Idle gear
8
3 6 9
5
Idle pulley Optical unit Table glass
3. Laser unit
The image data sent from the MCU (image process circuit) is sent to the LSU (laser unit), where it is converted into laser beams.
B. Laser beam path
A. Basic structure
The LSU unit is the writing section of the digital optical system. The semiconductor laser is used as the light source, and images are formed on the OPC drum by the polygon mirror and f lens, etc. The laser beams are passed through the collimator lens, the cylindrical lens, the polygon mirror, the f lens, and the mirror to form images on the OPC drum in the main scanning direction. The laser emitting PWB is provided with the APC (auto power control) in order to eliminate fluctuations in the laser power. The BD PWB works for measurement of the laser writing start point.
C. Composition
Effective scanning width: 216mm (max.) Resolution: 600dpi Beam diameter: 75um in the main scanning direction, 80um in the sub scanning direction
6
No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Component Semiconductor laser Collimator lens Cylinder lens Polygon mirror, polygon motor BD (Lens, PWB) f lens
Image surface power: 0.18 0.01mW (Laser wavelength 770 795nm) Polygon motor section: Brushless motor 20.787rpm No. of mirror surfaces: 5 surfaces
Function Generates laser beams. Converges laser beams in parallel. Takes the focus. Reflects laser beams at a constant rpm. Detects start timing of laser scanning. Converges laser beams at a spot on the drum. Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same as each other. (Refer to the figure below.)
4. Fuser section
Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same as each other.
abc
a b c
d=e=f
d e f
f LENS
A. General description
General block diagram (cross section)
Thermal fuse Separator pawl PPD2
2) The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is set to 160 200C. The surface temperature during the power save mode is set to 100C. 3) The self-check function comes active when one of the following malfunctions occurs, and an "H" is displayed on the multicopy window. a. When the heat roller surface temperature rises above 240C. b. When the heat roller surface temperature drops below 100C during the copy cycle.
Separator pawl
c. Open thermistor d. Open thermal fuse e. When the heat roller temperature does not reach 190C within 27 second after supplying the power.
Thermistor Heat roller
Pressure roller
(4) Fusing resistor

This model is provided with a fusing resistor in the fusing section to improve transfer efficiency.
Paper guide
Top view
Heat roller
Thermistor
Thermal fuse Heater lamp
Since the upper heat roller is conductive, when using copy paper that contains moisture and the distance between the transfer unit and the fusing unit is short, the transfer current may find a path to ground via the copy paper, the upper heat roller and the discharging brush.
5. Paper feed section and paper transport section

A. Paper transport path and general operations
1 2 4 3 16 5 15
Separator pawl
(1)
Heat roller
6 7 8 9 10
A Teflon roller is used for the heat roller and a silicone rubber roller is used for the lower heat roller for better toner fusing performance and paper separation.
(2)
Separator pawl
14 13 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Scanner unit Exposure lamp LSU (Laser unit) Paper exit roller Main charger Heat roller Pressure roller Drum 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Three separator pawls are used on the upper heat roller. The separator pawls are Teflon coated to reduce friction with the roller and prevent a smear on the paper caused by the separator pawl.
11
Transfer unit Pickup roller Manual paper feed tray Manual paper feed roller PS roller unit Paper feed roller Paper transport roller Shifter roller
(3)
Thermal control
1) The heater lamp, thermistor, main PWB, DC power supply PWB, and triac within the power supply unit are used to control the temperature in the fuser unit. To prevent against abnormally high temperature in the fuser unit, a thermal breaker and thermal fuse are used for safety purposes.
Heated by the heater lamp. (950W)
Paper feed is made in two ways; the tray paper feed and the manual paper feed. The tray is of universal-type, and has the capacity of 250 sheets. The front loading system allows you to install or remove the tray from the front cabinet.
Safety device (thermal breaker, thermal fuse)
The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is sensed by the thermistor.
The general descriptions on the tray paper feed and the manual paper feed operation are given below.
Triac (in the power supply unit)
Level of the thermistor is controlled by the main PWB.
With the signal from the main PWB, the triac is controlled on and off. (power supply PWB)
(1)
Cassette paper feed operation
1) The figure below shows the positions of the pick-up roller, the paper feed clutch sleeve, and the paper feed latch in the initial state without pressing the COPY button after lighting the ready lamp. The paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutch sleeve.
5) At this time, the paper is fed passed the paper entry detection switch (PPD1), and detected by it. After about 0.15 sec from detection of paper by PPD1, the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on so that the clutch sleeve projection comes into contact with the paper feed latch to stop the pick-up roller. Then the pick-up roller rotates for about 0.15 sec so that the lead edge of the paper is evenly pressed on the resist roller, preventing against skew feeding.
2) When the COPY button is pressed, the main drive motor starts rotating to drive each drive gear. The pick-up drive gear also is driven at that time. Since, however, the paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutch sleeve, rotation of the drive gear is not transmitted to the pick-up roller, which does not rotate therefore.
PFS ON
RRS OFF
PFS OFF
RRS OFF
6) To release the resist roller, the tray paper feed solenoid and the resist solenoid are turned on by the paper start signal to disengage the resist start latch from the clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the resist drive gear to the resist roller shaft. Thus the paper is transported by the resist roller. 7) After the resist roller starts rotating, the paper is passed through the pre-transfer guide to the transfer section. Images are transferred on the paper, which is separated from the OPC drum by the drum curve and the separation section.
3) After about 0.1 sec from when the main motor start rotating, the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on for a moment. This disengages the paper feed latch from the projection of the clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the pick-up drive gear to the paper feed roller shaft, rotating the pick-up roller to feed the paper.
PFS OFF
RRS ON
PFS OFF
RRS OFF
8) The paper separated from the drum is passed through the fusing paper guide, the heat roller (fusing section), POD (paper out detector) to the copy tray.
4) After more than half rotation of the pick-up roller, the paper feed latch is brought in contact with a notch on the clutch sleeve, stopping rotation of the pick-up roller. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 5
(2)
Manual multi paper feed operation
1) Before paper feed operation, the manual paper feed solenoid (MPFS) is turned OFF as shown in the figure below.
3) When pawl C of the manual paper feed clutch sleeve is engaged with the manual feed latch, the manual feed stopper falls and the manual take-up roller rises. At that time, the manual paper feed roller is rotating.
A
C
OFF MPFS
2) When the PRINT button is pressed, the manual paper feed solenoid (MPFS) turns on to disengage the manual paper feed latch. A from the manual paper feed clutch sleeve A, rotating the manual paper feed roller and the manual take-up roller. At the same time, the manual paper feed stopper opens and the manual take-up roller is pressed to the surface of the paper to start paper feeding.
ON MPFS
4) The lead edge of the transported paper is pressed on the resist roller by the transport roller. Then the paper is stopped temporarily to allow synchronization with the lead edge of the image on the OPC drum. From this point, the operation is the same as the paper feed operation from the tray. (Refer to 7-5 - 8.) 5) The solenoid turns off to close the gate and return to the initial state.
C A
C A
ON MPFS
OFF MPFS
(3)
Conditions of occurrence of paper misfeed
a. When the power is turned on: PPD or POD is ON when the power is turned on. b. Copy operation a b PPD1 jam PPD2 jam PPD1 does not turn off within 4 sec after turning on the resist roller. PPD2 is off immediately after turning on the resist roller. PPD2 does not turn off within 1.2 sec after turning off the resist roller. POD does not turn on within 2.9 sec after turning on the resist roller. POD does not turn off within 1.5 sec - 2.7 sec after turning off PPD2.
POD jam
6. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/ document transport (Duplex model) (AR-M201 only)
A. Initial state
Set duplex documents on the document tray. Set paper on the cassette. (In the duplex mode, the manual feed tray cannot be selected.)
C. Back copy
Document transport: By switchback operation, the document is sent through the upper transport roller and the PS roller to the exposure section, where the back surface of the document is exposed. The document is sent to the document exit section by the lower transport roller and the paper exit roller. The document is sent to the intermediate tray. (However, it is not discharged completely.) The document is stopped once, and switchback operation is performed. The document is sent through the upper transport roller and the PS roller and the exposure section (without being exposed) to the document exit section. The document is discharged to the document exit tray. Paper transport: Switchback operation is performed. The paper is sent through the upper side of the gate section and the duplex transport section and the PS roller, and the images on the back surface are transferred. The paper is sent through the fusing section and discharged to the paper exit tray.
B. Front copy
Document transport: The document feed roller feeds the document from the paper feed roller to the PS roller. The document is exposed in the exposure section, and transported to the document exit section by the lower transport roller and the paper exit roller. The document is transported to the paper exit tray. (However, it is not discharged completely.) The document is stopped once, and then switchback operation is performed. (To the back copy) Paper transport: The paper is passed through the paper feed roller and the PS roller, and the images on the front surface are transferred. The paper is passed through the fusing section and the lower side of the gate section to the paper exit tray side. (However, it is not discharged completely.) The paper is stopped once, and switchback operation is performed. (To the back copy)
Rotation copy mode: The front and the back are in upside down each other. Copy mode without rotation: The front and the back are not in upside down.
7. Shifter (AR-M200/M201)
Shift width: 2.5cm The offset function by the shifter is turned ON/OFF by the user program. According to the setting, offset operation is performed for every job. (Default: ON)
[8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

Before disassembly, be sure to disconnect the power cord for safety. 1. Do not disconnect or connect the connector and the harness during the machine is powered. Especially be careful not to disconnect or connect the harness between the MCU PWB and the LSU (MCU PWB: CN119) during the machine is powered. (If it is disconnected or connected during the machine is powered, the IC inside the LSU will be destroyed.) 2. To disconnect the harness after turning on the power, be sure to turn off the power and wait for at least 10 sec before disconnection. (Note that a voltage still remains immediately after turning off the power.) The disassembly and assembly procedures are described for the following sections: 1. High voltage section 2. Operation panel section 3. Optical section 4. Fusing section 5. Tray paper feed/transport section 6. Manual paper feed section 7. Rear frame section 8. Power section 9. DV unit section 10. Duplex motor section (AR-M201 only) 11. Reverse roller section (AR-M201 only)
2) Remove the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum. (Note) Dispose the drum fixing plate which was removed.
LO C K
(2)
(3)
3) Check the cleaning blade and the red felt for no damage. If there is any damage, execute all procedures from item 5) and later. If there is no damage, execute the procedure of item 12). 4) Remove the main charger. (When uneven charging occurs, clean the screen grid and the sawteeth with an air blower.)
1. High voltage section

A. List
No. 1 2 3 Part name Ref. Drum Transfer charger unit Charger wire
B. Drum replacement
1) Remove the drum cover. (4 Lock Tabs)
5) Remove the cleaning blade. Note: Dispose the cleaning blade which was removed. If a cleaning error occurs, replace the cleaning blade. (Recommendable replacement cycle: Every 25K)
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 1
6) Clean the cleaning section and the waste toner pipe to remove waste toner completely with a vacuum cleaner. 7) Remove the felt and duplex tape completely. Note: Be careful not to scratch or bend the sub blade. 8) Attach the cleaning blade. Securely insert the plate section of the cleaning blade into the unit and fix it with a screw. Do not touch the cleaning blade rubber with your hand. When attaching the cleaning blade, press the cleaning blade in the arrow direction and attach.
Normal state of the molt Machine F side
Machine R side
Attach the cleaning blade, press the molt on the process frame with a screwdriver (), and push it in the clearance between the process frame and the cleaning blade. Machine F side
9) Attach the moquettes.
: Check while pressing the blade.

Cleaning blade
Moquette R
0 0.3 mm
0 0.3 mm Moquette F
0.2 0.5 mm
Machine R side
Sub blade 0 0.5 mm
0 0.5 mm
Cleaning blade Moquette R Moquette F
Sub blade Be careful not to allow the moquette to cover the sub blade.
Example of NG
Attach the mocket with slightly pressing section A of the cleaning blade. Do not touch the tip of the cleaning blade. Do not put the mocket under the cleaning blade. Do not put the mocket on the sub blade. Do not press the sub blade with the mocket. If the moquette F/R is deformed or damaged, replace it. (Recommendable replacement cycle: Every 25K) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 2
0.2 0.5 mm
10) Attach the main charger. Securely set the MC holder on the projection of the process frame. Securely insert two projections of the MC holder into the groove in the process frame. When attaching the MC holder ass'y, be careful not to make contact with the cleaning blade.
C. Disassembly procedure
1) Press the side cover open/close button and open the side cover.
1) 2)
11) Attach the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum. Apply grease to the inside of the photoconductor drum. (Dia. 2)
2) Push up the lock pawls (2 positions) of the side cover, and remove the transfer charger.
Lock pawl rear
1)
Attach the drum from (b). (Prevention against the sub blade edge breakage) Attach the drum so that its position with the sub blade is as shown. 12) Attach the drum cover. Note: After attaching the drum cover, do not make a copy. When attaching the drum cover, engage the detection gear 20T rib with the 30T gear rib, and attach the drum cover to the process frame. 13) Insert the process unit into the machine until it is fully engaged.
2)
Transfer charger
1)
Lock pawl front
D. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 3
E. Charger wire cleaning

1) Remove the charger cleaner from the manual paper feed unit.
F. Charger wire replacement

1) Remove the TC cover and remove the screw. 2) Remove the spring and remove the charger wire. 3) Install a new charger wire by reversing the procedures (1) and (2). At that time, be careful of the following items. The rest of the charger wire must be within 1.5mm. Refer to Fig.1 The spring hook section (charger wire winding section) must be in the range of the projection section. Be careful not to twist the charger wire.
3)
1)
1)
Charger wire
1)
2) Clean the TC front guide and the TC holder with alcohol.

2)
1mm
Protrusion
3) Set the charger cleaner to the transfer unit, and move it reciprocally a few times in the direction of the arrow shown in the figure below.
1.5mm
3) 4)
Fig.1
2) 1)
2. Operation panel section

A. List
No. 1 2 Part name Ref. Operation panel unit Operation PWB
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Open the side door, and Open the front cover.
1)
2)
2) Remove the screws (4 pcs.), the harness, and the operation panel unit.
(AR-M200/M201)
1) 3) 1) 1) 5) 5) 2) 5) 2) 5)
4) 2)
1) 1)
3) Remove four screws, and remove the operation cabinet. 4) Remove four screws, and remove the operation PWB. (AR-203E/5420)
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure
2)
1)
3. Optical section
A. List
NO. 1 2 3 Part name Ref. Copy lamp unit Copy lamp Lens unit
1) 1) 3) 3) 3) 1) 3) 3) 3) 3) 3) 4)
1) Remove four screws, and remove the rear cabinet and the rear cabinet cover.
1)
2)
2)
1)
1)
2) Remove two screws, and remove the earth wire. 3) Disconnect the connector. 4) Remove the original cover.
10) Move the carriage to the position indicated on the figure. 11) Loosen the screw which is fixing the tension plate. 12) Move the tension plate in the arrow direction to release the tension, and remove the belt.
3)
2)
4)
1)
13) Remove the screw, and remove the rod stopper. 14) Remove the rod.
3)
5) Remove five screws. Remove the operation unit, and disconnect the connector. 6) Remove the right cabinet. 7) Remove the left cabinet. 8) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cover. 9) Remove the table glass.
1) 7) 5) 1) 8) 1) 3) 4)
2) 1)
15) Lift the rear side of the carriage, remove the belt and the connector, and remove the carriage.
4)
1)
2) 2)
1) 1) 3)
CCD core 1) Insert the CCD-MCU harness into the CCD PWB of the carriage unit. 2) Attach the CCD-MCU harness to the duplex tape on the back surface of the carriage unit. Clean and remove oil and dirt from the attachment surface. 3) Pass the CCD-MCU harness through the square hole in the base plate. 4) Attach the CCD-MCU harness to the base plate with duplex tape. 5) Attach two cable fixing sheets to fix the CCD-MCU harness to the base plate. 6) Pass the core through the CCD-MCU harness and fix the core. 7) Insert the CCD-MCU harness into the MCU PWB.
4. Fusing section
A. List
No. 1 2 3 4 5 Part name Ref. Thermistor PPD2 sensor Heater lamp Pressure roller Heat roller
1) Remove the connectors (3 pcs.) of the rear cabinet. 2) Open the side cover, remove two screws, and remove the fusing unit.
Note: Attach the FCC to the base plate securely with duplex tape to prevent against coming loose.
1)
3)
2)
Note: Attach the FCC to fit with the marking line.
Marking line.
2)
3) Cut the binding band, remove the screw, and remove the thermistor.
1)
2)
Thermistor
3)
4) Remove the screw and remove the U-turn guide.
7) Remove the plate spring on the right and remove the heater lamp.
1)
2)
1)
2)
Pressure roller section disassembly 5) Remove the three screws, remove the fusing cover lower on the right side, and open the heat roller section.
Heater lamp
2) 3) 4) 6)
8) Remove the spring, and remove the upper separation pawls (3 pcs.).
3) 5) 1)
5)
6)
2)
6) Remove the screw and remove the PPD2 sensor.
1)
1) 2)
PPD2 sensor
9) Remove the E-ring and remove the reverse gate.
3)
1) 2)
10) Remove the spring, and remove the lower separation pawls (4 pcs.).
Heat roller disassembly (Continued from procedure (4).) 5) Remove screws, remove the fusing cover, and open the heat roller section.
2) 2) 2) 2)
3)
2)
1)
1)
2)
3)
11) Remove the pressure release levers on the right and the left sides.
6) Remove the C-ring and the fusing bearing, and remove the heat roller.
1) 2) 3)
Heat roller
1)
1)
7) Remove the parts from the heat roller. 12) Remove the pressure roller, the pressure bearing, and the spring. Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with an asterisk (). Grease: "JFE552" UKOG-0235FCZZ Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with 1. Grease: "JFE552" UKOG-0235FCZZ
Pressure roller
1 3) 2) 1 1)
1) 3) 2) 1) 2) 3)
8) Remove two screws and remove the thermo unit. Note: The set temperature of the thermostat differs from that of the current model. Current model AR-203E/5420 AR-M200/M201 Temperature 210C 230C
2) Remove two screws, and remove the hinge guide R. 3) Disconnect the connector. (2 positions)
1)
4) Remove five screws, and remove the scanner unit. 5) Remove the fan duct.
2)
2) 3) 2) 2) 2)
2)
2)
3)
1)
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
2)
5. Tray paper feed/transport section

A. List
No. 1 2 3 4 5 Part name Ref. PPD1 sensor PWB POD sensor PWB LSU unit Intermediate frame unit Paper feed roller
6) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the speaker unit. (When the AR-FX13 is installed)
1) Remove the paper holding arm. Remove the arm holder from the main unit, and remove the holder from the arm. (AR-M200/M201)
1)
7) Remove the connector. 8) Remove four screws, and remove the FAX PWB unit. (When the AR-FX13 is installed)
2) 2)
2)
2)
1) 3) 4) 3) 2) 2)
9) Remove each connector and four screws, and remove the MCU PWB. (The shape of the MCU PWB differs depending on the model.)
11) Remove two springs and open the intermediate frame unit. (AR-203E/5420)
1)
3)
2) 1) 2) 1) 1) 1) 2)
10) Remove the PWB insulation mylar and remove the paper transport detection sensor (POD).
2)
1)
1)
1)
12) Remove the screw, and open the upper paper guide. (AR-M200/M201)
1) 1) 2)
2)
13) Remove the roller, and remove the belt. (AR-M200/M201)
2)
1)
14) Remove the pulleys on the both sides and remove the paper exit roller. (AR-203E/5420)
18) Remove the harness guide.
3) 1)
4)
19) Remove two screws and remove the toner motor.
2)
2)
15) Disengage the pawl, and remove the roller knob. 16) Disengage the pawl, and shift the pulley and the bearing.
1)
3)
2)
20) Remove three screws, and remove the DUP motor unit and the belt. (AR-M201)
1) 4)
17) Remove the paper exit roller, and remove the belt, the pulley, and the bearing.
1) 2) 1) 2) 1) 3)
21) Remove five screws and the grounding wire. For the AR-203E/5420/M200, remove the main drive plate and the belt. For the AR-M201, remove the main drive plate.
23) Remove four screws, and remove the paper guide unit. (AR-203E/5420)
1) 1) 1)
2)
2)
1)
1)
1) AR-203E/5420/M200 3) AL-2030 only
1)
24) Remove four screws, and remove the lower paper guide unit. (AR-M200/M201) [Note for installation] Fit the lower paper guide hole (a) with the shifter gear hole (b) so that the black resin (c) of the shifter unit can be checked.
c b
CAUTION:Attach the gears securely

22) Remove the parts as shown below, and remove the pressure release solenoid and the paper feed solenoid.
1)
1)
1) 1)
3)
2)
4) 2)
1)
1) 4) 2) 3)
25) Put the lower paper guide unit upside down, remove two screws, and remove the shifter motor. (AR-M200/M201)
30) Remove four screws, and remove the LSU unit.
1) 1) 1)
1)
2)
2)
26) Remove the screw, and remove the grounding plate and the gear. (AR-M200/M201) 27) Remove the E-ring, the gear, and the bearing, and remove the shifter roller. (AR-M200/M201)
[Note for assembling the LSU] When installing the LSU, turn the LSU clockwise and fix with screws in order to provide an attachment backlash in the proper direction. Observe the following sequence of fixing screws.
1)
2)
3)
28) Disengage the pawl, and remove the pulley. 29) Shift and remove the shifter unit. (AR-M200/M201)
3)
2)
4)
3) 1)
31) Remove the screw, slide the left cabinet to the left to detach it. Remove each pawl, and remove the paper exit tray.
34) Remove the screw and the E-ring, and remove the PS semi-circular earth plate and the PS roller unit. 35) Remove the E-ring and remove the spring clutch from the PS roller unit.
5)
3)
4)
PS roller unit Use grease of Floil FG40H only to apply to this section.
4)
5) 1) 2) 4)
PS semi-circuler PS semi-circular earthplate earth plate

2)
1)
32) Remove two screws and remove the fusing connector. 33) Remove five screws and the connector, and lift the intermediate frame unit to remove.
3)
3)
36) Remove three screws and remove the TC front paper guide.
1)
4)
2)
2)
2)
1)
37) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the PPD1 sensor PWB.
6. Manual paper feed section

A. List
No. 1 2 3 4 Part name Ref. Manual transport roller Cassette detection switch PPD1 sensor PWB Side door detection unit
1)
2)
Multi unit 1) Remove the screw and remove the multi upper cover.
1)
38) Remove two E-rings and remove the paper feed roller. 39) Remove three E-rings and remove the clutch unit.
5)
Back
2)
Clutch unit
4)
Paper feed roller
4)
3)
Front
1)
2)
2) Remove the screw and remove the side door detection unit.
4) Remove two screws and remove the multi feed bracket unit from the multi paper feed upper frame.
2)
2) 1)
1)
1)
Back
Wire treatment
2)
3) Remove three screws and remove the multi paper feed upper frame.
1)
1)
5) Remove three E-rings and remove the manual paper feed roller B9.
1)
1)
2)
1)
3)
2)
L O CK
T O
6) Remove the pick-up roller.
D. Pressure plate holder attachment

1) Attach the pressure plate holder so that the resin section is not covered with the seal M1-N.
Seal M1-N
1)
Pressure plate holder Attachment reference
2)
7) Cut the binding band and remove the multi paper feed solenoid.
1)
Attachment reference
7. Rear frame section

A. List
No. 1 2 3 4 Part name Ref. Scanner motor Main motor Exhaust fan motor Main PWB
Multi paper feed solenoid
3)
2)
1) Remove four screws, and remove the rear cabinet and the rear cabinet cover.
1)
2)
2)
1)
1)
2) Remove the connector. 3) Remove four screws, and remove the FAX PWB unit. (When the AR-FX13 is installed)
7) Remove two screws and one connector, and remove the exhaust fan motor. Note: Be careful of the installing directions of the fan. Attach it so that the blowing direction faces outside.
1)
2)
2)
3) 1)
3) 2)
4) Disconnect the connector.
2) 2)
Blowing direction
8) Disconnect the connectors. 9) Remove the five screws, and remove the MCU PWB.
5) Remove two screws, and remove the scanner motor.
1)
1) 3)
1)
2) 3) 2)
1) 1) 1) 1) 2)
2)
6) Remove two screws and one harness, and remove the main motor.
2)
3)
1)
2)
8
No. 1
Power section
Part name Ref. Power PWB
2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV cover.
A. List
1) 2)
1) Disconnect each connector. 2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth line. 3) Remove two screws, and remove the power PWB unit.
4) 1) 2) 1) 3) 1) 1) 1)
3) Remove the used developer.
5) 4)
4) Supply new developer.
9. DV unit section
A. Developer
1) Remove the screw, slide the pawl to the right side, and remove the TN guide.
B. DV seal
1) Peel off the old DV seal. 2) Clean the attachment surface with alcohol.
1)
3) Attach the new DV seal to the reference position.

DV side seal F
A C
DV side seal R
D
B 0.5 A 0 X 0.5 B 0 X 0 C 0.5 0.5 D 0
2)
Bump
B
Magnification ratio: 200%
X-X
C. DV blade
1) Peel off the old DV blade. 2) Clean the attachment surface with alcohol. 3) Attach the new DV blade to the reference position.
A
E. DV sensor
1) Remove the Mylar. 2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV sensor. * Clean the sensor (A) section.
1)
B
DV blade IC DV-BOX AS
0.5
2) 3) 2)
B
D. DV doctor
1) Remove the screw, and remove the DV doctor. * Clean the edge (A) section.
10. Duplex motor section (AR-M201 only)

A. List
1) A 2) 1)
No. 1
Part name Ref. Duplex motor
1) Remove the rear cabinet. 2) Remove two screws. 3) Remove the Duplex motor cover. 4) Remove the Duplex motor.
Note for installation 1) Insert the DG check gauge as shown in the figure. 2) After checking, install the doctor gap and fix it with a screw. * Apply screw lock to the screw tightening section as shown in the figure below.
MG-ROL
DG check gauge
C DG sect F/R :1.5 ion DG se 5 :1. ctio 0.15 5 n 0.1 0
FRONT
* After checking the DG, apply screw lock.
3
REAR
1 2
20
10
10
C
110
20
DG check position
DG check gauge DG check gauge DG check gauge
Note: When reassembling, be sure to engage the Duplex motor gear with the belt on the main body side.
11. Reverse roller section (AR-M201 only)

A. List
No. 1 Part name Ref. Reverse roller
1) Remove four screws. 2) Remove the spring, and the earth wire. 3) Remove the reverse unit.
3 1
4) Bend the reverse roller and remove it.
[9] ADJUSTMENTS
1. Optical section
A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment
The copy magnification ratio must be adjusted in the main scanning direction and in the sub scanning direction. To adjust, use SIM 48-1.
5) Calculate the main scanning direction magnification ratio. Main scanning direction magnification ratio = Copy image dimensions Original dimension X 100 (%)
(When a 100mm scale is used as the original.) Original (Scale)

mm 1/2mm
HARDENED STAINLESS
10
20
100
110
120
JAPAN
130
140
150
Shizuoka
(1)
Outline
Paper feed direction
mm 1/2mm
JAPAN
The main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustment is made automatically or manually. Automatic adjustment: The width of the reference line marked on the shading correction plate is scanned to perform the main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustment automatically. Manual adjustment: The adjustment is made by [Copy quantity] keys (or [Numeric] keys for the AR-M200/M201) operations. (In either of the automatic and manual adjustments, the zoom data register set value is changed for adjustment.) The magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is adjusted by changing the carriage (scanner) scanning speed.
HARDENED STAINLESS
10
20
100
110
120
130
140
150
Shizuoka
Reference
Comparison point
Copy
110
6) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range. If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures. 7) Execute SIM 48-1 to select the main scanning direction copy magnification ratio adjustment mode. To select the adjustment mode, use the [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201). In the case of the automatic adjustment, when the START switch is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shading to scan the width of the reference line, calculating the correction value and displaying and storing this value. After execution of the automatic adjustment, go out from the simulation mode and make a copy to check the magnification ratio. If the magnification ratio is not in the specified range (100 1.0%), manually adjust as follows. (AR-203E/5420) Adjustment mode Display lamp Main scanning direction TEXT mode lamp magnification ratio OC mode sub scan PHOTO mode lamp direction magnification ratio (AR-M200/M201) Adjustment mode Main scan direction magnification ratio OC mode sub scan direction magnification ratio Display LED Default item F-R PRINT mode lamp 50 SCAN SCAN mode lamp 50 Default 50 50
(2)
Main scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment
a. Cases when the adjustment is required 1) When the main PWB is replaced. 2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced. 3) When "U2" trouble occurs. 4) When repairing or replacing the optical section. b. Necessary tools Screwdriver (+) Scale c. Adjustment procedure 1) Set the scale vertically on the document table. (Use a long scale for precise adjustment.)
8) Enter the new set value of main scanning direction copy magnification ratio with the copy quantity key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201), and press the [START] key. 9) Change the set value and repeat the adjustment until the ratio is within the specified range. When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ratio is changed by 0.1%.
(3)
2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%. 3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper. 4) Measure the length of the copied scale image.
Sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio
a. Cases when the adjustment is required 1) When the scanner unit drive section is disassembled or the part is replaced. 2) When the main PWB is replaced. 3) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced. 4) When "U2" trouble occurs. b. Necessary tools Scale
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 1
c. Adjustment procedure 1) Set the scale on the document table as shown below. (Use a long scale for precise adjustment.)
B. Image position adjustment

There are following eleven kinds of image position adjustments, which are made by laser control except for the image scan start position adjustment. For the adjustments, SIM 50-01 and 50-10 are used. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Mode Print start position (Main cassette paper feed) Print start position (2nd cassette paper feed) Print start position (Manual paper feed) Image lead edge void amount Image scan start position Image rear edge void amount (Cassette paper feed) Image rear edge void amount (Manual paper feed) Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) Print center offset (2nd cassette paper feed) Print center offset (Manual paper feed) 2nd print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) SIM 50-01 50-01 50-01 50-01 50-01 50-01 50-01 50-10 50-10 50-10 50-10
(AR-203E/5420) To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50-01, use the [Exposure mode selector] key. 2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%. 3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper. 4) Measure the length of the copied scale image. 5) Calculate the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio using the formula below. = Copy image dimensions Original dimension X 100 (%) The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting lamps are as shown in the table below. Adjustment mode Print start position (Main cassette paper feed) Print start position (2nd cassette paper feed) Print start position (Manual paper feed) Image lead edge void quantity Image scan start position Image rear edge void quantity Lamp ON AE, main cassette lamp AE, 2nd cassette lamp AE, manual feed lamp TEXT lamp PHOTO lamp AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamp
110
Original (Scale)
mm 1/2mm
JAPAN
HARDDENCD STAINLESS
: Supported for the installing model and skipped for non-installing mode. To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50-10, use the [Exposure mode selector] key.
Paper feed direction
10
20
100
110
120
130
140
150
Shizuoka
mm 1/2mm
10
20
100
110
120
JAPAN
HARDDENCD STAINLESS
The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting lamps are as shown in the table below. Machine with the multi manual paper feed unit Adjustment mode Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) Print center offset (2nd cassette) Print center offset (Manual paper feed) Second side center offset Lamp ON AE, main cassette lamp AE, 2nd cassette lamp AE, manual paper feed lamp TEXT lamp
130
140
150
Shizuoka
Reference
Comparison point
Copy
6) Check that the actual copy magnification ratio is within the specified range. (100 1.0%). If it is not within the specified range, perform the following procedures. 7) Execute SIM 48-1 to select the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio adjustment mode. To select the adjustment mode, use the [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ] [ ] key for the AR-M200/M201). (PHOTO lamp ON (or SCAN mode lamp ON for the AR-M200/M201)) 8) Enter the new set value of sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio with the [Copy quantity] keys (or [Numeric] keys for the AR-M200/M201), and press the [START] key. Repeat procedures 1) - 8) until the sub scanning direction actual copy magnification ratio in 100% copying is within the specified range. When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ration is changed by 0.1%.
: Supported for the installing model and skipped for non-installing mode.
(AR-M200/M201) To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50-01, use the [ key. ][ ]
The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting lamps are as shown in the table below. Adjustment mode Print start position (Main cassette paper feed) (*) Print start position (2nd cassette paper feed) Print start position (Manual paper feed) Image lead edge void amount Image scan start position Image rear edge void amount (Cassette paper feed) Image rear edge void amount (Manual paper feed) Display item Lamp ON TRAY1 COPY mode lamp Main cassette lamp TRAY2 COPY mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp MFT COPY mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp DEN-A PRINT mode lamp Main cassette lamp RRC-A SCAN mode lamp Main cassette lamp DEN-B COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp Main cassette lamp RRC-B COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp ][ ]
4) Measure the image loss amount (R mm) of the scale image. Set C = 10 X R (mm). (Example: Set the value of C to 30.) When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50) 5) Measure the distance (H mm) between the paper lead edge and the image print start position. Set A = 10 X H (mm). (Example: Set the value of A to 50.) When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is shifted to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50) 6) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm). When the value of B is increased by 10, the void amount is increased by about 1mm. For 25 or less, however, the void amount becomes zero. (Default: 50)
(Example) Distance between paper lead edge and image: H = 5mm
Image loss: R = 3mm
5mm
To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50-10, use the [ key.
The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting lamps are as shown in the table below. Adjustment mode Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) Print center offset (2nd cassette paper feed) Print center offset (Manual paper feed) 2nd print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) Display item Lamp ON TRAY1 COPY mode lamp Main cassette lamp TRAY2 COPY mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp MFT COPY mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp SIDE2 PRINT mode lamp Main cassette lamp
10mm
(2)
Image rear edge void amount adjustment
1) Set a scale to the rear edge section of A4 or 11" x 8 1/2" paper size as shown in the figure below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" x 14" paper.
B4 or 8 1/2 14 paper
(1)
Lead edge adjustment
A4 size rear edge
1) Set a scale to the center of the paper lead edge guide as shown below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" x 14" paper.
2) Execute SIM 50-01 to select the image rear edge void amount adjustment mode. The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display. 3) Make a copy and measure the void amount of image rear edge.
Void amount (Standard value: 2 - 3mm)
Scale image
2) Execute SIM 50-01 3) Set the print start position (AE lamp ON) (A), the lead edge void amount (TEXT lamp ON) (B), and the scan start position (PHOTO lamp ON) (C) to 0, and make a copy of a scale at 100%. (AR-203E/5420) For the AR-M200/M201, the following LEDs are lighted: AE lamp/COPY mode lamp: (A) TEXT lamp/PRINT mode lamp: (B) PHOTO lamp/SCAN mode lamp: (C) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 3
Paper rear edge
4) If the measurement value is out of the specified range, change the set value and repeat the adjustment procedure. The default value is 50. Note: The rear edge void cannot be checked with the first sheet after entering the simulation mode, the first sheet after turning off/on the power, or the first sheet after inserting the cassette. Use the second or later sheet to check the rear edge void.
2. Copy density adjustment

A. Copy density adjustment timing
The copy density adjustment must be performed in the following cases: When maintenance is performed. When the developing bias/grid bias voltage is adjusted. When the optical section is cleaned. When a part in the optical section is replaced. When the optical section is disassembled. When the OPC drum is replaced. When the main control PWB is replaced. When the EEPROM on the main control PWB is replaced. When the memory trouble (U2) occurs.
(3)
Center offset adjustment
1) Set the self-made test chart for the center position adjustment so that its center line is aligned with the center mark of the document guide. Test chart for the center position adjustment. Draw a line at the center of A4 or 8 1/2" x 11" paper in the paper transport direction.
Document guide
B. Note for copy density adjustment

1) Arrangement before execution of the copy density adjustment Clean the optical section. Clean or replace the charger wire.
Center Copy paper (A4 or 8 1/2 11)
Check that the voltage at the high voltage section and the developing bias voltage are in the specified range.
C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment

One of the following test charts: UKOG-0162FCZZ, UKOG-0089CSZZ, KODAK GRAY SCALE B4 (14" x 8 1/2") white paper The user program AE setting should be "3."
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
2) Execute SIM 50-10 to select the print center offset (cassette paper feed) adjustment mode. The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display. 3) Make a copy and check that the copied center line is properly positioned. The standard value is 0 2mm from the paper center.
Test chart comparison table

(Copy A)
2.0mm or less
Copy image Shift Copy paper folding line
(Copy B)
2.0mm or less
Copy image Shift (Paper feed direction) Copy paper folding line
UKOG0162FCZZ DENSITY No. UKOG0089CSZZ DENSITY No. KODAK GRAY SCALE
10
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5 1.9
19
D. Features of copy density adjustment

For the copy density adjustment, the image data shift function provided in the image process LSI is used. List of the adjustment modes Auto mode Manual mode Photo mode Manual T/S mode T/S Auto mode Brightness 1 step only Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made. Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made. Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the center brightness is made. Brightness 1 step only
4) If the measured value is out of the specified range, change the set value and repeat the adjustment procedure. When the set value is increased by 1, the copy image is shifted by 0.1mm toward the rear frame. For the manual paper feed, change the manual paper feed adjustment mode and perform the similar procedures. Since the document center offset is automatically adjusted by the CCD which scan the reference lines (F/R) on the back of document guide, there is no need to adjust manually.
E. Copy density adjustment procedure

Use SIM 46-1 to set the copy density for each copy mode. For selection of modes, use the [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201).
(1)
Test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) setting
1) Place the test chart so that its edge is aligned with the A4 (Letter) reference line on the document table. Then place a A4 (14" x 8 1/2") white paper on the test chart and close the document cover.
Adjustment mode Auto mode Text mode Photo mode Text T/S mode
Display item AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT
LED
Auto T/S mode TSAE
COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp "3" is slightly copied. SCAN mode lamp
Sharp gray chart adjustment level "3" is slightly copied. "3" is slightly copied. "3" is slightly copied. "3" is slightly copied.
3) Make a copy. Check the adjustment level (shown in the above table) of the exposure test chart (Sharp Gray Scale). Sharp Gray Scale adjustment level Non toner save mode
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
White paper
Slightly copied. Not copied.
Toner save mode
10
Test chart
Not copied.
Slightly copied.
(When too bright): Decrease the value displayed on the copy quantity display. (When too dark):
(2)
Perform the adjustment in each mode.
Increase the value displayed on the copy quantity display.
1) Execute SIM 46-01 (300dpi). To adjust in 600dpi, execute SIM 46-02. 2) AR-203E/5420 Select the mode to be adjusted with the exposure mode select key. Set the exposure level to 3 for all adjustment. (Except for the auto mode.)
The value can be set in the range of 1 - 99.
3. High voltage adjustment

A. Main charger (Grid bias)
Note: Use a digital multi meter with internal resistance of 10M or more measurement.
(1)
(2)
(1) Exposure mode select key/display lamp (2) [Exposure mode selector] key/ display lamp
After adjusting the grid LOW output, adjust the HIGH output. Do not reverse the sequence. Procedures 1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC700V. 2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN11-3 (GRID) of high voltage section of the power PWB and set the negative side to the frame ground (power frame). 3) Execute SIM 8-2. (The main charger output is supplied for 30 sec in the grid voltage HIGH output mode.) 4) Adjust the control volume (VRG1) so that the output voltage is 580 12V.
Adjustment mode Auto mode Manual mode Photo mode Manual T/S mode Auto T/S mode
Exposure mode display lamp Auto lamp ON Manual lamp ON Photo lamp ON Manual lamp/Photo lamp ON Auto lamp/Photo lamp ON
Sharp gray chart adjustment level "3" is slightly copied. "3" is slightly copied. "3" is slightly copied. "3" is slightly copied. "3" is slightly copied.
2) AR-M200/M201 Select the mode to be adjusted with the exposure key. Set the exposure level to 3 (center) for all adjustment. (Except for the auto mode.)
VRG1
TEXT | | | | |
(1) Exposure mode, level display
1 2 2
1 2 1
2 1
(2) Exposure key
B. DV bias check
Note: A digital multi meter with internal resistance of 1G must be use for correct check. The adjustment volume is locked, and no adjustment can be made. Procedures 1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC500V. 2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN-10-1 (DV BIAS) and set the negative side to the frame ground (power frame). 3) Execute SIM 8-1 to output the developing bias for 30sec, and check that the output is 400 8V.
2) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below, in the S-D mode and the D-S mode.
Scale (S-D mode)
Scale (D-S mode)
3) Execute simulation 50-18. Mode Display item Default LED OC memory reverse OC 50 COPY mode lamp output position SPF/RSPF memory SPF 50 PRINT mode lamp reverse output position Select the SPF/RSPF memory reverse output position, and press [START] key to make a copy. Adjust the setting so that the front edge image loss is less than 4.0 mm in the SPF/RSPF mode. An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in image loss.
VRDV
Front edge of paper
The front edge of the scale on test chart
Void area
less than 4 mm
5 10
4. Duplex adjustment
A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory for duplex copying (AR-M200/M201)
This step adjusts the front surface printing (odd-number pages of a document set) in the S-D mode copying and the leading edge position of an image on even-number pages in the D-S mode. That is, it covers the adjustment of the second surface printing mode (image loss at the front edge of an image) in which image data is once stored in memory. The image data is read, starting from its front end in the document delivery direction (Reference direction of document setting in the OC mode)and stored in memory. This stored image data is printed starting at the printing start position, in the order of last-stored data to the first-stored data. In other words, the front edge image loss of the image can be adjusted by changing the document read end position. (Adjustment procedure) 1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of a sheet of A4 white paper or letter paper)
2nd printing surface where scale is printed (lower side)
B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy mode (AR-M201)

This is the adjustment of the first surface printing mode (rear end void) in duplex copying. In a duplex copying operation, the paper is delivered starting from the rear end of the first printing surface. It is therefore necessary to make a void area at the rear end on the first printing surface to prevent paper jam at the fusing part. There are two adjustment modes: 1) Paper trailing edge void quantity 50-19 (TEXT)
5 10
This adjustment is made when the cassette paper size is recognized. The trailing edge void quantity can be adjusted by changing the trailing edge image laser OFF timing.
2) Print start position (Duplex back surface) (SPF/RSPF) 50-19 (PHOTO) The size (length) of a document read from the SPF/RSPF is detected, the image at the trailing edge of the first printing surface is cut to make a void area. (The adjustment of void quantity at the time when the cassette paper size is not recognized.) The paper void quantity should be first adjusted before the image cut trailing edge void quantity (SPF/RSPF) is adjusted. (Adjustment procedure)
2) Execute SIM 50-19 to turn on the SCAN mode lamp and make the printing mode in the S-D mode. 3) Remove and reinsert the cassette. Note: Make sure to carry out this step before making a copy during this adjustment. 4) Make a copy and check the void area of the scale on the image. Adjust the setting so that the void area is 2 - 4 mm. An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in void area. Void position to be checked
(1)
Paper trailing edge void quantity
1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of a sheet of A/4 white paper or letter paper) 2) Set the test chart on the document glass as shown below.
5. Automatic black level correction

a. Cases when the adjustment is required 1) When the main PWB is replaced. 2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced. 3) When "U2" trouble occurs. 4) When repairing or replacing the optical section. b. Adjustment procedure Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level adjustment of white balance. When SIM 63-02 is executed, the current correction value is displayed in 3 digits of 12bit hexadecimal number. Place the gray gradation chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) used as the correction document so that the density 10 (black side) comes on the left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of the plate left center.
Document guide
The trailing edge has a scale
Table glass
3) Using the user simulation [18], set the paper size of the first cassette. Letter paper: 4 A4 paper: 3 4) Execute SIM 50-19 to turn on the PRINT mode lamp and make the printing mode in OC-D mode. Make a copy of the test chart to check the void area of the scale on the image.
Void position to be check
10 Chart back surface
Paper
When [START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans the chart and calculates the correction value. After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on the display section.
Default: 0 If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60.
AR-M200/M201
c. Operation 1) Initial display
The trailing edge void on the first printing surface is shown above.
63-02 BLACK LEVEL 0 2) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key: Correction start 63-02 BLACK LEVEL EXECUTING... <During canceling - When [Clear]/[Clear All] key is pressed-> After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. THE JOB IS BEING CANCELED. 3) After execution 63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** OK 3) In case of an error
Adjust the setting so that the void area is 4 - 5 mm. An increase in 1 of setting represents 0.1 mm in void area.
(2)
Print start position (Duplex back surface)
1) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below.
Scale (S-D mode)
63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** ERR
[10] SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES

1. Entering the simulation mode
To enter the serviceman simulation mode, press the keys as follows: AR-203E/AR-5420 [Clear] key Exposure mode selector key [Clear] key Exposure mode selector key AR-M200/AR-M201 [#] key [] key [Clear] key [] key To cancel the simulation mode, press the [Clear All] key.
Sim No. 02
Sub code 03 06 08 09
Operation SPF/RSPF Motor ON (Only the AR-203E/M200/ M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) Resist clutch ON (SPF) (AR-203E only) RSPF paper feed solenoid operation check (Only the AR-M200/M201 with the RSPF installed) RSPF reverse solenoid operation check (Only the AR-M200/M201 with the RSPF installed) Shifter operation check (AR-M200/M201) Operation panel display check Fusing lamp, cooling fan operation check Copy lamp ON Paper feed solenoid ON Resist solenoid ON Warm-up display and aging with jam Intermittent aging Shift to copy with the warm-up display Developing bias Main charger (Grid high) Grid voltage (Low) Transfer charger Duplex motor normal rotation operation check (AR-M201 only) Duplex motor reverse operation check (AR-M201 only) Duplex motor rotation speed adjustment (AR-M201 only) Toner motor aging Cancel of troubles other than U2 Cancel of U2 trouble Maintenance counter clear Maintenance cycle setting Maintenance counter display Maintenance preset display JAM total counter display Total counter display Developer counter display SPF/RSPF counter display (Only the AR-203E/ M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) FAX-related counter display (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Drum counter display CRUM type display ROM version display Duplex counter display (AR-M201 only) Copy counter display Printer counter display Scanner mode counter display (AR-203E/M200/M201) Scanner counter display SPF/RSPF JAM counter display (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) JAM total counter clear SPF/RSPF counter clear (Only the AR-203E/ M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) Duplex counter clear (AR-M201 only) Developer counter clear Drum counter clear Copy counter clear Printer counter clear FAX counter clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Scanner counter clear SPF/RSPF JAM total counter clear (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
03 05
2. Key rule
AR-203E/AR-5420 [ ] [ ] key: Entry of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE Setting of the adjustment values for the adjustment-related simulations When [%] key is pressed simultaneously, the value is displayed in the descending sequence such as [0] [9], not as [0] [1]. Settlement <In case of simulations for print> [START] key: Settlement / Print Selection of an item (Interrupting operation check) Returns to the upper hierarchy. On the initial display (00-00), it terminates the simulation. Exits from the simulation mode. For a simulation of adjustment, the display returns to the initial display (00-00). Entry of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE Selection of an item Setup of an adjustment value in case of simulations for adjustment Selection of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE Selection of an item Settlement <In case of simulations for print> [OK]/[ENTER] key: Settlement (Without print) [START] key: Settlement / Print (Interrupting operation check) Returns to the upper hierarchy. In case of simulation of operation check, terminates the operations. Exits from the simulation mode. For a simulation of adjustment, the display returns to the initial display (00-00).
06 07
08
[START] key:
09
03 01 02 03 01 02 01 06 08 01 02 03 06 01 02 04
[Exposure mode selector] key: [Clear] key:
10 14 16 20 21 22
AR-M200/AR-M201 [Numeric] key:
01 01 01 02 04 05 06 08 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 19 21 22
][
] key:
[OK]/[ENTER]/ [START] key:
[Clear] key:
[Clear All] key:
24
3. List of simulations
Sim No. 01 Sub code 01 02 06 01 02 Operation Mirror scan operation Mirror home position sensor (MHPS) status display Aging of mirror scanning SPF/RSPF aging operation (Only the AR-203E/ M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) SPF/RSPF sensor status display (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
01 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 13 14
02
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 1
Sim No. 24 25
Sub code 15 01 10 02 03 04 06 07 20 30 37 39 40 42 43 54 62 01 06
Operation Scanner mode counter clear (AR-203E/M200/M201) Main motor operation check (Cooling fan motor rotation check) Polygon motor ON SPF/RSPF setup Second cassette setup Machine duplex setup Destination setup Machine conditions check Rear edge void setup CE mark support control ON/OFF Cancel of stop at developer life over Memory capacity check Polygon motor OFF time setup (Time required for turning OFF after completion of printing) Transfer ON timing control setup Side void setup life correction setting Energy-save mode copy lamp setup Paper sensor status display OC cover float detection level adjustment (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) OC cover float detection margin setting (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) Fusing temperature setting (Normal copy) Fusing temperature setting in multi copy Fusing temperature setup in duplex copy (AR-M201 only) Fusing start temperature setting Copy density adjustment (300dpi) Copy density adjustment (600dpi) Density adjustment in the FAX mode (Collective adjustment) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) FAX mode density adjustment (Normal text) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) FAX mode density adjustment (Fine text) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) FAX mode density adjustment (Super fine) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Image contrast adjustment (300dpi) Exposure mode setup SPF/RSPF exposure correction (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) Image contrast adjustment (600dpi) AE limit adjustment Image sharpness adjustment Copier color reproduction setup FAX mode sharpness adjustment (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Front/rear (main scanning) direction and scan (sub scanning) direction magnification ratio adjustment SPF/RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio in copying (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) Flash ROM program writing mode Lead edge image position Copy lead edge position adjustment (SPF/RSPF) (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) Center offset adjustment
Sim No. 50
Sub code 12 18
Operation Document off-center adjustment Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copy (Only the AR-M201, or the AR-M200 with the RSPF installed) Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment (AR-M201 only) Resist quantity adjustment SPF/RSPF scan position automatic adjustment (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) Polygon motor check (HSYNC output check) Shading check Black level automatic correction Light quantity stabilization wait time setting Light quantity stabilization band setting Self print (1by2 mode) FAX soft SW setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) FAX soft SW initializing (excluding the adjustment values) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) FAX PWB memory check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Signal send mode (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Signal send mode (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Image memory content print (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Image memory content clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 300bps signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Dial test (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) DTMF signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) FAX information print (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) FAST SRAM clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) TEL/LIU status change check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Signal detection check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Communication time measurement (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Speaker sound volume setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) Time setting/check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) USB receive speed adjustment (USB1.1) (AR-203E only)
19 51 53 02 08
26
61 63
64 66
03 01 02 12 13 01 01 02
30 41
03 04 05 07 10 11 12 13 17 18 21 24 30 33 34 37 38 67 50
07
43
01 04 05 14 01 02 12
46
13 14 15 18 19 20 29 30 31 32 39 48 01 05
49 50
01 01 06
10
4. Descriptions of various simulations

Main code 01 Sub code 01 Contents Mirror scan operation Details of function/operation [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the home position is checked and the mirror base performs full scan at the speed of the set magnification ratio. During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed. The mirror home position sensor status is displayed with the "Drum replacement required lamp (or the copy mode indicator for the AR-M200/M201)". (When the mirror is in the home position, the lamp lights up.) During operation, the copy lamp lights up. When [Clear] key is pressed, if the operation is on the way, it is terminated and the machine goes to the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 01-01 SCAN CHK - 100% + 2) [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key 01-01 SCAN CHK - 78% + 2) [ ] key 3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key 01-01 SCAN CHK EXECUTING... 78% +
01-01 SCAN CHK - 99% + 2) [ ] key
01-01 SCAN CHK - 101% + 02 Mirror home position sensor (MHPS) status display [Function] Monitors the mirror home position sensor, and makes the "Drum replacement required lamp (or the copy mode indicator for the AR-M200/M201)" turn on during the sensor ON status. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 01-02 MHP-SENSOR EXECUTING... 06 Aging of mirror scanning [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the mirror base performs full scan at the speed of the set magnification ratio. During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed. After 3sec, the mirror base performs full scan again. When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed once, the ready lamp remains OFF. The mirror home position sensor status is displayed on the "Drum replacement required lamp (or the copy mode indicator for the AR-M200/M201)." (The lamp is ON when the mirror is in the home position.) During aging, the copy lamp is ON. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) The operation is similar to simulation 01-01. [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the set magnification ratio is obtained. For the SPF, the single-face document transport is performed. For the RSPF, the duplex document transport is performed. However, the operating conditions don't matter and the operation is not stopped even in case of a jam. Also the magnification ratio is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) The operation is similar to simulation 01-01.
02
01
SPF/RSPF aging operation (Only the AR-203E/M200/ M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
Main code 02
Sub code 02
Contents SPF/RSPF sensor status display (Only the AR-203E/ M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
Details of function/operation [Function] The ON/OFF status of the SPF/RSPF sensors can be checked with the LCD/LED. When a sensor is ON, the sensor name is displayed on the LCD/LED. Sensor Document set sensor RSPF document transport sensor RSPF paper feed cover open/close sensor RSPF paper exit sensor [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 02-02 SPF SENSOR 2) When the sensor is ON: 02-02 SPF SENSOR SPID SPPD SDSW SPOD Display item (AR-M200/M201) SPID SPPD SDSW SPOD Display item (AR-203E) TD cartridge replacement required lamp Misfeed lamp
03
SPF/RSPF Motor ON (Only the AR-203E/M200/ M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed) Resist clutch ON (SPF) (AR-203E only) RSPF paper feed solenoid operation check (Only the AR-M200/M201 with the RSPF installed)
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the motor rotates for 10sec at the speed corresponding to the set magnification ratio. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) The operation is similar to simulation 01-01. When the [START] key is pressed, the SPF resist clutch (SRRC) repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF (500 ms) 20 times. [Function] The RSPF paper feed solenoid (SPUS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by the use of the solenoid drive control Bios. [Operation] 1) Initial display 02-08 SPF SPUS CHK EXECUTING...
06 08
09
RSPF reverse solenoid operation check (Only the AR-M200/M201 with the RSPF installed)
[Function] The RSPF reverse solenoid (SPFS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by the use of the solenoid drive control Bios. [Operation] 1) Initial display 02-09 RSPF SPFS CHK EXECUTING...
03
03
Shifter operation check (AR-M200/M201)
[Function] The shifter is moved back and forth in four reciprocations. [Operation] 1) Initial display 03-03 SHIFTER CHK EXECUTING...
Main code 05
Sub code 01
Contents Operation panel display check
Details of function/operation [Function] <LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)> When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, all the LCD's on the operation panel are turned ON (all pixels ON). After 5sec of ON, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. When [Mode Select] key is pressed under the all ON state, the mode is shifted to the individual ON mode, where the LED's are turned on one by one from the left upper end to the left lower side then from the right upper side to the right lower side. (All the pixels of LCD are lighted simultaneously.) After lighting all the LCD's sequentially, all the LCD's are lighted simultaneously. After 5sec from lighting all the LCD's simultaneously, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. (Cycle of individual ON mode: ON 300ms, OFF 20ms) When [Clear] key is pressed in the LED check mode, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. When [START] key is pressed, the machine goes into the key input check mode. <Key input check mode> When the machine goes into the key input check mode, the value display section indicates " " (For the AR-M200/M201, 0 of the LCD is indicated). When any key is pressed after pressing a key on the operation panel, "+1" is added to the value. Once a key is pressed, it is not recounted. When [START] key is pressed, counting is made and the machine goes into the LED ON check mode (LED all ON status) after 3sec. When [Clear] key is pressed for the first time, it is counted. When it is pressed for the second time, the key check mode is retained as well as when another key is pressed. (Note in the key input check mode) Be sure to press [START] key at the last. (If it is pressed on the way, the machine goes into the LED ON check mode.) (LED all ON status) Multi key input is ignored. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) <LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)> 1) Initial display 2) When [Mode Select] key is pressed, the machine goes into the individual ON mode. <Key input check mode> 1) Initial display 05-01 LCD/LED CHK. 0 2) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key 05-01 LCD/LED CHK. **
02
Fusing lamp, cooling fan operation check
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the fusing lamp repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 5 times. During this period, the cooling fan motor rotates. Note: When the CE mark setting is ON, the slow start function may operate depending on the employed frequency. If the state of the heater lamp cannot be checked, temporarily set SIM 2630 to "0" and check the lamp state. After confirming that the heater lamp is ON, set SIM 26-30 to "1" again. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 05-02 HT LAMP CHK EXECUTING...
03
Copy lamp ON
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the copy lamp turns ON for 5sec. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 05-03 C-LAMP CHK EXECUTING...
Main code 06
Sub code 01
Contents Paper feed solenoid ON
Details of function/operation [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the selected paper feed solenoid repeats ON for 500ms and OF for 500ms 20 times. When tray select key (or [Numeric] key or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) is pressed, the paper feed solenoid setting is switched. Code number 0 1 2 Setting CPFS1 CPFS2 MPFS Remark Operation is possible only when No. 2 cassette is installed.
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 06-01 PSOL CHK 0:CPFS1 2) [Numeric] key or [ 06-01 PSOL CHK 1:CPFS2 2) [Numeric] key or [ 06-01 PSOL CHK 2:MPFS 02 Resist solenoid ON ] key ] key 3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key 06-01 PSOL CHK EXECUTING... 4) Returns to the initial display.
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the resist solenoid repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 06-02 RES.R SOL CHK EXECUTING...
07
01
Warm-up display and aging with jam
[Function] Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies. When the simulation is executed, warm-up is started and warm-up time is added for every second from 0 and displayed. When warm-up is completed, addition is stopped. When [Clear All] key is pressed, the ready lamp lights up. After that, enter the copy quantity with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to repeat copying of the set quantity (interval 0sec). To cancel the simulation, turn off the power or execute a simulation which causes hardware reset. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 07-01 W-UP/AGING 0 2) After 10sec 07-01 W-UP/AGING 10
06
Intermittent aging
[Function] Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies. When the simulation is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted. Enter the copy quantity with the [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key, and copying is executed to make the set quantity of copies, and the ready state is kept for 3sec, and copying is executed again to make the set quantity of copies. These operations are repeated. To cancel the simulation, turn off the power or execute a simulation which executes hardware reset. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display (Basic display of copy) READY TO COPY 100% A4 0
08
Shift to copy with the warm-up display
[Function] Enter the simulation code, and warm-up is started and warm-up time is counted for every second from 0 and displayed. When [Clear All] key is pressed during counting up, "0" is displayed on the display and counting is stopped. However, warm-up is continued. After completion of warm-up, counting is terminated. (The aging function is removed from simulation 07-01.) [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 07-08 W-UP C-MODE 0 2) After 10sec 07-08 W-UP C-MODE 10
Main code 08
Sub code 01
Contents Developing bias
Details of function/operation [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the developing bias signal is turned ON for 30sec. When, however, an actual output value is measured, use simulation 25-01. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 08-01 DVLP BIAS SET. EXECUTING...
02
Main charger (Grid high)
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid voltage HIGH move. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 08-02 MHV(H) SET. EXECUTING...
03
Grid voltage (Low)
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid voltage LOW move. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 08-03 MHV(L) SET. EXECUTING...
06
Transfer charger
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the transfer charger is outputted for 30sec. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 08-06 THV SET. EXECUTING...
09
01
Duplex motor normal rotation operation check (AR-M201 only)
[Function] Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the normal direction (paper exit direction) for 30sec. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 09-01 DPLX ROT. EXECUTING...
02
Duplex motor reverse operation check (AR-M201 only)
[Function] Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the reverse direction for 30sec. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] 1) Initial display 09-02 DPLX ROT.REV. EXECUTING...
04
Duplex motor rotation speed adjustment (AR-M201 only)
[Function] When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed. Enter the adjustment value with [Numeric] key and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key. The entered value is stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. The greater the set value is, the higher the speed is. The smaller the set value is, the lower the speed is. (Setting range: 1 - 13, Default: 8) [Operation] 1) Initial display 09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED 8( 1-13) 2) [Numeric] key 09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED 7( 1-13) 3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key 09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED 7( 1-13)
Main code 10
Sub code
Contents Toner motor aging
Details of function/operation [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the toner motor is rotated for 30sec. After completion of this process, the machine goes into the main code entry standby mode. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 10-00 TONER MOTOR EXECUTING...
14
Cancel of troubles other than U2
[Function] Used to cancel troubles other than U2. Cancel troubles such as H trouble which writes data into EEPROM, and perform hardware reset. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 14-00 TRBL CANC. CLEARED
16
Cancel of U2 trouble
[Function] Used to cancel U2 trouble. When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, check sum of the total counter in the EEPROM is rewritten and hardware reset is made. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 16-00 U2 TRBL CANC. CLEARED
20
01
Maintenance counter clear
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the maintenance count value is cleared and "000,000" is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 20-01 M-CNT CLR. CLEARED 000,000 AR-203E/5420 The count value is displayed in 3 digits X 2 times repeatedly. <Display example: 012,345> 012 Blank 345 Blank 012 0.7s 0.3s 0.7s 1.0s 0.7s
21
01
Maintenance cycle setting
[Function] The currently set code of the maintenance cycle is displayed, and the newly set data are saved. Enter the code number with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/ M201) and press [START] key. The entered value is saved and the display returns to the sub code input standby state. Code number 0 1 2 3 4 5 Setting 3,000 sheets 6,000 sheets 9,000 sheets 13,000 sheets 25,000 sheets Free (999,999 sheets) Remark
Default
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) The current set value is displayed. 21-01 M-CYCLE 4:25,000 ( 0-5 ) 2) [ ] key or [Numeric] key 3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key 21-01 M-CYCLE 5:FREE ( 0-5 )
21-01 M-CYCLE 5:FREE ( 0-5 ) 2) [ ] key or [Numeric] key
21-01 M-CYCLE 3:13,000 ( 0-5 )
Main code 22
Sub code 01
Contents Maintenance counter display
Details of function/operation [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the maintenance counter is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 22-01 M-CNT ***,*** AR-203E/5420 The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
02
Maintenance preset display
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the preset value (25,000 sheets, etc.) corresponding to the code set with simulation 21-01 is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 22-02 M-CNT PRESET ***,*** AR-203E/5420 The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
04
JAM total counter display
[Function] The JAM total counter is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 22-04 JAM TTL CNT ***,*** AR-203E/5420 The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
05
Total counter display
[Function] The total counter value is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 22-05 TTL CNT ***,*** AR-203E/5420 The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
06
Developer counter display
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the developer counter value is obtained and displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 22-06 DVLP CNT ***,*** AR-203E/5420 The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
08
SPF/RSPF counter display (Only the AR-203E/M200/ M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
[Function] The SPF/RSPF counter is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 22-08 SPF CNT ***,*** AR-203E The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
11
FAX-related counter display (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Function] The FAX-related counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT COUNTER 1:PAGE 2:TIME [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 2) Select 1 SEND PAGE:xxx,xxx RECV PAGE:xxx,xxx ("xxx,xxx" is the current value.) [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". 2) Select 2 TX TIME:xxxxx:xx.xx RX TIME:xxxxx:xx.xx ("xxxxx: xx. xx" is the current value.) [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
Main code 22
Sub code 12
Contents Drum counter display [Function] The drum counter is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 22-12 DRUM CNT ***,***
Details of function/operation
AR-203E/5420 The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
13
CRUM type display
[Function] The CRUM type currently set (written) in the CRUM chip is displayed. Code number 00 01 02 03 99 CRUM type Not set BTA-A BTA-B BTA-C Conversion Display item 0 BTA-A BTA-B BTA-C CONVERSION
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) The CRUM type is displayed. 22-13 CRUM TYPE 01:BTA-A 14 ROM version display [Function] The P-ROM version is displayed. Press [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key or [ play version. Code number 0 1 2 [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 22-14 ROM VER. MAIN PROG. 00.00 2) [Numeric] key or [ ] key Version Main unit Program F-IMC Program LCD DATA
][
] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the dis-
Display item MAIN PROG. F-IMC PROG. LCD DATA
22-14 ROM VER. F-IMC PROG. 00.00 2) [Numeric] key or [ ] key
22-14 ROM VER. LCD DATA 00.00 AR-203E/5420 The operation is similar to simulation 20-01. 16 Duplex counter display (AR-M201 only) [Function] The duplex counter is displayed. [Operation] 1) Initial display 22-16 DPLX CNT ***,*** 17 Copy counter display [Function] The copy counter is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 22-17 COPIES CNT ***,*** AR-203E/5420 The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
Main code 22
Sub code 18
Contents Printer counter display [Function] The printer counter is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 22-18 PRT.CNT ***,***
AR-203E/5420 The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
19
Scanner mode counter display (AR-203E/M200/M201)
[Function] The scanner mode counter is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 22-19 S-MODE CNT ***,*** AR-203E The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
21
Scanner counter display
[Function] The scanner counter is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 22-21 SCAN CNT ***,*** AR-203E/5420 The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
22
SPF/RSPF JAM counter display (Only the AR-203E/ M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
[Function] The SPF/RSPF JAM counter is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 22-22 S JAM CNT ***,*** AR-203E The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
24
01
JAM total counter clear
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the JAM total counter is cleared to 0 and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 24-01 JAM TTL CLR. CLEARED 000,000 AR-203E/5420 The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
04
SPF/RSPF counter clear (Only the AR-203E/M200/ M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the SPF/RSPF counter value is cleared to 0 and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 24-04 SPF CLR. CLEARED 000,000 AR-203E The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
05
Duplex counter clear (AR-M201 only)
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the duplex counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-05 DPLX CLR. CLEARED 000,000
Main code 24
Sub code 06
Contents Developer counter clear
Details of function/operation [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the developer counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 24-06 DVLP CLR. CLEARED 000,000 AR-203E/5420 The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
07
Drum counter clear
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the drum counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 24-07 DRUM CLR. CLEARED 000,000 AR-203E/5420 The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
08
Copy counter clear
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the copy counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 24-08 COPIES CLR. CLEARED 000,000 AR-203E/5420 The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
09
Printer counter clear
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the printer counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 24-09 PRT.CLR. CLEARED 000,000 AR-203E/5420 The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
10
FAX counter clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the FAX count value is set to 0 and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD. [Operation] 1) Initial display 24-10 FAX CLR. CLEARED 000,000
13
Scanner counter clear
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the scanner counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 24-13 SCAN CLR. CLEARED 000,000 AR-203E/5420 The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
14
SPF/RSPF JAM total counter clear (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the SPF/RSPF JAM total counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 24-14 S JAM TTL CLR. CLEARED 000,000 AR-203E The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
Main code 24
Sub code 15
Contents Scanner mode counter clear (AR-203E/M200/M201)
Details of function/operation [Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the scanner mode counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is displayed on the LCD/display. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 24-15 S-MODE CLR. CLEARED 000,000 AR-203E The operation is similar to simulation 20-01.
25
01
Main motor operation check (Cooling fan motor rotation check)
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the main motor (and the duplex motor in the case of a duplex model) is operated for 30sec. To reduce toner consumption, if the developing unit is installed, the developing bias, the main charger, and the grid are also outputted. In this case, laser discharge is required when stopping the motor, the polygon motor is also operated at the same time. Check for installation of the developing unit. If it is not installed, the high voltage above is not outputted and only the motor is rotated. To check the developing bias, install the developing unit. After completion of 30sec operation, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 25-01 MAIN MOTOR CHK EXECUTING...
10
Polygon motor ON
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the Bios is called to rotate the polygon motor for 30sec. After completion of 30sec operation, the operation is turned off with the Bios and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 25-10 LSU CHK EXECUTING...
26
02
SPF/RSPF setup
[Function] When this simulation is executed, the current set SPF/RSPF is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired SPF/RSPF and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 2 SPF/RSPF SPF NO SPF YES RSPF YES Display item SPF OFF SPF ON RSPF ON
For the AR-203E/5420, the code number cannot be set to 2. For the AR-M200/M201, the code number cannot be set to 1. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) The current set value is displayed. 26-02 SPF/RSPF 1:SPF ON (0- 2) 2) [Numeric] key or [ 26-02 SPF/RSPF 0:SPF OFF (0- 2) 03 Second cassette setup ] key 2) [Numeric] key or [ 26-02 SPF/RSPF 2:RSPF ON (0- 2) 3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key 26-02 SPF/RSPF 2:RSPF ON (0- 2) ] key AR-203E/5420 1) Press [ ] [ ] key to change the code number. 2) Press [START] key to fix the code number.
[Function] When this simulation is executed, the current set second cassette is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired second cassette and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 Second cassette Second cassette NO Second cassette YES Display item OFF ON
For the AR-203E/5420/M200/M201, the code number cannot be set to 1. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 13
Main code 26
Sub code 04
Contents Machine duplex setup
Details of function/operation [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current set duplex is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired duplex and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 Duplex Duplex NO Duplex YES* Display item OFF ON
* AR-203E/5420/M200: cannot be executed. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current set destination is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired destination and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 2 Destination Inch series EX Japan AB series Japan AB series Display item INCH AB
06
Destination setup
* Code number 2 cannot be selected. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current machine setting is displayed. CPM 20 CPM Copy quantity 20 Remark
07
Machine conditions check
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) The machine setting is displayed. 26-07 CPM 20 CPM 20 Rear edge void setup [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current set rear edge void is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired rear edge void and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 Setting Rear edge void NO Rear edge void YES Display item OFF ON Remark Default
30
CE mark support control ON/OFF
[Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current set CE mark support control is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired CE mark support control and press [OK]/ [ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 Setting CE mark support control OFF CE mark support control ON Display item OFF ON Remark Default (100V series)
37
Cancel of stop at developer life over
[Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to change the setting. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 21-01. [Function] When the simulation is executed, the currently installed SDRAM of the main unit is displayed. Code number 8 16 Setting 8 MBYTE 16 MBYTE Remark
39
Memory capacity check
[Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Memory capacity display 26-39 MEM.CHK 8 MBYTE AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 14
Main code 26
Sub code 40
Contents Polygon motor OFF time setup (Time required for turning OFF after completion of printing)
Details of function/operation [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the desired setting and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 2 3 Setting 0sec 30sec 60sec 90sec Display item AR-M200/M201 AR-203E/5420 0 SEC. 0 30 SEC. 30 60 SEC. 60 90 SEC. 90 Remark Default
42
Transfer ON timing control setup
[Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. [Function] AR-203E/5420 When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed. Enter the code number and press the [START] key, and the setting will be changed. (For any number different from the following ones, the default time is automatically set.) <Paper lead edge adjustment table> Code number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Setting Default (236 msec) 20 msec 18 msec 16 msec 14 msec 12 msec 10 msec 8 msec 6 msec 4 msec 2 msec Code number 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Setting Default (236 msec) +2 msec +4 msec +6 msec +8 msec +10 msec +12 msec +14 msec +16 msec +18 msec +20 msec
* The default value, "11," of the transfer ON timing indicates "236msec passed from PS release." * When set to "0," it is same as setting to the default, "11." * The transfer ON timing can be adjusted to 236msec 2ms. AR-M200/M201 For the AR-M200/M201, the adjustment can be made individually for each of the following modes. Mode Front surface paper lead edge Front surface paper rear edge Back surface paper lead edge Back surface paper rear edge Display item F-REAR F-END B-REAR B-END Default 11 50 11 50 Setting range 0 - 21 1 - 99 0 - 21 1 - 99
<Paper lead edge adjustment table> is the same as that of the AR-203E/5420 above. <Front/back surface of paper rear edge adjustment table> Code 1 ... 49 50 51 ... 99 Setting 98 msec ... 2 msec 0 msec +2 msec ... +98 msec Remark
Default
* The default "50" of the transfer OFF timing indicates "210msec passed from PPD1OFF." * The transfer OFF timing can be adjusted to 210msec 2ms. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display <Front surface lead edge setting> 26-42 TC ON TIMING F-REAR 11( 0-21 ) 2) [ ][ ] key: Mode selection 3) [Numeric] key: Value entry 26-42 TC ON TIMING F-END 51( 1-99 ) 4) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key: Settles the entered value. The display is shifted to the sub code input standby menu.
26-42 TC ON TIMING F-END 50( 1-99 )
Main code 26
Sub code 43
Contents Side void setup
Details of function/operation [Function] When this simulation is executed, the currently set code of the side void quantity is displayed (initial display), and the set data are saved. (Setting range: 0 10, Default: 4 (= One side 2.0mm)) Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 Setting 0 mm 0.5 mm 1.0 mm 1.5 mm 2.0 mm 2.5 mm Remark Code 6 7 8 9 10 Setting 3.0 mm 3.5 mm 4.0 mm 4.5 mm 5.5 mm Remark
Default
* When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the side void is changed as follows: Side void adjustment: The side void is increased by 0.5mm. (The side void of "Set value x 0.5mm" is made.) [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 26-43 SIDE VOID 4( 0-10) 2) [Numeric] key 26-43 SIDE VOID 5( 0-10) 3) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key 26-43 SIDE VOID 5( 0-10) 54 life correction setting [Function] Used to set the life correction. When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. (Setting range: 0 1, default: 1) Code number 0 1 Setting OFF ON Display item OFF ON Remark Default AR-203E/5420 1) Press [ ] [ ] key to change the code number. 2) Press [START] key to fix the code number.
62
Energy-save mode copy lamp setup
[Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. [Function] Used to set half-ON /OFF of the copy lamp in the pre-heat mode. When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. Code number 0 1 Setting Copy lamp OFF Copy lamp half-ON Display item OFF ON Remark Default
30
01
Paper sensor status display
[Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. [Function] The paper sensor status is displayed on the LCD/LED. Sensor Paper exit sensor No. 1 tray paper width sensor (AR-M200/M201 only) No. 2 tray paper width sensor (AR-M200/ M201 only) Paper entry sensor Duplex sensor (AR-M201 only) No. 2 tray paper feed sensor New drum cartridge sensor Display item Display lamp (AR-203E/5420) (AR-M200/M201) POD Photoconductor cartridge replacement lamp PD1 PD2 PPD1 PPD2 PPD3 DRST Developer cartridge replacement lamp JAM lamp 2nd cassette lamp Zoom lamp
Since the manual paper feed sensor is a single bypass sensor, its status is not displayed. The width sensor is available only in the FAX models. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 30-01 P-SENSOR 2) When sensor ON 30-01 POD PD1 PD2 PPD1 PPD2 PPD3 DRST
Main code 41
Sub code 06
Contents OC cover float detection level adjustment (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
Details of function/operation [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed. When [OK]/[ENTER]/ [START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the SPF/RSPF scan position to acquire the OC cover float detection level. When the mirror base unit returns to the home position, the acquired value is displayed. If the adjustment is NG, the following message is displayed. AR-203E/5420: Misfeed lamp lights up, and the 7seg display remains unchanged. AR-M200/M201: The LCD indicates "ERR." Note that, this simulation must be executed with the OC cover closed. If the value is 0, float detection is not performed in normal jobs. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL 0 2) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key 41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL EXECUTING... <Canceling - when [Clear]/[Clear All] key is pressed-> After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. THE JOB IS BEING CANCELED. 3) When the level is acquired: 41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL **** OK 3) When the level is not acquired: 41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL **** ERR
07
OC cover float detection margin setting (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
[Function] For the number of pixels between black markers on the SPF/RSFP scanning position saved in "41-06: (OC cover float detection level adjustment)", if the number of pixels between the markers when processing float detection is less than the number of pixels set with this simulation, it is judged as the float error. When the set value of this simulation is "0," no float error occurs. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed. Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201), and press [START] key. The setting is saved and the display is shifted to the sub code input standby menu. Setting range: 0 99 (Copes with margin 0 99 pixels.) Default: 30 (30 pixels) [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 09-04. [Function] Used to set the fusing temperature of 3rd or later sheet. (For 1st and 2nd sheets, simulation 4314 is used.) When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Press [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) to change the setting and press [OK]/[ENTER]/ [START] key to save the setting into the EERPOM. The machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. The [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) is used to select the mode. Code 0 1 2 3 4 Set temperature (C) 170 175 180 185 190 Mode Remark Code 5 6 7 8 Set temperature (C) 195 200 205 210 Remark Default
43
01
Fusing temperature setting (Normal copy)
Display item (AR-M200/M201) Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed TRAY1 Manual paper feed MFT * The cassette feed and the manual feed are controlled similarly. [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display <Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed setting> 43-01 FU TEMP TRAY1 6( 0-8 ) 2) [ ][ ] key: Mode selection 43-01 FU TEMP MFT 6( 0-8 ) 3) [Numeric] key: Value entry 43-01 FU TEMP MFT 6( 0-8 )
Display item (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp
4) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key Settles the entered value. The display is shifted to the sub code input standby menu. AR-203E/5420 1) Press [Exposure mode selector] key to change the mode. 2) Press [ ] [ ] key to set the value. 3) Press [START] key to fix the code number.
Main code 43
Sub code 04
Contents Fusing temperature setting in multi copy
Details of function/operation [Function] For 20th sheet or later in multi copy, the fusing temperature is automatically changed from the temperature set with simulation 43-01 to the temperature set with this simulation. When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to change the setting. Code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Set temperature (C) 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 Mode Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed Manual paper feed Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed (small-size) Manual paper feed (small-size) Remark
Display item (AR-M200/M201) TRAY1 MFT TRAY1 SH MFT SH
Display lamp (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp
Default 3 3 1 1
The cassette feed and the manual feed are controlled similarly. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 43-01. [Function] In the case of duplex copy, the shift temperature set with this simulation is applied to the fusing temperature. When this simulation is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save the setting. Code Shift temperature (C) 0 0 1 8 2 6 3 4 4 2 Remark Default Code Shift temperature (C) 5 0 6 +2 7 +4 8 +6 9 +8 Remark
05
Fusing temperature setup in duplex copy (AR-M201 only)
14
Fusing start temperature setting
[Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. [Function] When this simulation is started, the currently set code number is displayed. Press [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the setting, and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to save it to the EEPROM. The machine goes to the sub code entry standby mode. Code Set temperature (C) 0 160 1 165 2 170 3 175 4 180 5 185 Remark Code Set temperature (C) 6 190 7 195 8 200 9 205 10 210 Remark Default
[Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 43-01.
Main code 46
Sub code 01
Contents Copy density adjustment (300dpi)
Details of function/operation [Function] Copy density is set for each mode. When this simulation is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value. When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, the copy becomes lighter. In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lighter, too. Press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD/display. (Adjustment value: 1 99) The setting procedure of the magnification ratio is the same as that to copy operation. Mode AE mode (300dpi) TEXT mode (300dpi) PHOTO mode TS mode (TEXT) (300dpi) TS mode (AE) (300dpi) [Operation] AR-M200/M201 1) Initial display 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 AE 100% 50( 1-99) 2) [ ] key: Mode selection 4) To fix the set value without printing, press [OK]/[ENTER] key. 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 AE 100% 62( 1-99) * To cancel manual feed paper empty MSG, press any key. * When performing the AE mode exposure adjustment, place the test chart on the document table so that the center area of 10cm is not covered. AR-203E/5420 1) Press [Exposure mode selector] key to change the mode. 2) Press [ ] [ ] key to set the value. 3) [START] Fixing and printing value * Print is started in the set mode. Display item (AR-M200/M201) AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT TSAE LED (AR-M200/M201) COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp Display lamp (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp AE mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp Default 50 50 50 50 50
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 TSAE 100% 50( 1-99) 2) [ ] key: Mode selection
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 TEXT 100% 50( 1-99) 3) [Numeric] key: Value entry 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 AE 100% 62( 1-99) 4) [START] key: Fixing and printing value (No change on the LCD) * Print is started in the set mode. 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 AE 100% 62( 1-99) 02 Copy density adjustment (600dpi)
[Function] Copy density is set for each mode. When this simulation is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value. When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, the copy becomes lighter. In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lighter, too. Press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD/display. (Adjustment value: 1 99) Mode AE mode (600dpi) TEXT mode (600dpi) PHOTO mode TS mode (TEXT) (600dpi) TS mode (AE) (600dpi) Display item (AR-M200/M201) AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT TSAE LED (AR-M200/M201) COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp Display lamp Default (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp 50 TEXT mode lamp 50 PHOTO mode lamp 50 TEXT mode lamp 50 PHOTO mode lamp AE mode lamp 50 PHOTO mode lamp
[Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 19
Main code 46
Sub code 12
Contents Density adjustment in the FAX mode (Collective adjustment) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Details of function/operation [Function] When [START] key is pressed, scan is executed with the entered exposure adjustment value and the data stored on the FAX side is rewritten into the entered value. All data of the exposure adjustment values are rewritten into the same value. For the density adjustment table data, refer to simulation 46-13 (density adjustment (Normal text) in the FAX mode). [Operation] 1) Initial display ADJUST EXP. AUTO XX 3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED of [START] key is turned off. ADJUST SCAN EXP. AUTO YY
("XX" is the exposure adjustment value of normal text stored on the FAX side.) 2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjustment value. ADJUST EXP. AUTO YY
4) Print is started (self print). ADJUST PRINT EXP. AUTO YY
After completion of printing, returns to 2) display.
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment value.) 13 FAX mode density adjustment (Normal text) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Scan is started with the exposure adjustment value entered with [START] key, and the stored data of the selected mode on the FAX side is rewritten into the input value. Density adjustment value data table Mode STD (Normal text) Fine (Fine text) Sfine (Super fine) Photo off on off on off Exposure adjustment value
When initializing each data: 50 [Operation] 1) Initial display ADJUST EXP. STD XX 3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED of [START] key is turned off. ADJUST SCAN EXP. STD YY
("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of normal text mode stored on the FAX side.) 2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjustment value with [Numeric] key. ADJUST EXP. STD YY
4) Print is started (self print). ADJUST PRINT EXP. STD YY
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment value.) 14 FAX mode density adjustment (Fine text) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and the data of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value. For the density adjustment value table data, refer to simulation 46-13 (FAX mode density adjustment (Normal text).) [Operation] 1) Initial display ADJUST EXP. FINE XX 3) Scan start (self print) ADJUST SCAN EXP. FINE YY
("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of the fine text mode stored on the FAX side.) 2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjustment value with [Numeric] key. ADJUST EXP. FINE YY
4) Print start (self print) ADJUST PRINT EXP. AUTO YY
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment value.) AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 20
Main code 46
Sub code 15
Contents FAX mode density adjustment (Super fine) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Details of function/operation [Function] When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and the data of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value. For the density adjustment value table data, refer to simulation 46-13 (FAX mode density adjustment (Normal text).) [Operation] 1) Initial display ADJUST EXP. S-FINE XX 3) Scan start (self print) ADJUST SCAN EXP. S-FINE YY
("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjustment value of the super fine mode stored on the FAX side.) 2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure adjustment value with [Numeric] key. ADJUST EXP. S-FINE YY
4) Print start (self print) ADJUST PRINT EXP. S-FINE YY
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment value.) 18 Image contrast adjustment (300dpi) [Function] Contrast is set for each mode. When this simulation is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value. When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is decreased, the contrast becomes lower. In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher contrast, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lower contrast, too. Press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD/display. (Adjustment value: 1 99) Display item (AR-M200/M201) AE mode (300dpi) AE TEXT mode (300dpi) TEXT PHOTO mode PHOTO TS mode (TEXT) TSTXT (300dpi) TS mode (AE) TSAE (300dpi) Mode * No density display on LCD/display. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. LED (AR-M200/M201) COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp Display lamp Default (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp 50 TEXT mode lamp 50 PHOTO mode lamp 50 TEXT mode lamp 50 PHOTO mode lamp AE mode lamp 50 PHOTO mode lamp
Main code 46
Sub code 19
Contents Exposure mode setup [Function] < table setting>
When this simulation is executed, the code number of the current set gamma table is displayed. (Default: 2) Enter the code number corresponding to the desired gamma table, and press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) to change the mode and write into the EEPROM. <AE operation mode> ] key for the AR-M200/ When setting the table, press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ M201) to change to the AE operation mode, and the current set code number of the AE operation mode is displayed. (Default: 0) Enter the code number corresponding to the desired AE operation mode and press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) to change the mode and write into the EEPROM. <PHOTO image process setting> When [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) is pressed in AE operation mode setting, the mode is changed to the PHOTO image process setting and the code number of the current set PHOTO image process setting is displayed. (Default: 1) Enter the code number corresponding to the desired PHOTO image process setting and press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) to change the mode and write into the EEPROM. Mode Display item Display lamp Code (AR-M200/M201) (AR-203E/5420) number 1
Setting content Image quality priority mode Toner consumption priority mode Lead edge stop Real time process Error diffusion process Dither process
Remark
GAMMA
OFF 2 0 1 1 2
Default Default Default
AE PHOTO
AE PHOTO
AE PHOTO
20
SPF/RSPF exposure correction (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
[Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 43-01. [Function] Used to adjust the exposure correction amount in the SPF/RSPF mode. The adjustment is made by adjusting Vref voltage variation for the OC mode. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy. When the set value is increased, copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, copy becomes lighter. (Adjustment range: 1 99) Mode RSPF/SPF Display item (AR-M200/M201) SPF Display lamp (AR-203E) TEXT mode lamp Default 50 Remark
Main code 46
Sub code 29
Contents Image contrast adjustment (600dpi)
Details of function/operation [Function] Contrast is set for each mode. When this simulation is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50). Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value. When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is decreased, the contrast becomes lower. In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher contrast, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast, Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lower contrast, too. Press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the LCD/display. (Adjustment value: 1 99) Display item (AR-M200/M201) AE mode (600dpi) AE TEXT mode (600dpi) TEXT PHOTO mode PHOTO TS mode (TEXT) TSTXT (600dpi) TS mode (AE) TSAE (600dpi) Mode * No density display on LCD/display. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. [Function] Used to set the limit value in AE and AE (toner save). Change the setting and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to write the setting into the EEPROM. The machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. By pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201), setting is changed. (Setting range: 0 31, Default: 0) Mode Limit value for AE Limit value for AE (toner save) <Remark> When simulation 26-06 (Destination setting) or simulation 46-19 Auto Exposure mode is changed, the setting of this simulation is also changed to the default in connection. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-19. [Function] Used to adjust sharpening/blurring of image in each mode. Image quality Blurring Standard Sharpening Setting No 0 1 2 Remark Default Display item (AR-M200/M201) AE TEXT Display lamp (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp Remark LED (AR-M200/M201) COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp Display lamp (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp AE mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp Default 50 50 50 50 50
30
AE limit adjustment
31
Image sharpness adjustment
When this simulation is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set value is displayed. (Default: 1) Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions. To change the mode, press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/ M201). The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on the LCD/display. Mode AE mode TEXT mode PHOTO mode TS mode (TEXT) TS mode (AE) Display item (AR-M200/M201) AE TEXT PHOTO TSTXT TSAE LED (AR-M200/M201) COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp Display lamp (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp AE mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp Default 1 1 1 1 1
Main code 46
Sub code 32
Contents Copier color reproduction setup
Details of function/operation [Function] Used to set color reproduction in each mode. Colors easy to be copied and colors difficult to be copied can be switched. Set value 0 1 2 Colors easy to be copied Purple, Blue, Red Water blue, Green, Blue Yellow, Red, Green Colors difficult to be copied Yellow, Green, Water blue Purple, Red, Yellow Blue, Water blue, Purple
* This setting has virtually no effect on black-and-white documents. When this simulation is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set value is displayed. (Default: 0) Press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions . At that time, color components are changed for used in copying. To change the mode, press [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/ M201). The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on the LCD/display. Specification component Green Red Blue Mode AE mode (including TS) TEXT mode (including TS) PHOTO mode Setting No 0 1 2 Remark Default
Display item (AR-M200/M201) AE TEXT PHOTO
LED (AR-M200/M201) COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp
Display lamp (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp
Default 0 0 0
39
FAX mode sharpness adjustment (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. [Function] When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered sharpness adjustment value, and the data of the selected mode stored on the FAX side is changed to the entered value. Sharpness adjustment value data table 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: Mode STD FINE S-FINE FINE/PHOTO S-FINE/PHOTO Sharpness adjustment value
When initializing each data: 1 [Operation] 1) Initial display SHARPNESS SETTING PRESS , 2) [ ][ ] key or after 2sec Every time when [ ] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 2 3 4 5 1. When [ ] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SHARPNESS SET (1-5) 1:STD 3) Select the arrow key 1-5, and the LED of [START] key is lighted. SHARPNESS SETTING ZZZZ(0-2) X ("ZZZZ" is the mode selected among STD, FINE, S-FINE, FINE/PHOTO, and S-FINE/ PHOTO.) ("X" is the corresponding sharpness adjustment value of the selected mode stored on the FAX side.) [Clear] key: Returns to 2) display. AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 SIMULATION, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 24 4) Enter a one-digit value (0-2) as the sharpness adjustment value with [Numeric] key. SHARPNESS SETTING ZZZZ(0-2) Y ("Y" is the entered sharpness adjustment value.) [Clear] key: Returns to 2) display. 5) Scan start (self print) SHARPNESS SETTING SCAN Y 6) Print start (self print) SHARPNESS SETTING PRINT Y After completion of printing, returns to 4) display.
Main code 48
Sub code 01
Contents Front/rear (main scanning) direction and scan (sub scanning) direction magnification ratio adjustment
Details of function/operation [Function] Used to adjust the magnification ratio in the main scan (front/rear) direction and sub scan direction. Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201). Press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. (When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.) The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ key for the AR-M200/M201). (Adjustment range: 1 99, Default: 50) Mode ][ ]
Display item LED Display lamp Default (AR-M200/M201) (AR-M200/M201) (AR-203E/5420) Main scan direction F-R PRINT mode TEXT mode lamp 50 magnification ratio lamp OC mode sub scan SCAN SCAN mode PHOTO mode 50 direction magnification ratio lamp lamp [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. [Function] Used to display the current SPF/RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio on the LCD/ display. When [START] key is pressed, the entered data is acquired and saved into the EEPROM, and a copy is made. (When the set value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.) The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ key for the AR-M200/M201). (Adjustment range: 1 99, Default: 50) ][ ]
05
SPF/RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio in copying (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
When adjusting the RSPF, the mode is set to "Duplex Single," single copies of two sheets are performed. For printing, regardless of the density mode and the density level, Density mode = MANUAL Density level = 3 Mode Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment on the front surface of SPF/RSPF document Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment on the back surface of RSPF document (AR-M200/ M201) Display item LED Display Initial value of (AR-M200/ (AR-M200/ lamp duplex setting M201) M201) (AR-203E) S-S SIDE1 COPY mode AE mode lamp lamp Default 50
D-S
SIDE2
PRINT mode lamp
50
* When there is no document in SPF/RSPF, copy is inhibited. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
Main code 49
Sub code 01
Contents Flash ROM program writing mode
Details of function/operation [Function] When this simulation is executed, "d" is displayed on the display (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD for the AR-M200/M201), the machine goes into the program writing mode from PC to Flash ROM. Use the writing tool on the PC and write the program. During writing, the display shows as follows: After completion of download, turn OFF/ON the power to reset.
AR-M200/M201 Status Download data receiving Loader function transfer Date delete start Data write (Boot section) Data write (Program section) Data write (EEPROM) Data write (LCD) During SUM CHECK During BOOT SUM CHECK During EEPROM SUM CHECK Download complete Error state Display item RECEIVING LOADER COPYING FLASH ERASE BOOT WRITING PROGRAM WRITING E2PROM WRITING LCD DATE WRITING FLASH ROM SUM CHECK BOOT SUM CHECK EEPROM SUM CHECK DOWNLOAD COMPLETE! "0FF" ON "E " ON OFF OFF OFF OFF AR-203E/5420 AR-203E/5420 Pre-heat Ready lamp lamp "d" ON ON OFF OFF Blink Blink ON OFF Blink AR-M200/M201 AR-M200/M201 "d" ON ON ON AR-M200/M201 AR-M200/M201 Remark
Display
AR-M200/M201 "d" ON "d" ON "d" ON
* "" in an error display indicates the error position. 1 2 3 4 5 Data reception error Loader function transfer FLASH ROM delete FLASH ROM writing (Boot section) FLASH ROM writing (Program section) 6 7 8 9 10 Sum check (Loader section) Sum check (Boot section) Sum check (Program section) Sum check (EEPROM section) Data error
In case of an error in download, the following message is displayed on the LCD. (AR-M200/M201) Error status PC data receiving Loader function transfer FLASH ROM delete Boot section FLASH ROM write Program section FLASH ROM write Loader section SUM CHECK Boot section SUM CHECK Program section SUM CHECK E2PROM SUM CHECK E2PROM write E2PROM read Verify E2PROM collating Verify Boot section lens check Program section lens check E2PROM lens check Total data size check IMC communication error IMC FRASH ROM write LCD section lens check LCD section FLASH ROM write LCD section SUM CHECK Display item E-01 PC TRANS E-02 LOADER COPY E-03 FLASH ERASE E-04 BOOT WRITE E-05 PROGRAM WRITE E-06 LOADER SUM E-07 BOOT SUM E-08 PROGRAM SUM E-09 E2PROM SUM E-10 E2PROM WRITE E-11 E2PROM READ E-12 E2PROM COLLATE E-13 BOOT LENGTH E-14 PROGRAM LENGTH E-15 E2PROM LENGTH E-16 DATE SIZE E-17 IMC TRANS E-18 IMC FLASH WRITE E-19 LCD DATE LENGTH E-20 LCD DATE WRITE E-21 LCD DATE SUM
To enter the download mode, there is a method to use key operations as well as to use a simulation. With the power OFF, press and hold [Clear All] key + [ ] key, turn on the power. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display DOWNLOAD MODE
Main code 50
Sub code 01
Contents Lead edge image position
Details of function/operation [Function] Used to adjust the copy image position and the lead edge void amount on copy paper. The adjustment is made by adjusting the image scan start position at 100% and the print start position (resist roller ON timing). When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits. (Center value: 50) When [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201) is pressed, the setting mode and the display are changed. Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. When the adjustment is made by the main cassette paper feed, the adjustment values of all the paper feed ports become the same. (When the set value is increased by 1, shift is made by 0.1mm.)
Mode Print start position (Main cassette paper feed) (*) Print start position (2nd cassette paper feed) Print start position (Manual paper feed) Image lead edge void amount Image scan start position Image rear edge void amount (Cassette paper feed) Image rear edge void amount (Manual paper feed) Display item (AR-M200/M201) TRAY1 TRAY2 MFT DEN-A RRC-A DEN-B LED (AR-M200/M201) COPY mode lamp Main cassette lamp COPY mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp COPY mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp PRINT mode lamp Main cassette lamp SCAN mode lamp Main cassette lamp COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp Main cassette lamp COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp Display lamp (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp Main cassette lamp AE mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp AE mode lamp Manual feed lamp TEXT mode lamp Main cassette lamp PHOTO mode lamp Main cassette lamp AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp Main cassette lamp COPY mode lamp TEXT mode lamp Manual feed lamp Default 50 50 50 50 50 50
RRC-B
50
(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip. * When printing with the manual paper feed tray, use paper of the letter size. * When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated. [Adjustment procedure] 1) Set the print start position (AE lamp ON) (A), the lead edge void amount (TEXT lamp ON) (B), and the scan start position (PHOTO lamp ON) (C) to 0, and make a copy of a scale at 100%. (AR-203E/5420) For the AR-M200/M201, the following LEDs are lighted: AE lamp/COPY mode lamp: (A) TEXT lamp/PRINT mode lamp: (B) PHOTO lamp/SCAN mode lamp: (C) 2) Measure the image loss (Rmm) of the scale. Set C = 10 x R (mm). (Example: Set to 40.) When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50) 3) Measure the distance (Hmm) from the paper lead edge to the image print start position. Set A = 10 x H (mm). (Example: Set to 50.) When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is moved to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50). 4) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm). (Default: 50) When the value of B is increased by 10, the void is extended by about 0.1mm. (For 25 or less, however, the void amount is regarded as 0.) The SPF/RSPF adjustment is made by adjusting the SPF/RSPF image scan start position after OC adjustment. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
5mm
(Example)
Distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge, H = 5mm Image loss, R = 4mm
10mm
Main code 50
Sub code 06
Contents Copy lead edge position adjustment (SPF/RSPF) (Only the AR-203E/M200/ M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
Details of function/operation [Function] Used to adjust the SPF/RSPF copy lead edge. When the adjustment value of the document scan position adjustment is increased by 1, the scan start timing is advanced by 0.1mm. The print result is shifted to the opposite direction of the scan start position. The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ key for the AR-M200/M201). (Adjustment range: 1 99, Default: 50) ][ ]
When scanning a back surface of document, the mode must be changed to operate the SPF/ RSPF by pressing [2-SIDED SCAN]/[2-SIDED COPY] key. Mode Front surface document scan position adjustment Back surface document scan position adjustment (AR-M200/M201) Rear edge void adjustment (RSPF) Initial value of duplex setting S-S Display item (AR-M200/ M201) SIDE1 LED (AR-M200/ M201) COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp Display lamp (AR-203E) AE mode lamp Default 50
D-S
SIDE2
50
S-S
END
SCAN mode lamp
PHOTO mode lamp
50
When there is no document in the SPF/RSPF, copy is inhibited. When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. [Function] Used to adjust the center offset position of copy images on copy paper and that in scanning document. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed. Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy. (When the set value is changed by 1, the center is shifted by 0.1mm.) When the adjustment value is increased, the center is shifted to right. When decreased, the center is shifted to left. The modes can be selected by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ ][ ] key for the AR-M200/M201). When the set value is changed largely, the area outside the shading area may be scanned to cause black streaks on the edges. When the SPF/RSPF is used, select the mode for use of the SPF/RSPF by [2-SIDED SCAN]/[2-SIDED COPY] key. Mode Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) (*) Print center offset (2nd cassette paper feed) Print center offset (Manual paper feed) (**) 2nd print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) Display item LED Display lamp Default (AR-M200/M201) (AR-M200/M201) (AR-203E/5420) TRAY1 COPY mode lamp AE mode lamp 50 Main cassette lamp Main cassette lamp TRAY2 COPY mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp COPY mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp PRINT mode lamp Main cassette lamp AE mode lamp 2nd cassette lamp AE mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp TEXT mode lamp Main cassette lamp 50
10
Center offset adjustment
MFT
50
SIDE2
50
(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip. (**): For Simplex models, skip. * When printing with the manual paper feed tray, use paper of the letter size. * In the 2nd print center offset adjustment, print is made forcibly as 1to2/Short Edge from OC regardless of duplex setting. * When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
Main code 50
Sub code 12
Contents Document off-center adjustment
Details of function/operation [Function] Used to adjust document scan off-center adjustment. The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ [ ] key for the AR-M200/M201). (Adjustment range: 1 99, Default: 50) When the adjustment value is increased, the print result is shifted to left. Mode Platen document scan SPF document front scan RSPF document back scan (AR-M200/M201) Initial value Display item LED of duplex (AR-M200/ (AR-M200/ setting M201) M201) S-S OC COPY mode lamp S-S SPF PRINT mode lamp D-S RSPF SCAN mode lamp Display lamp (AR-203E/ 5420) AE mode lamp TEXT mode lamp Default 50 50 50
* When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. [Function] When this simulation is executed, the current set correction value is displayed. Enter the correction value and press [START] key to save the entered correction value. (Correction value range; 1 99, Default: 50) For S-D mode front surface print and print of even paged in D-S mode, reverse memory copy operation is performed from the rear edge of documents. When, therefore, the print position adjustment of output images is required, adjust as follows: In the reverse memory coping, when the document scan is made in the arrow direction, the output image is printed from the rear edge of scan image. When, therefore, the print lead edge is shifted, set the reference chart so that the reference position is on the rear edge, and use this simulation to adjust the set value so that the print lead edge is matched. Since printing is made from the image data most lately stored in memory to the lead edge data from the print start position, the image lead edge adjustment is made by changing the end data position stored in memory by the set value of this simulation. Since it is performed by changing the scan end position, the image position adjustment is made by changing the scan end position and the end data stored in memory. The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [ Mode OC memory reverse output position (AR-M201 only) SPF/RSPF memory reverse output position Initial value of duplex setting S-D ][ ] key. LED COPY mode lamp PRINT mode lamp Default 50
18
Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copy (Only the AR-M201, or the AR-M200 with the RSPF installed)
Display item OC
D-S
SPF
50
Document transport direction Scan lead edge
Document transport direction Print lead edge Lead edge void (1) Print start position
Scan end position (Default: Scan cut by void (1)) Scan direction Scan rear edge
Rear edge void Print rear edge
* The initial value of duplex setting is "1to2/Long Edge" for the duplex model, or "2to1" for the simplex model. When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
Main code 50
Sub code 19
Contents Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment (AR-M201 only)
Details of function/operation [Function] Used to adjust the rear edge void amount in duplex copy. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits. (Center value: 50.) The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [ ][ ] key. (Adjustment range; 1 99) Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. (The paper information is cleared for every copy.) When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is increased by about 0.1mm. Mode Paper rear edge void amount Print start position (Duplex back surface) Display item DEN-B RRC-D LED PRINT mode lamp SCAN mode lamp Default 50 50
* The initial value for duplex setting is "1to2/Short Edge" for the OC setting, or "2to2" for the RSPF setting. When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. [Function] Used to adjust the contact pressure of the main unit resist roller and the SPF/RSPF resist roller onto paper. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed. The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [Exposure mode selector] key (or [ [ ] key for the AR-M200/M201). ]
51
02
Resist quantity adjustment
Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. Display item LED (AR-M200/M201) (AR-M200/M201) Main cassette TRAY1 COPY mode lamp paper feed Main cassette lamp (*) 2nd cassette TRAY2 COPY mode lamp paper feed 2nd cassette lamp Manual paper feed MFT COPY mode lamp Manual paper feed lamp RSPF document SIDE1 COPY mode lamp paper feed PRINT mode lamp (Front surface) SCAN mode lamp (AR-M200/M201) Main cassette lamp RSPF document SIDE2 COPY mode lamp paper feed PRINT mode lamp (Back surface) Main cassette lamp (AR-M200/M201) (*) Duplex back DUP-2 PRINT mode lamp surface SCAN mode lamp (AR-M201 only) Main cassette lamp Mode Display lamp Default (AR-203E/5420) AE mode lamp 50 Main cassette lamp AE mode lamp 50 2nd cassette lamp AE mode lamp 50 Manual paper feed lamp 50
50
TEXT mode lamp PHOTO mode lamp Main cassette lamp
50
(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) The operation is similar to simulation 46-01.
Main code 53
Sub code 08
Contents SPF/RSPF scan position automatic adjustment (Only the AR-203E/M200/M201 with the SPF/RSPF installed)
Details of function/operation [Function] Place a A4 paper (white chart) so that it covers the SPF/RSPF scan glass and the OC glass together, and close the SPF/RSPF. When this simulation is executed, the current adjustment value is displayed as the initial display. * Default is 1. Adjustment range is 1 99. Adjustment unit 1 = about 0.127mm * If the values are kept as the default values, SPF/RSPF scan is not performed properly. The front area of the proper scan position may be scanned. In case of AUTO, press [START] key, and the mirror unit scans from the home position to the SPF/RSPF scan position with the adjustment value displayed. The SPF/RSPF glass cover edge position is calculated from the difference between the SPF/RSPF glass cover edge and the OC side document glass CCD output level. If the adjustment is normal, the adjusted value is displayed. If abnormal, the error LED lights up with the current set value displayed. During the error LED is lighted, when [START] key is pressed again, execution is performed again. Mode SPF/RSPF scan position auto adjustment SPF/RSPF scan position manual adjustment Display item LED Display lamp (AR-M200/M201) (AR-M200/M201) (AR-203E) AUTO COPY mode lamp AE mode lamp MANU PRINT mode lamp TEXT mode lamp Default 1 1
[Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 46-01. (In MANUAL) OK/ERR display in AUTO <When OK> 53-08 SPF AUTO AUTO 100% ** 61 03 Polygon motor check (HSYNC output check) OK <When ERR> 53-08 SPF AUTO AUTO 100% ** ERR
[Function] When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, HSYNC is performed and the polygon motor is rotated for 30sec. At that time, the ZOOM lamp (or the COPY mode lamp for the AR-M200/M201) is lighted for 100msec every time when HSYNC is detected. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 61-03 LSU CHK EXECUTING...
63
01
Shading check
[Function] Used to display the detection level of white plate for shading. When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shading and the copy lamp is lighted. When the light quantity is stabilized, revision is made for every second, and the level of one pixel at the center of CCD which is not corrected is detected and the value is displayed in decimal values on the LCD/display. (3 digits) [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 63-01 SHADING CHK EXECUTING... 000
Main code 63
Sub code 02
Contents Black level automatic correction
Details of function/operation [Function] Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level adjustment of white balance. When this simulation is executed, the current correction value is displayed in 3 digits of 12bit hexadecimal number. Place the gray gradation chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) used as the correction document so that the density 10 (black side) comes on the left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of the plate left center.
10 Chart back surface
When [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans the chart and calculates the correction value. After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on the LCD/display. * Default: 0 * If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60. [Operation] (AR-M200/M201) 1) Initial display 63-02 BLACK LEVEL 000 2) [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key: Correction start 63-02 BLACK LEVEL EXECUTING... <During canceling - When [Clear]/[Clear All] key is pressed-> After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. THE JOB IS BEING CANCELED. 3) After execution 63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** OK 3) In case of an error 63-02 BLACK LEVEL *** ERR 12 Light quantity stabilization wait time setting [Function] Used to set the wait time before entering the light quantity level stable evaluation process in the light quantity stable process of white balance. (Note: The light quantity stable level in the previous light quantity stable state is used as the target. When the light quantity level reaches the target during the wait time, the set time of this simulation is ignored and the operation enters the stable evaluation process.) When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed. Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) and press [START] key. The entered value is stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. Setting range: 0 99 (Complying with the light quantity stable wait time of 0 99sec.) Default: 15 (15sec) [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 09-04. [Function] When the difference between the maximum and the minimum values of the light quantity level sampled for 3.2sec in the cycle of 100msec in the white balance light quantity stable process is within the range set with this simulation, it is judged as the light quantity is stable. (Note: The magnification ratio of the AFE gain setting is automatically reflected on the stable width.) When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed. Enter the adjustment value with [ ] [ ] key (or [Numeric] key for the AR-M200/M201) and press [START] key. The entered value is stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. Setting range: 1 99 (Light quantity stable width: Complying with 1 99 in 4095 gradations.) Default: 16 [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 09-04.
13
Light quantity stabilization band setting
Main code 64
Sub code 01
Contents Self print (1by2 mode)
Details of function/operation [Function] The status of the optical section is ignored and printing of one page is made. Also when the print command is received from the host, printing is made. When this simulation is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted. (Since, however, the scanner is disabled, initializing is not made.) Enter the code number and press [OK]/[ENTER]/[START] key to start paper feed from the selected cassette and print in the selected pattern. Code number 0 1 2 3 * For 4 99, flip. [Operation] The operation is similar to simulation 26-02. [Function] Use to check the FAX soft SW setting. Every time when the key is pressed, the bit on the first line is switched 0 and 1. [Operation] 1) Initial display ENTER FAX SOFT SW. # (3 DIGITS) SW.___ [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 2) Enter a 3-digit value of soft SW No. (To enter the fourth digit, shift to the left.), and the press [OK]/[ENTER] key. No.### CHANGE? xxxxxxxx 1:YES 2:NO 3) Select 1 No.### xxxxxxxx USE # KEY 12345678 4) Change with 1-8 of [Numeric] key and the press [OK]/[ENTER] key. No.### STORED? xxxxxxxx 1:YES 2:NO Pattern 1by2 Grid pattern White paper Black background Display item 1 BY 2 CHECK WHITE BLACK
66
01
FAX soft SW setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
"xxxxxxxx" is the set content. Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry display. 5) Select 1 STORED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".
"xxxxxxxx" is the set content. Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry display.
02
FAX soft SW initializing (excluding the adjustment values) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Function] Use to initializing FAX soft SW. [Operation] 1) Initial display INITIALIZED After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.
Main code 66
Sub code 03
Contents FAX PWB memory check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Details of function/operation [Function] Use to check the FAX PWB memory. [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT CHECK MEMORY PRESS , 2) [ ][ ] key or after 2sec ] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1
Every time when [ 2 3 1. When [
] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SELECT MEMORY (1-3) 2:SRAM SELECT MEMORY (1-3) 3:FLASH
SELECT MEMORY (1-3) 1:DRAM
[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 3) [OK]/[ENTER] key CHECKING MEMORY 4) After completion of check When the result is OK MEMORY CHECK RESULT OK In case of sum check error MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX SUM NG In case of address bus check error MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX A-BUS NG In case of data check error MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX DATA NG In case of data bus check error MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX D-BUS NG In case of erase check error MEMORY CHECK RESULT XXXXXXXX ERASE NG
[Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". 04 Signal send mode (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to set the signal send mode (Max. value). Facsimile simulation design specifications. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 NO SIGNAL 33600bps(V34) 31200bps(V34) 28800bps(V34) 26400bps(V34) 24000bps(V34) 21600bps(V34) 19200bps(V34) 16800bps(V34) 14400bps(V34) 12000bps(V34) 9600bps(V34) 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 7200bps(V34) 4800bps(V34) 2400bps(V34) 14400bps(V33) 12000bps(V33) 14400bps(V17) 12000bps(V17) 9600bps(V17) 7200bps(V17) 9600bps(V29) 7200bps(V29) 4800bps(V27ter) 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 2400bps(V27ter) 300bps(FLAG) 2100Hz(CED) 1100Hz(CNG) 300bps(V21) 2100Hz(ANSam) DUMMY RING NO VOICE ANSWER NO RING BACK TONE LINE OFF HOOK LINE ON HOOK
[Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL (2 DIGITS) No.___ 2) 2-digit (1-35) with [Numeric] key / [ Pressing [ No. (1-35) 1:NO SIGNAL ] key or [ ..... ][ ] key / 2sec after
] key reverses the sequence. No. (1-35) 35:LINE ON HOOK
[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 3) [OK]/[ENTER] key: Send after setting OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAX PRESS CLEAR TO STOP [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
Main code 66
Sub code 05
Contents Signal send mode (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Details of function/operation [Function] Use to set the signal send mode (Soft SW set value). Facsimile simulation design specifications. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 NO SIGNAL 33600bps(V34) 31200bps(V34) 28800bps(V34) 26400bps(V34) 24000bps(V34) 21600bps(V34) 19200bps(V34) 16800bps(V34) 14400bps(V34) 12000bps(V34) 9600bps(V34) 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 7200bps(V34) 4800bps(V34) 2400bps(V34) 14400bps(V33) 12000bps(V33) 14400bps(V17) 12000bps(V17) 9600bps(V17) 7200bps(V17) 9600bps(V29) 7200bps(V29) 4800bps(V27ter) 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 2400bps(V27ter) 300bps(FLAG) 2100Hz(CED) 1100Hz(CNG) 300bps(V21) 2100Hz(ANSam) DUMMY RING NO VOICE ANSWER NO RING BACK TONE LINE OFF HOOK LINE ON HOOK
[Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL (2 DIGITS) No.___ 2) 2-digit (1-35) with [Numeric] key / [ Pressing [ No. (1-35) 1:NO SIGNAL ] key or [ ..... ][ ] key / 2sec after ] key reverses the sequence. No. (1-35) 35:LINE ON HOOK
[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 3) [OK]/[ENTER] key: Send after setting OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSW PRESS CLEAR TO STOP [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". 07 Image memory content print (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to print the image memory content. [Operation] When print is allowed PRINT STORED After completion of printing, FAX control is terminated. 10 Image memory content clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) When there is no print data NO DATA After 2 sec, FAX control is terminated. When print is inhibited CAN NOT PRINT After 2 sec, FAX control is terminated.
[Function] Use to clear the image memory content. [Operation] When there are some print data CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY After completion of memory clear, the buzzer sounds. CLEARED PLEASE POWER OFF Remains unchanged until the power is turned off. When there are no print data CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY After completion of memory clear CLEARED After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.
Main code 66
Sub code 11
Contents 300bps signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Details of function/operation [Function] Use to set the 300bps signal send (Max. value). 1: NO SIGNAL 2: 11111 3: 11110 4: 00000 5: 010101 6: 00001 [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT SIGNAL PRESS , 2) [ ][ ] key or after 2sec Every time when [ ] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 1. When [ ] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. ..... SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) 6:00001 SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) 1:NO SIGNAL 3) [OK]/[ENTER] key OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAX PRESS CLEAR TO STOP [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
12
300bps signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Function] Use to set the 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value). 1: NO SIGNAL 2: 11111 3: 11110 4: 00000 5: 010101 6: 00001 [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT SIGNAL PRESS , 2) [ ][ ] key or after 2sec Every time when [ ] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 1. When [ ] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. ..... SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) 6:00001 SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) 1:NO SIGNAL 3) [OK]/[ENTER] key OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSW PRESS CLEAR TO STOP [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
Main code 66
Sub code 13
Contents Dial test (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to the dial test. [Operation] Dial test (PULSE) 1) Initial display SELECT SIGNAL 1:PULSE 2:DTMF [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 2) Select 1 INPUT MAKE TIME (0-15) __
Dial test (DTMF) 1) Initial display SELECT SIGNAL 1:PULSE 2:DTMF [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 2) Select 2 SELECT HIGH LEVEL 1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW. 3) Select 1 Select 2 __
3) Enter the make time in 2 digits. INPUT DIAL # XXXX XXXX: Default After deleting with [Clear] key, input can be made. 4) [OK]/[ENTER] key SEND yyPPS xxms 1:YES 2:NO "yy" is the selected pulse 10 or 20. "xx" is the input value. Select 2: Returns to 2) display. 5) Select 1 Switched to 10/20PPS set with pulse selection inside. 6) After setting SENDING yyPPS xxms 7) After completion of sending TERMINATE ? 1:YES 2:NO Select 2: Returns to 4) display. 8) Select 1 TERMINATED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".
INPUT VALUE (0-15)
SELECT LOW LEVEL 1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW. 4) Select 1 INPUT DIAL # XXXX XXXX: Default After deleting with [Clear] key, input can be made. 4) [OK]/[ENTER] key H:xx 1:YES 2:NO L:yy Select 2 __
INPUT VALUE (0-15)
"xx" indicates HI, and "yy" indicates Low Soft SW. Select 2: Returns to 4) display. 5) Select 1 HI/LO is selected with the signal level inside. 6) After setting the signal send level SENDING DTMF 7) After completion of sending TERMINATE ? 1:YES 2:NO Select 2: Returns to 4) display. 8) Select 1 TERMINATED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".
17
DTMF signal send (Max. value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Function] Use to set the DTMF signal send (Max. value). [Operation] 1) Initial display INPUT DIAL # [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 2) [Numeric] key input The content selected with signal send level selection is set inside. 3) Communication is started after setting the signal send level. SENDING SIGNAL MAX PRESS CLEAR TO STOP [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
Main code 66
Sub code 18
Contents DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Details of function/operation [Function] Use to set the DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value). [Operation] 1) Initial display INPUT DIAL # [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 2) [Numeric] key input The content selected with signal send level selection is set inside. 3) Communication is started after setting the signal send level. SENDING SIGNAL SSW PRESS CLEAR TO STOP [Clear] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
21
FAX information print (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Function] Use to print the FAX information. [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT REPORT (1-3) PRESS , 2) [ ][ ] key or after 2sec ] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 2 Every time when [ 3 1. When [
] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SELECT REPORT (1-3) 2:SOFT SW. LIST SELECT REPORT (1-3) 3:PROTOCOL
SELECT REPORT (1-3) 1:USER SW. LIST
[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 3) [OK]/[ENTER] key When print is allowed PRINT STORED After completion of printing, FAX control is terminated. 24 FAST SRAM clear (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to clear the FAST SRAM. [Operation] 1) Initial display CLEAR FAST SRAM 2) After completion of clearing CLEARED After 2sec, FAX control is terminated. 30 TEL/LIU status change check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to check the TEL/LIU status change. [Operation] 1) Initial display HS2 :xxx RHS :xxx HS1 :xxx EXHS:xxx
When print is inhibited CAN NOT PRINT After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.
The display is switched every 2sec.
CHECKING PRESS CLEAR TO STOP [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
Main code 66
Sub code 33
Contents Signal detection check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
Details of function/operation [Function] Use to check the signal detection. [Operation] 1) Initial display CHECKING NONE PRESS CLEAR TO STOP When a signal is detected, the display is changed from NONE to the following. CI/CNG/CED/BT/DT/Flag/SDT/DTMF [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
34
Communication time measurement (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Function] Use to measurement the communication time. [Operation] 1) Initial display COMM. TIME xx:xx:xx:xxx msec "xx:xx:xx:xxx" indicates o'clock, minute, second, millisecond. [Clear] key: FAX control is terminated.
37
Speaker sound volume setting (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
[Function] Use to set the speaker sound volume. 1: 2: 3: 4: NO SOUND LOW MID HIGH
[Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT SPEEKER VOL. PRESS , 2) [ ][ ] key or after 2sec ] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 2 Every time when [ 3 4 1. When [ SELECT (1-4) 1:NO SOUND 3) [OK]/[ENTER] key STORED xxx xxx: Set content After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.
] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed. SELECT (1-4) 2:LOW .....
Main code 66
Sub code 38
Contents Time setting/check (Executable only when the FAX is installed.) [Function] Use to check the time setting. [Operation] 1) Initial display SELECT TO SET 1:DATE 2:TIME
[Clear] key: FAX control is terminated. 2) Select 1 xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) CHANGE? 1:YES 2:NO "xxxx.xx.xx(xxx)" is the current value. (No revision of display) 3) Select 1 INPUT YEAR (4 DIGITS)____.__.__ Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display". 4) Enter the year in 4 digits. INPUT MONTH (1-12) 1998.__.__ 5) Enter the month in 2 digits. INPUT DAY (1-31) 1998.01.__ 6) Enter the day in 2 digits. xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) STORED? 1:YES 2:NO "xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) is the entered value. Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display". 7) Select 1 STORED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display". 67 50 USB receive speed adjustment (USB1.1) (AR-203E only) Used to set the limitation on the print data receive speed of USB2.0 (Full speed) port (USB port on the machine). When print images from USB2.0 (Full speed) port are disturbed, change the setting and try again. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed. Enter the code number corresponding to the adjustment value, and press [START] key to change the setting. Code number 1 2 3 4 Setting FAST NORMAL1 NORMAL2 SLOW Fast Speed 2) Select 2 xx:xx CHANGE? 1:YES 2:NO
"xx:xx" is the current value. 3) Select 1 INPUT HOUR (0-24) __:__
Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display". 4) Enter o'clock in 2 digits. INPUT MINUTE (00-59) 01:__
5) Enter minute in 2 digits. xx:xx STORED? 1:YES 2:NO
"xx:xx" is the current value. Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display". 6) Select 1 STORED After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".
Slow
5. Trouble codes
A. Trouble codes list
Main Sub Details of trouble code code E1 00 IMC communication trouble 10 IMC trouble 13 IMC flash ROM error 81 IMC communication interface error (Parity) 82 IMC communication interface error (Overrun) 84 IMC communication interface error (Framing) E7 01 Duplex model memory setup error, memory notdetected error 02 LSU trouble 10 Shading trouble (Black correction) 11 Shading trouble (White correction) Main Sub Details of trouble code code E7 16 Abnormal laser output F2 02 Toner supply abnormality 04 Improper cartridge (Destination error, life cycle error) F5 02 Copy lamp lighting abnormality F6 10 FAX board trouble H2 00 Thermistor open H3 00 Heat roller high temperature detection H4 00 Heat roller low temperature detection L1 00 Feeding is not completed within the specified time after starting feeding. (The scan head locking switch is locked)
Main Sub Details of trouble code code L3 00 Scanner return trouble L4 01 Main motor lock detection 32 Exhaust fan motor lock detection trouble L6 10 Polygon motor lock detection U1 03 FAX board battery error U2 04 EEPROM read/write error (Serial communication error) 11 Counter check sum error (EEPROM) 40 CRUM chip communication error
B. Details of trouble codes

Main Sub Details of trouble code code E1 00 Content IMC communication trouble Detail An abnormality occurs in communication between the CPU and the IMC. Cause IMC abnormality IMC memory defect/data abnormality Check Replace the MCU PWB with new one. and remedy 10 Content IMC trouble Detail An abnormality occurs in the IMC. Cause USB chip error/CODEC error on the IMC. Check Replace the MCU PWB with a new one. and remedy 13 Content IMC flash ROM error Detail An abnormality occurs in the IMC flash ROM. Cause IMC abnormality Check Replace the MCU PWB with a new one. and If downloading of the program is abnormally remedy terminated, it may cause an error. Download the program again to avoid this. 81 Content IMC communication interface error (Parity) Detail A parity error occurs in communication between the CPU and the IMC. Cause IMC abnormality IMC memory defect/data abnormality Check Replace the MCU PWB with new one. and remedy E1 82 Content IMC communication interface error (Overrun) Detail An overrun error occurs in communication between the CPU and the IMC. Cause IMC abnormality IMC memory defect/data abnormality. Check Replace the MCU PWB with new one. and remedy 84 Content IMC communication interface error (Framing) Detail A framing error occurs in communication between the CPU and the IMC. Cause IMC abnormality IMC memory defect/data abnormality. Check Replace the MCU PWB with new one. and remedy
Main Sub Details of trouble code code E7 01 Content Duplex model memory setup error, memory not-detected error Detail The memory is not set properly or the memory capacity is not set to the duplex setup (6M). Check Set SIM 26-39 code number to 2. and remedy 02 Content LSU trouble Detail The BD signal from the LSU cannot be detected in a certain cycle. (Always OFF or always ON) Cause LSU connector or LSU harness defect or disconnection Polygon motor rotation abnormality Laser beams are not generated. MCU PWB abnormality. Check Check connection of the LSU connector. and Execute SIM 61-03 to check the LSU remedy operations. Check that the polygon motor rotates normally. Check that the laser emitting diode generates laser beams. Replace the LSU unit. Replace the MCU PWB. 10 Content Shading trouble (Black correction) Detail The CCD black scan level is abnormal when the shading. Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat cable CCD unit abnormality MCU PWB abnormality Check Check connection of the CCD unit flat cable. and Check the CCD unit. remedy 11 Content Shading trouble (White correction) Detail The CCD white scan level is abnormal when the shading. Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat cable Dirt on the mirror, the lens, and the reference white plate Copy lamp lighting abnormality CCD unit abnormality MCU PWB abnormality (When occurred in the SPF/RSPF scan position.) Improper installation of the mirror unit Check Clean the mirror, lens, and the reference and white plate. remedy Check the light quantity and lighting status of the copy lamp (SIM 05-03). Check the MCU PWB. 16 Content Abnormal laser output Detail When the laser output is stopped, HSYNC is detected. Cause Laser abnormality MCU PWB abnormality. Check Check the laser emitting diode operation. and Replace the MCU PWB. remedy
Main Sub Details of trouble code code F2 02 Content Toner supply abnormality Detail The maximum toner supply time is greatly exceeded. Cause CRUM chip trouble Improper developing unit Check Replace the CRUM chip. and Replace the developing unit. remedy 04 Content Improper cartridge (Destination error, life cycle error) Detail The destination of the main unit differs from that of the CRUM. When the life cycle information is other than Not Used (FFh). Cause CRUM chip trouble Improper developing unit Check Replace the CRUM chip. and Replace the developing unit. remedy F5 02 Content Copy lamp lighting abnormality Detail The copy lamp does not turn on. Cause Copy lamp abnormality Copy lamp harness abnormality CCD PWB harness abnormality. Check Use SIM 5-3 to check the copy lamp operations. and remedy When the copy lamp lights up. Check the harness and the connector between the CCD unit and the MCU PWB. When the copy lamp does not light up. Check the harness and the connector between the copy lamp unit and the MCU PWB. Replace the copy lamp unit. Replace the MCU PWB. F6 10 Content FAX board trouble Detail Communication trouble between MCU and FAX control PWB Cause FAX control PWB connector disconnection Defective harness between FAX control PWB and MCU PWB Motherboard connector pin breakage FAX control PWB ROM error/Data error IC on FAX PWB causes abnormality Check Check connector/harness of FAX control and PWB and MCU PWB. remedy Check the grounding of the copier. Check FAX control PWB ROM. Replace the FAX PWB. H2 00 Content Thermistor open Detail The thermistor is open. The fusing unit is not installed. Cause Thermistor abnormality Control PWB abnormality Fusing section connector disconnection The fusing unit is not installed. Check Check the harness and the connector and between the thermistor and the PWB. remedy Use SIM 14 to clear the self diagnostic display.
Main Sub Details of trouble code code H3 00 Content Heat roller high temperature detection Detail The fusing temperature exceeds 240C. Cause Thermistor abnormality Control PWB abnormality Fusing section connector disconnection. Check Use SIM 5-02 to check the heater lamp and blinking operation. remedy When the lamp blinks normally. Check the thermistor and its harness. Check the thermistor input circuit on the control PWB. When the lamp keeps ON. Check the power PWB and the lamp control circuit on the MCU PWB. Use SIM 14 to clear the self diagnostic display. H4 00 Content Heat roller low temperature detection Detail 1) When the target temperature (165C) is not reached in 55 sec after starting warming-up. 2) When the temperature below 100C is detected for 300ms under the ready print state. "Starting warming-up" means not only that in power supply but also reset that in reset from shut-off and in side door close. (The timing of generating H4 is not limited to that in power supply.) Cause Thermistor abnormality Heater lamp abnormality Thermostat abnormality Control PWB abnormality Check Use SIM 5-02 to check the heater lamp and blinking operation. remedy When the lamp blinks normally. Check the thermistor and its harness. Check the thermistor input circuit on the control PWB. When the lamp does not light up. Check for disconnection of the heater lamp and the thermostat. Check the interlock switch. Check the power PWB and the lamp control circuit on the MCU PWB. Use SIM 14 to clear the self diagnostic display.
Main Sub Details of trouble code code L1 00 Content Feeding is not completed within the specified time after starting feeding. (The scan head locking switch is locked) Detail The white area and the black marking on the shading plate are used to obtain the difference in the CCD level values for judgment of lock. When the difference in the levels of which and black is small, it is judged that the black mark could not be scanned by lock and the trouble code "L1" is displayed. Cause The scan head is locked by the lock switch. Mirror unit abnormality The scanner wire is disconnected. The origin detection sensor abnormality Mirror motor harness abnormality Check Check to confirm that the scan head lock and switch is released. remedy Use SIM 1-1 to check the mirror reciprocating operations. When the mirror does not feed. Check for disconnection of the scanner wire. Check the harness and the connector between the mirror motor and the MCU PWB. Replace the mirror unit. Replace the MCU PWB. When the mirror does feed. Use SIM 1-2 to check the mirror home position sensor. L3 00 Content Scanner return trouble Detail When the mirror base is returned for the specified time (6 sec) in mirror initializing after turning on the power, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON. Or when the mirror base is returned for the specified time (about 6 sec) after start of copy return, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON. Cause Mirror unit abnormality Scanner wire disconnection Origin detection sensor abnormality Mirror motor harness abnormality Check Use SIM 1-1 to check the mirror and reciprocating operations. remedy When the mirror does not return. Check for disconnection of the scanner wire. Check the harness and the connector between the mirror motor and the MCU PWB. Replace the mirror unit. Replace the MCU PWB. When the mirror does feed. Use SIM 1-2 to check the mirror home position sensor. L4 01 Content Main motor lock detection Detail When the main motor encoder pulse is not detected for 100 msec. Cause Main motor unit abnormality Improper connection or disconnection the main motor and the harness. MCU PWB abnormality Check Use SIM 25-01 to check the main motor and operations. remedy Check connection of the main motor harness/connector. Replace the main motor. Replace the MCU PWB.
Main Sub Details of trouble code code L4 32 Content Exhaust fan motor lock detection trouble Detail The error detection is started after 2 sec from starting rotation of the exhaust fan motor. 1) The continuous rotation state of 250ms is not detected for 1 sec after starting detection. 2) When the lock sensor (in the exhaust fan) detects the HIGH level (unstable) after detection the lock state (stable state). Cause Exhaust fan motor connector connection trouble Exhaust fan motor trouble MCU PWB trouble Check Exhaust fan motor connector connection and check remedy Exhaust fan motor replacement Replace the MCU PWB. L6 10 Content Polygon motor lock detection Detail The lock signal (specified rpm signal) does not return within a certain time (about 20 sec) from starting the polygon motor rotation. Cause Polygon motor unit abnormality Improper connection or disconnection of the polygon motor and the harness. MCU PWB abnormality Check Use SIM 61-1 to check the polygon motor and operations. remedy Check connection of the polygon motor harness/connector. Replace the polygon motor. Replace the MCU PWB. U1 03 Content FAX board battery error Details The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX PWB falls. Cause The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX PWB falls. Check Check voltage of the SRAM back up battery. and Replace the battery. remedy U2 04 Content EEPROM read/write error (Serial communication error) Detail EEPROM access process error Cause EEPROM abnormality Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set. and Use SIM 16 to cancel the trouble. remedy Replace the MCU PWB. 11 Content Counter check sum error (EEPROM) Detail Check sum error of the counter area in the EEPROM Cause EEPROM abnormality Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set. and Use SIM 16 to cancel the trouble. remedy Replace the MCU PWB. 40 Content CRUM chip communication error Detail An error occurs in MCU-CRUM chip communication. Cause CRUM chip trouble Defective contact of developing unit MCU PWB trouble Check Replace the CRUM chip. and Check installation of the developing unit. remedy Cancel by turning OFF/ON the power. Replace the MCU PWB.
[11] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance table
: Check (Clean, adjust, or replace when required.) Section Developing Parts Developer DV blade DV side seal (F/R) DV doctor Drum 25K 50K 75K 100K : Clean 125K : Replace : Adjust Remark
: Lubricate
White streaks are made on the image.
Process peripheral
2. Maintenance display system

Toner Life Remaining quantity LED Machine Life LED Machine NEAR EMPTY About 12.5% ON Operation allowed 8K EMPTY Flash Stop 25K
Developer
ON at 25K of the developer count. Selection is available between Not Stop and Stop by Service Simulation (SIM 26-37) Setup. (If Stop is selected, the LED will flash and stop at 25K.) Default: Not Stop Clear: SIM 24-06 Selection is available among 25K, 13K, 9K, 6K, 3K, and free (no lighting) with SIM 21-1. Default: 25K Clear: SIM 20-1 Not stop.
Maintenance
LED
Machine
Note: When developer is replaced, be sure to execute simulation No. 24-06 to reset the counter.
3. Remaining toner indication

TONER FULL Remaining toner indication 100% Display for users
75%
Lo 50% 25% LOW LEVEL
100-76%
75-51%
50-26%
25-13%
12.5% or less
The remaining toner indication is based on the number of revolutions of the toner motor. The toner END indication appears when the END is detected by the toner sensor. The remaining toner indication is a rough indication of the remaining toner quantity.
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 MAINTENANCE 11 - 1
[12] USER PROGRAM

The conditions of factory setting can be changed according to the use conditions.
3) To enter the toner save mode, press the light ( ) key. The light and dark indicator marked "1" will light up, indicating the toner save mode is selected.
1. Functions that can be set with user programs

Toner save mode
Reduces toner consumption by approximately 10%.
Power save modes

The unit has two power save modes of operation: preheat mode and auto power shut-off mode. Preheat mode When the unit enters the preheat mode, the power save ( ) indicator will light up and other indicators will remain on or off as before. In this condition, the fuser in the unit is maintained at a lower heat level, thereby saving power. To copy from the preheat mode, make desired copier selections and press the start ( ) key using the normal copying procedure. Auto power shut-off mode When the unit enters the auto power shut-off mode, the power save ( ) indicator will light up and other indicators except the ONLINE indicator will go out. The auto power shut-off mode saves more power than the preheat mode but requires a longer time before starting copying. To copy from the auto power shut-off mode, press the start ( ) key. Then make desired copier selections and press the start ( ) key using the normal copying procedure.
4) Press the exposure mode selector key. The PHOTO ( ) indicator will stop blinking and light up steadily. The light and dark indicator marked "3" will light up. The toner save mode is now active. Note: To return to the standard mode, repeat the procedure but use the dark ( ) key to select exposure level "5" in step 3).
3. User programs (AR-203E/5420)

The user programs allow the parameters of certain functions to be set, changed, or canceled as desired. Set the power save modes, auto clear time, preheat mode, SPF automatic original discharge time, resolution of AUTO & MANUAL mode and reset factory setting. 1) Press and hold down the light ( ) key simultaneously for more than 5 seconds until all the alarm indicators ( , , , ) blink and " " appears in the display. 2) Use the left copy quantity ( ) key to select a user program number (1: Auto clear time, 2: Preheat mode, 3: Auto power shut off mode, 4: Auto power shut off timer, 6: SPF automatic original discharge time, 10: Resolution of AUTO & MANUAL mode, 21: Reset factory, 24: Prevention of OC copies when the SPF is up function, 25: Copy effective paper width setting function (Bypass tray), 26: Copy effective paper width setting function (Tray), 28: Selection of copy start state (Polygon rotation on/off), 29: Fusing temperature setting when the bypass tray is used). The selected number will blink in the left side of the display. 3) Press the start ( ) key. The entered program number will be steadily lit and the currently selected parameter number for the program will blink on the right side of the display. 4) Select the desired parameter using the right copy quantity ( ) key. The entered parameter number will blink on the right of the display. Program Mode No. 1 Auto clear time Parameters
Auto clear
The unit returns to the initial settings a preset amount of time after the end of job. This preset amount of time (auto clear time) can be changed.
Resolution of AUTO & MANUAL mode

You can set the copy resolution used for AUTO and MANUAL ( ) exposure mode.
2. Toner save mode (AR-203E/5420)

1) Press the exposure mode selector key to select the MANUAL ( ) mode.
2) Press and hold down the exposure mode selector key for approximately 5 seconds. The MANUAL ( ) indicator will go out and the PHOTO ( ) indicator will begin to blink. The light and dark indicator marked "5" will light up, indicating the standard toner mode is active.
3 4
10 21 24
1 10 sec., 2 30 sec., *3 60 sec., 4 90 sec., 5 120 sec., 6 OFF Preheat mode *1 30 sec., 2 60 sec., 3 5 min., 4 30 min., 5 60 min., 6 120 min., 7 240 min. Auto power shut off mode *1 ON, 2 OFF Auto power shut off timer *1 5 min., 2 30min., 3 60 min., 4 120 min., 5 240 min. SPF automatic original 1 5 min., *2 30 min., discharge time 3 60 min., 4 120 min., 5 240 min., 6 OFF Resolution of AUTO & *1 300dpi, 2 600dpi MANUAL mode Reset factory 1 YES, *2 NO Prevention of OC copies *1 ON, 2 OFF when the SPF is up function
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 USER PROGRAM 12 - 1
Program Mode No. 25 Copy effective paper width setting function (Bypass tray) 26 Copy effective paper width setting function (Tray) 28
Parameters *1 Large (A4 width/ LETTER), 2 Small (B5R width/INVOICE) *1 Large (A4 width/ LETTER), 2 Small (B5R width/INVOICE) *1 ON, 2 OFF
3) Press the [ ] key [ ] or [ ting of the selected item.
] key [
] to change the set-
See "1. User programs" for the program code.

PREHEAT MODE 1:1 MIN PREHEAT MODE 1:1 MIN
1 2 2
1 2 1
2 1
29
Selection of copy start state (Polygon rotation on/ off) Fusing temperature 1 Low, *2 High setting when the bypass tray is used
NOTE: If you mistakenly select the wrong item, press the [Clear] key ( ) and repeat the procedure from step 2). To cancel a setting for a user program, press the [MENU] key. 4) Press the [OK]/[ENTER] key. Your selection appears briefly and then the previous screen appears. NOTE: When "AE LEVEL ADJUST" is selected in the user programs and the [OK]/[ENTER] key is pressed, the automatic exposure adjustment screen appears. Adjust the exposure and press the [OK]/[ENTER] key. Audible signals (key entry beep, invalid key beep, base setting beep) The machine sounds three different types of beep signals: a key entry beep that sounds when a valid key is pressed, an invalid key beep that sounds when an invalid key is pressed, and a base setting beep that sounds when a setting is the same as the base setting (base settings are explained below). The base setting beep is initially disabled. If you wish to enable the base setting beep, see "SOUND AT DEFAULT". If you wish to change the volume of the beep signals or disable them, see "KEY TOUCH SOUND". The beep patterns of each type of beep signal are as follows: Key entry beep: One beep Base setting beep: Three beeps Base settings The base settings are preset standard selections for each copy setting. The base settings are as follows: Copy ratio: 100% Light and Dark level: Center Paper feed location: Tray 1 (Upper paper tray) AUTO/TEXT/PHOTO: AUTO Invalid key beep: Two beeps
Factory default settings are indicated with an asterisk (*). 5) Press the start ( ) key. The right-hand number in the display will be steadily lit and the entered value will be stored. Note: To change the setting or to set another mode, press the clear key. The unit will return to step 2). 6) Press the light ( ) key to return to the normal copy mode.
4. User programs (AR-M200/M201)

1) Press the [MENU] key and then press the [OK]/[ENTER] key. In printer mode, the user programs are accessed by simply pressing the [MENU] key.
MAIN MENU 1:USER PROGRAM MAIN MENU 1:USER PROGRAM
1 2 2
1 2 1
2 1
] or [ ] key [ ] to select the item 2) Press the [ ] key [ that you wish to configure in the USER PROGRAM items, and then press the [OK]/[ENTER] key.
See "1. User programs" for the program name and program code. You can also select a program by directly entering the program number with the numeric keys.
USER PROGRAM 2:PREHEAT MODE USER PROGRAM 2:PREHEAT MODE
1 2 2
1 2 1
2 1
A. Copy mode
Program number 1 Program name AUTO CLEAR Setting codes (factory default setting appears in bold) 1: 10 SEC. 2: 30 SEC. 3: 60 SEC. 4: 90 SEC. 5: 120 SEC. 6: OFF 1: 30 SEC. 2: 1 MIN. 3: 5 MIN. 4: 30 MIN. 5: 60 MIN. 6: 120 MIN. 7: 240 MIN. 1: ON 2: OFF 1: 5 MIN. 2: 30 MIN. 3: 60 MIN. 4: 120 MIN. 5: 240 MIN. Explanation Auto clear time automatically returns the copy settings to the initial settings if no keys are pressed for a preset period of time following the end of a copy job. This program is used to select the period of time. Auto clear time can also be disabled. This function automatically switches the machine to a low power consumption state if the set duration of time elapses without the machine being used when the power is on. The power save indicator lights up, however, the keys on the operation panel can be used. Normal operation automatically resumes when a key on the operation panel is pressed, an original is placed, a print job is received. Use this setting to enable or disable auto power shut-off mode. This function automatically switches the machine to a state that consumes even less power than preheat mode if the set duration of time elapses without the machine being used when the power is on. All lights except the power save indicator go off. To resume normal operation, press the [START] key ( ). Normal operation also resumes automatically when a print job is received or scanning is begun from a computer. While in auto power shut-off mode, no keys (except the [START] key ( )) can be used. Use this setting to select the layout pattern when two original pages are copied onto a single sheet of paper. When enabled, this function offsets the position of each set of copies in the output tray in copy mode, and each print job in printer mode. When two-sided copying is performed, this function rotates the image on the back of the original. This is convenient when binding the copies at the top (tablet binding). This setting is used to change the copy resolution in AUTO and TEXT mode from 600 x 300 dpi to 600 x 600 dpi (high-quality mode). Scanning is slower when high-quality mode is used. If the memory fills up when two-sided copying is performed, "NORMAL" can be selected to make copying possible. However, "NORMAL" results in a slower copying speed. Normally "HI-SPEED" is selected to enable fast two-sided copying. Use this setting to set the margin width.
PREHEAT MODE
3 4
AUTO SHUT-OFF AUTO SHUT-OFF TIME
7 8 9
LAYOUT IN 2IN1 OFFSET FUNCTION ROTATE ORIG. IMAGE (AR-208D only) AE/TEXT RESOLUTION 2-SIDED COPY MODE (AR-208D only) MARGIN WIDTH
1: PATTERN 1 2: PATTERN 2 1: ON 2: OFF 1: ON 2: OFF 1: 300dpi 2: 600dpi 1: HI-SPEED 2: NORMAL
10
11
12
1: 1/4" 2: 1/2" 3: 3/4" 4: 1" 1: 30% 2: 40% 3: 50% 4: 60% 5: 70% 1: ON 2: OFF
13
MEM. FOR PRINTER
Use this to change the proportion of machine memory used for printer mode.
14
AUTO KEY REPEAT
Use this setting to select whether or not holding down a key causes repeated input of the key. For keys that normally cause a set value to decrease or increase when held down (for example, the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( )), this program can be used to have the set value not change when the key is held down. Use this setting to select how long a key must be pressed for the input to be accepted. By selecting a longer time, you can prevent settings from being changed by the accidental pressing of a key.
15
KEY PRESS TIME
1: NORMAL 2: 0.5 SEC. 3: 1.0 SEC. 4: 1.5 SEC. 5: 2.0 SEC. 1: LOW 2: HIGH 3: OFF 1: ON 2: OFF 1: ON 2: OFF
16
KEY TOUCH SOUND SOUND AT DEFAULT TONER SAVE MODE
This sets the volume of beep signals.
17 18
Use this to sound a beep when a base setting is selected. This mode reduces toner usage by about 10% when copying. Toner save mode is effective when the exposure mode is AUTO or TEXT.
Program number 19
Program name AE LEVEL ADJUST
Setting codes (factory default setting appears in bold) 1: SPF/RSPF (Adjustment to 5 levels is possible.) 2: DOCUMENT GLASS (Adjustment to 5 levels is possible.) 1: AMERICAN ENGLISH 2: ENGLISH 3: FRENCH 4: SPANISH : : 1: Yes 2: No 1: ON 2: OFF 1: ON 2: OFF 1: 8.5x11 2: 5.5x8.5 1: ON 2: OFF 1: PLAIN PAPER 2: HEAVY PAPER 1: LIGHTER 2: LIGHT 3: NORMAL 4: DARK 5: DARKER
Explanation This is used to adjust the exposure level. The automatic exposure level can be adjusted separately for the document glass and the RSPF. For the procedure for adjusting the exposure and guidelines for numeric values. The factory default setting for the exposure level is center. This is used to set the language used in the display.
20
LANGUAGE
21 22 24
RESET FACTORY SORT AUTO SELECT CHECK RSPF OPEN VALID COPY WIDTH LSU SETTING PAPER TYPE DISPLAY CONTRAST
This is used to return all settings to the factory default settings. Use this setting to enable or disable sort auto select mode. You can set the operation that takes place if the [START] key ( ) is pressed when the RSPF is not completely closed. (Valid only when the multi-bypass paper feed is used.) Set the allowed paper sizes for copying from the bypass tray. When "5.5x8.5" is selected, a copy of a letter size original will only be printed up to invoice size. Select whether copying is only allowed when the polygon motor is rotating, or also when the polygon motor is stopped. Set the temperature of the fusing unit when the bypass tray is used. Normally "HEAVY PAPER" should be selected. Set the contrast of the display.
25
28 29 30
B. Print mode
Program number 1 Program name FORCED OUTPUT Setting codes (factory default setting appears in bold) 1: ON 2: OFF 1: FULL-SPEED 2: HI-SPEED Explanation When this function is enabled, printing in printer mode will automatically continue using a different size of paper if the specified size of paper runs out in all trays. This feature does not function in copy mode. This sets the USB 2.0 data transfer speed. To obtain the fastest speed when using the USB 2.0 connector, first verify that your computer meets the system requirements (operating system and driver), and then use this program to change the USB 2.0 mode to "Hi-Speed". Note that the setting should not be changed while running a TWAIN driver. If the paper runs out during printing and there is paper of the same size in another tray, this function automatically switches to that tray (excluding the bypass tray). The function can be disabled.
USB 2.0 MODE SWITCH *1
AUTO TRAY SWITCH*2
1: ON 2: OFF
*1: The scanning speed increases when the USB 2.0 mode is set to "HI-SPEED", however, the printing speed does not increase considerably. *2: When the 250-sheet paper feed unit is installed.
Carriage Unit 3.3V SPF Motor (AR-203E optional only) CCFL x 2 AD 8bits(MSB/LSB) Lamp Inverter for CCFL 16bits HOME POSITION SENSOR MPFS,RRS,CPFS1 Mechanical Load Reg 5V
CCD PWB
12V
5V
NF
A5V
AFE(HT82V24)
CCD (ILX558X)
R G B
C D S
A G C
M P X
5V
1. Block diagram
CCD Driver
MCU-PWB 0 - 24V
Sensor/SW (Electorical detector/SW/Sensor) Driver SDRAM 16Mbyte or 8Mbyte MHPS CPU INTERRUPT SPPD CPU I/O
DC-DC PWM 3.3V
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION
A. Overall block diagram (AR-203E/5420)
Printer CLK (18.3856MHz) KRONOS ASIC (296pin) System Reset 3.3V Reset IC A[191] D[150] SRAM ONL PSL SELIN1,2,3 KEYIN1,2 1Mbit Flash ROM 16Mbit OP-CLK OP-LATCH OP-DATA CPU H8S/2321 (19.6608MHz)
Interlock SW Cassette detector X 2 Drum Initial detector PPD1 POD MFD PPD2 SPOD PD1
Scanner CLK(48MHz)
OPE PWB
USB2.0 FullSpeed (expect for AR-5420)
USB1T20
USB I/F
LED Driver ONL LED PSL LED HC151 x 2 16bit
LED
KEY Matrix SSCG HC151 I2C Bus PSW START KEY
Fan Motor (2speed with Lock detect) CPU CLK(19.6608MHz)

PMD PMCLK
/MMD
/MMRDY
Driver Driver Driver
MMCLK
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 1

I2C Bus 8Kbyte EEPROM EEPROM (CRUM) Toner Motor LSU LASER Polygon Motor Mirror Motor POWER SUPPLY /POFF,HL,PR FW 3.3V,5VEN,5V,12V,24V HVU TC, GRID, MC, BIAS AC Code
24V
12V
2nd Cassette (AR-203E Optional only)
MainMotor
Mechanical load CPFS2
Sensor/SW PAPD,PPD3, PD2,CED2
Carriage Unit
12V RSPF Motor (AR-M200/M201 optional only) CCFL x 2 AD 16bits 8bits (MSB/LSB) Lamp Inverter for CCFL AR-FX13 (Option) Speaker FAX Main PCBA HOME POSITION SENSOR
12V
Reg
A5V
3.3V
AFE(HT86V26)
CCD (ILX558K)
R G B
C D S
A G C
M P X
5V
CCD Driver
Mechanical Load 0 - 24V FAX I/F 256Mbx2 MHPS D[7..0] RD CS INT 12MHz P-Bus ISP1583 /ESPRD System Reset 3.3V UART Reset IC A[191] D[150] SRAM 1Mbit Flash ROM 16Mbit PSL CPUCLK SELIN1,2,3 KEYIN OP-CLK OP-LATCH OP-DATA OPE PWB LED Driver PSL LED HC151 8bit KEY Matrix HC238 (3 to 8 decode) 8bit START KEY Buzzer KEY Matrix EEPROM CPU CLK (19.6608MHz) Driver LCD (2 x 20) LCD E LCD RS LCD R/W (TBD) LCD DB7-4 LED FAX Model Only FAX OPE PWB AR-FX13 LED SPID SRJD SCOD CPU H8S/2321 (19.6608MHz) NW PWB 18.3856MHz CPU I/O Interlock SW Cassette detector X 2 Drum Initial detector PPD1 POD MFD PPD2 OA982 USB2.0 High-speed SDRAM Flash ROM 8Mb or 16Mb AR-NB2A (Option) MPFS,RRS,CPFS1 (RSPF UNIT) SPUS,SRVC DC-DC Driver SDRAM 8Mbyte PWM
MCU-PWB
B. Overall block diagram (AR-M200/M201)
3.3V
Printer CLK
8 8
Image BUS(PI-Bus) Image BUS(PO-Bus)
Network Box 100Base-T
Ethernet
Sensor/SW (Electorical detector/SW/Sensor) CPU INTERRUPT SPPD
18.3856MHz
KRONOS ASIC (296pin)
SSCG Scanner CLK (12MHz x4 48MHz)
Duplex Model Only
Duplex Motor KEYSCAN1 - 3 IO ASIC D[158] SSCG I2C Bus 8Kbyte
Driver PSW
Shifter Motor
Fan Motor PMRDY PMD PMCLK
24V 12V
/MMD
MMCLK
/MMLD
Driver
Driver

EEPROM (CRUM) Mirror Motor LSU POWER SUPPLY LASER /POFF,HL,PR FW 3.3V,5VEN,5V,12V,24V Polygon Motor HVU TC, GRID, MC, BIAS AC Code
Driver
2nd Cassette
Main Motor
Toner Motor
Mechanical load CPFS2
Sensor/SW PPD3, PD2, CED2
DHAI-0519QSPZ
DHAI-0287QSZZ
DHAI-0513QSPZ
PPD2
1 2 3
LEDPPD2 PPD2 D-GND
1 2 3
Thermistor
1 2
RTH_IN D-GND
1 2
CN22 1 LEDPPD2 2 PPD2 3 D-GND 4 RTH_IN 5 D-GND B5B-PH-K-S
Fan MT
CN11 1 VFMOUT 2 FANLK 3 /VFMCNT 4 PGND B4B-PH-K-S
CN2 D-GND 1 KEYIN1# 2 SELIN3 3 STROBE 4 SELIN1 5 OP-CLK 6 SELIN2 7 OP-LATCH 8 OP-DATA 9 EN5V 10 D-GND 11 PSL 12 ONL 13 PSW 14 KEYIN2# 15 5V 16 DRST 17 D-GND 18 IMSA-9619S-18A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
CN304 D-GND KIN1 SELIN3 OP-STB SELIN1 OP-CLK SELIN2 OP-LATCH OP-DATA 5VEN D-GND PSL ONL PSW KIN2 5V DRST D-GND
OPE PWB
CN4 OUTA+ 1 OUTB+ 2 OUTA3 OUTB4 B4B-PH-K-R
SCANNER MT
DHAI-0268QSZ4
A. MCU PWB (AR-203E/5420)
DHAI-0286QSZZ
2. Actual wiring diagram
POD
CN19 1 LEDPOD 2 POD 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-S
SCANNER UN
CL
DHAI-0530QSPZ
- HSYNC D-GND +5V D-GND - LDEN - VIDEO - S/H D-GND VCL P-GND 1 2
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LD
CN42 1 /SYNC 2 D-GND 3 INT5V 4 D-GND 5 /LDEN 6 /VIDEO 7 SHOLD 8 D-GND B08B-CZHK-B
INVERTER PWB
CL
DHAI-0529QSPZ
24V P-GND /PMD PMRDY PMCLK_A
5 4 3 2 1
POLYGON MT
CN25 1 2 PD1 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-M DHAI-0516QSPZ 2 5VEN 4 (CRUMSDA) 3 (CRUMSCL) 1 PGND P18-FX-4S-C
CN41 1 24V 2 P-GND 3 /PMD 4 PMRDY 5 PMCLK_A B05B-CZHK-B
CN3 P-GND 1 P-GND 2 VCL 3 VCL 4 12V 5 12V 6 EN5V 7 D-GND 8 (VSAMP) 9 CCD-TG 10 D-GND 11 CCD-RS 12 (BSAMP) 13 CCD-CP 14 (AFE_SDI) 15 CCD_PHI2 16 D-GND 17 CCD_PHI1 18 (AFE_SEN) 19 (ADCLK) 20 D-GND 21 (AFE_SCK) 22 (AFE_DB7) 23 mt_at_home 24 (AFE_DB5) 25 (AFE_DB6) 26 D-GND 27 (AFE_DB4) 28 (AFE_DB3) 29 30 (AFE_DB2) 31 (AFE_DB1) 32 (AFE_DB0) FF4-32-S15D5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 P-GND P-GND VCL VCL 12V 12V EN5V D-GND (VSAMP) CCD-TG D-GND CCD-RS (BSAMP) CCD-CP (AFE_SDI) CCD_PHI2 D-GND CCD_PHI1 (AFE_SEN) (ADCLK) D-GND (AFE_SCK) (AFE_DB7) MHPS (AFE_DB5) (AFE_DB6) D-GND (AFE_DB4) (AFE_DB3) (AFE_DB2) (AFE_DB1) (AFE_DB0)
CCD PWB
DHAI-0514QSPZ
INT24V PGND /MMD MMLD /MMCLK
1 2 3 4 5
MCU PWB
CN5 5VEN (CRUMSDA) (CRUMSCL) PGND 24V TCS DVSEL D-GND 2 4 6 8 1 3 5 7 9 10 B10B-PHDSS-B
MAIN MT
CN23 1 TMA_O 2 TMB_O B2P-VH CN5 24V 1 TCS 2 DVSEL 3 D-GND 4 B4B-PH-K-R
CN6 1 INT24V 2 PGND 3 /MMD 4 MMLD 5 /MMCLK B5B-PASK-1
CRUM
TONER MT
DHAI-0526QSPZ 1 2 6 5 8 24V TCS DVSEL D-GND BIAS DHAI-0515QSPZ 1 2 DHAI-0525QSPZ INT5V INT24V BIAS F-GND MC 1 DHAI-0273QSZZ 1 2 6 5 8
TCS

CN12 1 24V 2 /RRS 3 B3B-PH-K-E CN10 1 24V 2 /CPFS1 3 B3B-PH-K-S CN1 INT5V INT24V MCFB GRID 1 4
RESIST ROLLER SOLENOID
DV un
CASSETTE PAPER SOLENOID
HVT PWB
DHAI-0292QSZZ TC /BIAS /TC /GRIDL /MC 1 DHAI-0267QSPZ BC 1
DHAI-0269QSZZ
CED1
CED1 D-GND
1 2
CN7 1 CED1 2 D-GND 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-K
1 2 3 4 /BIAS 5 /TC 6 /GRIDL 7 /MC 8 B24B-PNDZS-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
DHAI-0289QSZZ
PPD1
CN16 1 LEDPPD1 2 PPD1 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-R
HLL HLN
THERMOSTAT
1 2 3 DHAI-0536QSPZ 1 2 HLL HLN 1 2 DHAI-0537QSPZ
HL
POWER SUPPLY PWB
AC-INLET L N 1 2 L N PGND AC-CORD
MPFS SOLENOID
1 2 3 4 5
CN26 24V /MPFS 5 MFD DGND B5B-PH-K-R CN15 1 24V 2 24V1(DSWS) B2P-VH-R
DSW
DHAI-0272QSZZ
CN1 D-GND 9 P-GND 10 D-GND 11 3.3VIN 12 EN5V 13 3.3VIN 14 5V 15 /POFF 16 12VIN 17 24V 18 FW 19 24V 20 /PR 21 HLOUT 22 P-GND 23 P-GND 24 B24B-PNDZS-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
D-GND P-GND D-GND 3.3VIN EN5V 3.3VIN 5V /POFF 12VIN 24V FW 24V /PR HLOUT P-GND P-GND
DHAI-0519QSPZ 1 2 3 LEDPPD2 PPD2 D-GND 1 2 3
DHAI-0287QSZZ
DHAI-0517QSPZ
PPD2
2 D-GND 2
Thermistor
CN11 1 LEDPPD2 2 PPD2 3 D-GND 4 RTH_IN 5 D-GND B5B-PH-K-S
Fan MT
DHAI-0543QSPZ
CN16 1 VFMOUT 2 FANLK 3 /VFMCNT 4 PGND B4B-PH-K-S
LCD_OPE PWB
FAX Model/FX13 Optional KIT only
SHIFTER MT
1 2 3 4 5
CN27 24VSFTMT /SFTMT_0 /SFTMT_1 /SFTMT_2 /SFTMT_3
FAX_OPE PWB
DUPLEX MT
CN20 1 24VDupMT 2 /DMT_0 3 /DMT_1 4 /DMT_2 5 /DMT_3 B05B-XASK-1
CN3 D-GND BL INFOLED OP_LATCH D-GND OP_CLK OP_DATA PSW PSL DRST LCDD7 LCDD6 LCDD5 LCDD4 LCDE LCDRS LCDCONT BZR KEYSC1 KEYSC2 KEYSC3 KEYIN SELIN3 SELIN2 SELIN1 D-GND EN5V D-GND 5V D-GND VCC3 D-GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 CN301 F-KEYSC3 F-KEYSC2 F-KEYSC1 F-KEYIN7 F-KEYIN6 F-KEYIN5 F-KEYIN4 F-KEYIN3 F-KEYIN2 F-KEYIN1 LED_V3 LED_V2 LED_V1 DATA1 D-GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 CN401 15 F-KEYSC3 14 F-KEYSC2 13 F-KEYSC1 12 F-KEYIN7 11 F-KEYIN6 10 F-KEYIN5 9 F-KEYIN4 8 F-KEYIN3 7 F-KEYIN2 6 F-KEYIN1 5 LED_V3 4 LED_V2 3 LED_V1 2 DATA1 1 D-GND 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
CN302 D-GND BL INFOLED OP_LATCH D-GND OP_CLK OP_DATA PSW PSL DRST LCDD7 LCDD6 LCDD5 LCDD4 LCDE LCDRS LCDCONT BZR KEYSC1 KEYSC2 KEYSC3 KEYIN SELIN3 SELIN2 SELIN1 D-GND EN5V D-GND 5V D-GND VCC3 D-GND
Duplex Model only

DHAI-0286QSZZ
SCANNER MT
B. MCU PWB (AR-M200/M201)
POD
DHAI-0268QSZ4
CN26 1 LEDPOD 2 POD 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-S
CN22 OUTA+ 1 OUTB+ 2 OUTA3 OUTB4 B4B-PH-K-R
DHAI-0530QSP1
SCANNER Carriage UN
- HSYNC D-GND +5V D-GND - LDEN - VIDEO - S/H D-GND
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LD
DHAI-0529QSP1
CN42 1 /SYNC 2 D-GND 3 INT5V 4 D-GND 5 /LDEN 6 /VIDEO 7 SHOLD 8 D-GND B08B-CZHK-B
CCFL
CN2 AC VOUT GND VCL P-GND 1 2 1 3
24V P-GND /PMD PMRDY PMCLK_A 5 4 3 2 1
INVERTER PWB
CN3 AC VOUT GND 1 3
POLYGON MT
DHAI-0423QSZZ
CN41 1 24V 2 P-GND 3 /PMD 4 PMRDY 5 PMCLK_A B05B-CZHK-B
CCFL
CCD PWB
PD1
CN28 1 2 PD1 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-M
MCU PWB
CN7 5VEN (CRUMSDA) (CRUMSCL) D-GND 24V TCS DVSEL D-GND
FAX Model only

DHAI-0514QSPZ
CN4 P-GND 1 P-GND 2 VCL 3 VCL 4 12V 5 12V 6 EN5V 7 D-GND 8 (VSAMP) 9 CCD-TG 10 D-GND 11 CCD-RS 12 (BSAMP) 13 CCD-CP 14 (AFE_SDI) 15 CCD_PHI2 16 D-GND 17 CCD_PHI1 18 (AFE_SEN) 19 (ADCLK) 20 D-GND 21 (AFE_SCK) 22 (AFE_DB7) 23 mt_at_home 24 (AFE_DB5) 25 (AFE_DB6) 26 D-GND 27 (AFE_DB4) 28 (AFE_DB3) 29 (AFE_DB2) 30 31 (AFE_DB1) (AFE_DB0) 32 FF4-32-S15D5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 P-GND P-GND VCL VCL 12V 12V EN5V D-GND (VSAMP) CCD-TG D-GND CCD-RS (BSAMP) CCD-CP (AFE_SDI) CCD_PHI2 D-GND CCD_PHI1 (AFE_SEN) (ADCLK) D-GND (AFE_SCK) (AFE_DB7) MHPS (AFE_DB5) (AFE_DB6) D-GND (AFE_DB4) (AFE_DB3) (AFE_DB2) (AFE_DB1) (AFE_DB0)
INT24V PGND /MMD MMLD /MMCLK
1 2 3 4 5
MAIN MT
CN12 1 INT24V 2 PGND 3 /MMD 4 MMLD 5 /MMCLK B5B-PASK-1
DHAI-0516QSPZ 2 5VEN 4 (CRUMSDA) 3 (CRUMSCL) 1 P-GND P18-FX-4S-C
CRUM
TONER MT
CN25 1 TMA_O 2 TMB_O B2P-VH
2 4 6 8 1 3 5 7 9 10 B10B-PHDSS-B
DHAI-0526QSPZ 1 2 6 5 8 24V TCS DVSEL D-GND BIAS 1 2 6 5 8
RESIST ROLLER SOLENOID
CN18 1 24V 2 /RRS 3 B3B-PH-K-E
CN6 24V 1 TCS 2 DVSEL 3 D-GND 4 B4B-PH-K-R
TCS
DV un
DHAI-0515QSPZ 1 2 BIAS F-GND MC 1

CN15 1 24V 2 /CPFS1 3 B3B-PH-K-S DHAI-0525QSPZ MCFB GRID DHAI-0269QSZZ 1 2
CASSETTE PAPER SOLENOID
DHAI-0273QSZZ 1 4
HVT PWB
DHAI-0292QSZZ TC 1
CED1
CED1 D-GND
CN21 1 CED1 2 D-GND 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-K
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
INT5V INT24V P-GND P-GND /BIAS /TC /GRIDL /MC
DHAI-0267QSPZ BC 1
CN2 INT5V 1 INT24V 2 P-GND 3 P-GND 4 /BIAS 5 /TC 6 /GRIDL 7 /MC 8 B24B-PNDZS-1
DHAI-0289QSZZ
PPD1
CN24 1 LEDPPD1 2 PPD1 3 D-GND B3B-PH-K-R
DHAI-0525QSPZ DHAI-0510QSP1 (for 100V area) DHAI-0536QSPZ (for 200V area) HLL HLN 1 2 3 1 2 HLL HLN 1 2
THERMOSTAT HL
DHAI-0511QSP1 (for 100V area) DHAI-0537QSPZ (for 200V area)
MPFS SOLENOID
CN14 1 24V 2 /MPFS 3 5 4 MFD DGND 5 B5B-PH-K-R DSW DHAI-0272QSZZ CN10 1 24V 2 24V1(DSWS) B2P-VH-R
POWER SUPPLY PWB

L N 1 2
For 120V area

AC-CORD
CN2 D-GND 9 P-GND 10 D-GND 11 3.3VIN 12 EN5V 13 3.3VIN 14 5V 15 /POFF 16 12VIN 17 24V 18 FW 19 24V 20 /PR 21 HLOUT 22 P-GND 23 P-GND 24 B24B-PNDZS-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
D-GND P-GND D-GND 3.3VIN EN5V 3.3VIN 5V /POFF 12VIN 24V FW 24V /PR HLOUT P-GND P-GND
For 200V area

AC-INLET
AC-CORD
DHAI-0491QSZZ
C. SPF unit (AR-203E optional only)

CN24 24VSPFMT 24VSPFMT SPMT_0 SPMT_2 SPMT_1 SPMT_3 SPID DGND LEDSPID SPPD DGND LEDSPPD B12B-PH-K-S DHAI-0532QSP1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 5 2 4 6 3 1 COMA COMB A /A B /B
MCU PWB
SPMT
1 2 3
SPID DGND LEDSPID
SPID
1 2 3
SPPD DGND LEDSPPD
SPPD
SPF UNIT
D. RSPF unit (AR-M200/M201 optional only)
CN30 LED_SRJD DGND SRJD LED_SPPD DGND SPPD LED_SCOD DGND SCOD LED_SPID DGND SPID 24VSPFSOL SPUS 24VSPFSOL SRVC SPMT_3 24VSPFMT SPMT_1 SPMT_0 24VSPFMT SPMT_2 24VSPFSOL NC B24B-PNDZS-1 DHAI-0533QSPZ 1 3 5 2 4 6 7 9 11 8 10 12 17 19 21 23 14 22 16 20 24 18 13 15 3 2 1 LED_SRJD D-GND SRJD 3 2 1 3 2 1 LED_SPPD D-GND SPPD 3 2 1 DHAI-0541QSPZ 3 2 1 LEDSRJD DGND SRJD
SRJD
MCU PWB
DHAI-0540QSPZ 3 2 1 LEDSPPD DGND SPPD
SPPD
3 2 1 1 2 24V _SPUS 1 2 1 2
LED_SPID D-GND SPID
3 2 1
24V SRVC
1 2
3 2 1
LEDSCOD DGND SCOD
SCOD
DHAI-0539QSPZ 3 2 1 LEDSPID DGND SPID
SPID
SPUS
RSPF UNIT
SRVC
1 2 3 4 5 6
/B COMB B A COMA /A
SPMT
E. 2nd cassette unit (AR-203E/M200/M201 optional only)

AR-203E: CN18 AR-M200/AR-M201: CN19 1 /CPFS2 2 24V 4 5V 7 PPD3 8 D-GND 11 PD2 12 D-GND 13 CED2 14 D-GND 3 5 6 9 10 B14B-PHDSS-B
CPFS2
2 1
/CPFS2 24V
2 1
PPD3
5V PPD3 D-GND
3 2 1
DHAI-0442QSZZ
PD2
PD2 D-GND
1 2
14 13 11 8 7 6 4 2 1 9 12 10 5 3
/CPFS2 24V 5V PPD3 D-GND PD2 D-GND CED2 D-GND FG
1 2 4 7 8 9 11 13 14 6 3 5 10 12
DHAI-0441QSZZ
MCU PWB
CED2
CED2 D-GND 1 2
2nd CASSETTE UN
F. Network box and FAX (AR-M200/M201 optional only)

FAX Model / FX13 Optional Model Only
DHAI-0538QSPZ CN5 1 MODEM_IN 2 D-GND 3 MCU_D6 4 MCU_D7 5 MCU_D4 6 MCU_D5 7 MCU_D2 8 MCU_D3 9 MCU_D0 10 MCU_D1 11 MCU_nCS 12 /RD 13 PB_DATA7 14 MCU_INT 15 PB_DATA5 16 PB_DATA6 17 PB_DATA3 18 PB_DATA4 19 PB_DATA1 20 PB_DATA2 21 PB_ADDR7 22 PB_DATA0 23 PB_DATA5 24 PB_ADDR6 25 PB_ADDR3 26 PB_ADDR4 27 PB_ADDR1 28 PB_ADDR2 29 PB_NCS1 30 PB_ADDR0 31 PB_NWE 32 PB_NAE0 33 FAX_RST 34 PB_NOE 35 24V 36 MDM_IRQ 37 VCC3 38 EN5V 39 D-GND 40 P-GND 2 1 4 3 6 5 8 7 10 9 12 11 14 13 16 15 18 17 20 19 22 21 24 23 26 25 28 27 30 29 32 31 34 33 36 35 38 37 40 39 CN2 MODEM_IN D-GND MCU_D6 MCU_D7 MCU_D4 MCU_D5 MCU_D2 MCU_D3 MCU_D0 MCU_D1 MCU_nCS /RD PB_DATA7 MCU_INT PB_DATA5 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA2 PB_ADDR7 PB_DATA0 PB_DATA5 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR3 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR2 PB_NCS1 PB_ADDR0 PB_NWE PB_NAE0 FAX_RST PB_NOE 24V MDM_IRQ VCC3 EN5V D-GND P-GND CN3 1 BT1 2 LT1 B02B-PH-K-S
Speaker
MCU PWB
FAX Main PWB
MJ2 1 BT1 2 LT1 3 TEL1 4 TEL2 5 LT2 6 BT2
To TEL Communication Line
MJ1 1 NC 2 NC 3 L1 4 L2 5 NC 6 NC
To TEL Communication Line
To LAN
CN8 TPTX+ TPTXTPRX+ NC NC TPRXNC NC ST_LED 5V LK_LED 5V
USB Cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VBUS DD+ GND FG CN9 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
CN1 5V DD+ GND FG
PJ1 VCC GND
NW Box PWB
2 3
AC adapter
1 2
L N
DHAI-0544QSPZ 1 2
CN3 1 L 3 N
POWER SUPPLY PWB
AR-NB2A Optional Model only
3. Signal name list

Signal name (ADCLK) (AFE_DB0) (AFE_DB1) (AFE_DB2) (AFE_DB3) (AFE_DB4) (AFE_DB5) (AFE_DB6) (AFE_DB7) (AFE_SCK) (AFE_SDI) (AFE_SEN) (BSAMP) (VSAMP) /BIAS /CPFS1 /CPFS2 /DMT_0 /DMT_1 /DMT_2 /DMT_3 /FAX_RST /GRIDL /LDEN /MC /MDM_IRQ /MMCLK /MMD /MPFS /PMD /POFF /PR Name AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE AFE HV bias signal 1st CS pickup solenoid 2nd CS pickup solenoid DUP motor DUP motor DUP motor DUP motor FAX PWB reset signal HV grid signal Laser HV MC signal FAX PWB interrupt Main motor Main motor Multi bypass solenoid Polygon motor Low voltage power Heater lamp Function/Operation AFE control signal Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data Image scan data AFE control signal AFE serial data AFE control signal AFE control signal AFE control signal HV bias drive Section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Process section Paper transport section 2nd cassette section Duplex drive section Duplex drive section Duplex drive section Duplex drive section FAX optional section Process section LSU Process section FAX optional section Main drive section Main drive section Paper transport section LSU Power section Power section
DUP motor phase control DUP motor phase control DUP motor phase control DUP motor phase control Main charger grid control Laser circuit control signal Main charger control Clock signal to the polygon motor Polygon motor drive signal Polygon motor drive signal Output power control Power relay control
Signal name /RD /RRS /RSV_SOL /SFTMT0 /SFTMT1 /SFTMT2 /SFTMT3 /SPUS /SRVC /SYNC /TC /VFMCNT /VIDEO BZR CCD_PHI1 CCD_PHI2 CCD-CP CCD-RS CCD-TG CED1 CED2 DVSEL FANLK FW HLOUT KEYIN KEYSC1 KEYSC2 KEYSC3 LCDCON LCDDB4 LCDDB5 LCDDB6 LCDDB7 LCDE LCDRS LEDPOD LEDPPD1 LEDPPD2 LEDSCOD LEDSPID LEDSPID LEDSPPD LEDSPPD LEDSRJD MCU_D0 MCU_D1 MCU_D2 MCU_D3 MCU_D4 MCU_D5 MCU_D6 MCU_D7 MCU_INT MCU_NCS MHPS MMLD MODEM_IN ONL OP_CLK OP-DATA OP-LATCH OUTAOUTA+
Name Control signal 1st transport solenoid Reverse solenoid Shifter motor Shifter motor Shifter motor Shifter motor Paper feed solenoid Reverse clutch Laser HV TC signal Fan speed signal Laser Buzzer signal CCD CCD CCD CCD CCD Machine cassette detection 2nd CS cassette detection Developing tank detection Fusing fan Low voltage power Heater lamp Key scan input Key scan output Key scan output Key scan output LCD control signal LCD data signal LCD data signal LCD data signal LCD data signal LCD control signal LCD control signal POD sensor power PPD sensor power PPD2 sensor power SCOD sensor power SPID sensor power SPID sensor power SPPD sensor power SPPD sensor power SRJD sensor power Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal MCU interrupt Control signal MHPS sensor Main motor FAX connection detection signal Online LED LED driver control LED driver control LED driver control Scanner motor Scanner motor
Function/Operation MCU bus control signal
Shifter motor phase control Shifter motor phase control Shifter motor phase control Shifter motor phase control
Horizontal sync signal from the LSU Transfer charger grid control Fan rotation speed control Laser drive signal Buzzer CCD control signal CCD control signal CCD control signal CCD control signal CCD control signal
Fan lock detection signal Zero cross detection Heater lamp control Key detection control Key scan output Key scan output Key scan output Signal for LCD Signal for LCD Signal for LCD Signal for LCD Signal for LCD Signal for LCD Signal for LCD
MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal MCU bus control signal Carriage HP detection Polygon motor ON/OFF detection signal
Scanner motor phase control Scanner motor phase control
Section FAX optional section Paper transport section RSPF section Shifter motor section Shifter motor section Shifter motor section Shifter motor section RSPF section RSPF section LSU Process section Optical section LSU Operation section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Scanner unit section Paper transport section 2nd cassette section Developing section Optical section Power section Power section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Paper exit section Paper transport section Fusing section RSPF section RSPF section SPF section RSPF section SPF section RSPF section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section Optical section Main drive section FAX optional section Operation section Operation section Operation section Operation section Optical drive section Optical drive section
Signal name OUTBOUTB+ PB_ADDR0 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR2 PB_ADDR3 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR5 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR7 PB_DATA0 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA7 PB_NAE0 PB_NCS1 PB_NOE PB_NWE PD1 PD2 PMCLK_A PMRDY POD PPD1 PPD2 PPD3 PSL PSW RTH_IN SCOD SELIN1 SELIN2 SELIN3 SHOLD SPID SPID SPMT_0 SPMT_0 SPMT_1 SPMT_1 SPMT_2 SPMT_2 SPMT_3 SPMT_3 SPPD SPPD SRJD STROBE TCS TMA_O TMA_O TMB_O TMB_O USB +D USB -D VCL VFMOUT
Name Scanner motor Scanner motor Address signal Address signal Address signal Address signal Address signal Address signal Address signal Address signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Data signal Control signal Control signal Control signal Control signal PD SW sensor PD2 SW sensor Polygon motor Polygon motor POD sensor PPD sensor PPD2 sensor PPD3 sensor Power save LED Start button control Thermistor SCOD sensor Select signal Select signal Select signal Laser SPID sensor SPID sensor RSPF motor SPF motor RSPF motor SPF motor RSPF motor SPF motor RSPF motor SPF motor SPPD sensor SPPD sensor SRJD sensor LED driver control Toner sensor Toner motor Toner motor Toner motor Toner motor USB signal USB signal Copy lamp Fusing fan
Function/Operation Scanner motor phase control Scanner motor phase control Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal Peripheral bus control signal 1st CS paper width sensor 2nd CS paper width detection Clock signal to the polygon motor Polygon motor ON/OFF detection signal Paper transport detection Paper transport detection Paper transport detection 2nd CS paper transport detection
Fusing section thermistor temperature detection RSPF cover open sensor HC151 select signal HC151 select signal HC151 select signal Laser APC signal RSPF UN paper entry sensor SPF UN paper entry sensor RSPF motor phase control SPF motor phase control RSPF motor phase control SPF motor phase control RSPF motor phase control SPF motor phase control RSPF motor phase control SPF motor phase control RSPF transport detection SPF transport detection RSPF paper exit sensor Toner quantity detection Toner motor phase control Toner motor phase control Toner motor phase control Toner motor phase control
Copy lamp control Fan drive signal
Section Optical drive section Optical drive section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section FAX optional section Paper transport section 2nd cassette section LSU LSU Paper exit section Paper transport section Fusing section 2nd cassette section Operation section Operation section Fusing section RSPF section Operation section Operation section Operation section LSU RSPF section SPF section RSPF section SPF section RSPF section SPF section RSPF section SPF section RSPF section SPF section RSPF section SPF section RSPF section Operation section Developing section Toner motor drive section Toner motor drive section Toner motor drive section Toner motor drive section USB section USB section Scanner unit section Optical section
MCU PWB (CPU section) (AR-203E/5420)

VCC3
1/12
VCC3
Spreading Range : +/- 1.2%

C1 *6 BR1 R3 *2 R4 C3 10kJx4 100p BR5 R7 C6 C5 R8 12p BR7 RY/BY /ESSRDY (KEYIN2) TP263 BR8 *4 *5 TP256 10kJx4 *3 EXTAL R245 R246 R247 R248 10kJ(open) 10kJ 10kJ 10kJ MCNT /CS5 CRUMSCL /PRINTST D11 D10 D9 D8 100p BR6 10kJx4 C4 *1 XTAL D15 D14 D13 D12 /CS0# /CS1# /CS2# /CS3# BR2 BR3
When IC1 is,
mounted
NOT mounted
R7(*3)
OPEN
0J
R1
R2
C2
R4(*1)
/STBY NMI /WDTOVF TP262
OPEN
1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5
680J
IC1
N.M.
N.M.
0.1u
D
X1 HC-49U/S 19.6608MHz
R8(*4)
22J
OPEN
TP253
D
10kJx4
R3(*2)
0J
OPEN
TP254
TP255
7 6 4 3
C5(*5)
27pF
15pF
VDD FRSEL S0 S1
XIN/CLKIN XOUT SSCLK VSS
TP257 1 8 5 2
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
C1(*6)
1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5
27pF
15pF
CY25811SC
R5
R6
4. Circuit diagram
*R3,R4,C1, and C5 are temtative
N.M.
0J
ARB_INT (FW) CPU_SYNC CCD_TG
1 2 3 4
10kJx4
8 7 6 5
1 2 3 4
10kJx4 D3 D2 D1 D0
8 7 6 5
D7 D6 D5 D4
1 2 3 4
10kJx4 BR10
8 7 6 5
(2,4)
A. MCU PWB (AR-203E/5420)
CPUCLK(NC)
(2) /PRINTST (2,3) /RD (3) /HWR (2) /LWR /RESET1 TP1 R9 TP218 R10 TP220 R11 TP222 TP224 TP226 EXTAL XTAL STROBE CRUMSCL CRUMSDTA /CS5 MCNT MCNT (5) SPFMT3 4 SPFMT2/MIRCNT 3 SPFMT1 2 SPFMT0 1 D_CONT (4) STROBE (4) CRUMSCL (12) CRUMSDTA (12) BR12 R12 R13 R14 33J 33J 33J DMT0 (6) DMT1 (6) DMT2 (6) DMT3 (6) MMCLK (5) 33J 33J 100J DMT0 DMT1 DMT2 DMT3 MMCLK RESETOUT1
/PRINTST /RD# /HWR# /LWR#
C78 100p
1 2 3 4
10kJx4
8 7 6 5
CPUCLK(NC) /RD# /HWR# /LWR#
4 3 2 1
BR11
5 6 7 8
10kJx4
(4) SELIN3 (4) SELIN2 (4) SELIN1
33p
33p
33p
TP228 TP227 TP225 TP223 TP221 TP219 TP7 TP216
TP217
TP215 TP214
TP230
TP229
(3) RY/BY CPU3.3
/STBY TP213 NMI TP212 TP211 /WDTOVF TP210
(8) ONL (4) (KEYIN2)
ONL (KEYIN2) /ESSRDY RY/BY
TP209 TP208 TP207 TP206 TP205 TP204 TP203 TP202 TP201 TP200 TP199 TP198
5 6 7 8
10kJx4 BR14
POFF TxD SDA SCL
R249 R250 R251 R252
N.M._10kJ 10kJ 2kJ 2kJ
C7
C8
C
102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65
IC2
C9
BR15
DMT0 DMT1 DMT2 DMT3
1 2 3 4
10kJx4
8 7 6 5
/TRANSST /SCANST /SCANSP# TP267
1 2 3 4
10kJx4 (SIN1) (SIN2) (SIN3) (KEYIN1)
8 7 6 5
C
4 3 2 1
BR16
TP197 TP196 TP195 SCL RxD SDA TxD POFF
5 6 7 8
(USB_IN) (4) SCL (3) RxD (9) SDA (3) TxD (9) POFF (2,5) 10kJx4 /ES_PAGE /MSU_ST1 RxD CRUMSDTA STROBE R19 10kJ R17 R261 R262 R263 R421 10kJ 10kJ 10kJ 10kJ 10kJ
(4) (KEYIN1)
/MSU_ST1 BR18 33Jx4 BR19 33Jx4
P53/ADTRG P52/SCK2 Vss Vss P51/RxD2 P50/TxD2 PF0/BREQ PF1/BACK PF2/LCAS/ WAIT/BREQO PF3/LWR PF4/HWR PF5/RD PF6/AS VCC PF7/0 Vss EXTAL XTAL VCC STBY NMI RES WDTOVF P20/PO0/TIOCA3 P21/PO1/YICOB3 P22/PO2/TIOCC3 P23/PO3/TIOCD3 P24/PO4/TIOCA4 P25/PO5/TIOCB4 P26/PO6/TIOCA5 P27/PO7/TIOCB5 P63/TEND1 P62/DREQ1 P61/TEND0/CS5 Vss Vss P60/DREQ0/CS4 Vss
(5) RTH (5) (TCS_AN) (4) (SIN1) (4) (SIN2) (4) (SIN3)
/ES_PAGE
C11 N.M.
1 2 3 4
8 BR17 7 33Jx4 6 5
TP194 TP193 TP192 TP191
D15 D14 D13 D12
/SCANST /TRANSST TP240 TP241 TP242 TP243 TP244
R18 /SCANSP# TP239 33J
HD6412321VF25(H8S/2321)
(2) /SCANSP (2) /SCANST (2) /TRANSST (5) PMCLK (4) SPFMT3 (4) SPFMT2/MIRCNT (4) SPFMT1 (4) SPFMT0
SPFMT3 SPFMT2/MIRCNT SPFMT1 SPFMT0
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4
(8) PSL TP246 TP247
PSL TP245
103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 AVcc Vref P40/AN0 P41/AN1 P42/AN2 P43/AN3 P44/AN4 P45/AN5 P46/AN6/DA0 P47/AN7/DA1 AVss Vss P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD P16/PO14/TIOCA2 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC P14/PO12/TIOCA1 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0 MD0 MD1 MD2 PG0/CAS PG1/CS3 PG2/CS2
TP127 TP128 TP129 TP130
PG3/CS1 PG4/CS0 Vss NC VCC PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 Vss PC4/A4 PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PB0/A8 PB1/A9 PB2/A10 PB3/A11 Vss PB4/A12 PB5/A13 PB6/A14 PB7/A15 PA0/A16 PA1/A17 PA2/A18 PA3/A19 Vss PA4/A20/IRQ4 PA5/A21/IRQ5 PA6/A22/IRQ6 PA7/A23/IRQ7 P67/CS7/IRQ3 P66/CS6/IRQ2 Vss Vss P65/IRQ1 P64/IRQ0
TP2
BR21
P35/SCK1 P34/SCK0 P33/RxD1 P32/RxD0 P31/TxD1 P30/TxD0 VCC PD7/D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 Vss PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PD0/D8 PE7/D7 PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 Vss PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 VCC 1 2 3 4 8 BR20 7 33Jx4 6 5
TP182 TP181 TP180 TP179 D3 D2 D1 D0
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39
C12 22pF
C13 N.M.
TP131 TP132
1 2 3 4 5 TP133 6 TP134 7 TP135 8 TP136 9 10 TP137 11 TP138 12 TP139 13 TP140 14 TP141 15 TP142 16 TP143 17 TP144 18 19 TP145 20 TP146 21 TP147 22 TP148 23 TP149 24 TP150 25 TP151 26 TP152 27 28 TP153 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
B
H8S/2321
(2) /CS2 (3) /CS1 (3) /CS0
5 TP248 6 TP154 7 8 TP155
4 3 2 1
/CS3# /CS2# /CS1# /CS0#
D[15..0]
(2,3)
33Jx4
B
Reset Circuit
C14 N.M.
C15 N.M.
BR22 33Jx4
8 7 6 5
8 BR23 7 33Jx4 6 5
BR24 8 7 33Jx4 6 5
1 2 3 4
BR25 33Jx4
1 2 3 4
R16 33J
8 7 6 5
BR26 8 7 33Jx4 6 5 1 2 3 4
C10 1uF
C16 0.1u
TP168 1 TP169 2 TP170 3 TP171 4 TP172 TP173 TP174 TP175
TP156 TP157 TP158 TP159
VCC3 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11
TP160 1 TP161 2 TP162 3 TP163 4 TP164 TP165 TP166 TP167
L11
0J (1608)
A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19
L1 ZJSR5101-223(open)
CPU3.3 A[20..0] (2,3)
A20
TP176
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25

ARB_INT (FW) CPU_SYNC TP252 TP249 TP251 TP250 TP261 TP178 TP177 CCD_TG (SPPD) (PSW) ARB_INT (2) (FW) (4) CPU_SYNC (2) mt_at_home# (4) CCD_TG (2,4) (SPPD) (7) (PSW) (7) VCC3 RESETOUT1
VCC3
R20 100kJ IC3
2 1
VDD VOUT GND CT

BU4212F
4 3
TP259 C17 0.01uF
TP260
/RESET0 (2,3,4)
C18 N.M.
ASIC_RESET
R21 33J TP258 /ASIC_RST (2,4,12)
C19
10u/16V
A
R22 10kJ C26 47p
MCU PWB (Graphic_ASIC section) (AR-203E/5420)

VCC3 L12 L2 G3.3V 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u ZJSR5101-223 C37 C27 C28 C29 C30 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 47u/16V + N.M. R23 R24 R25 BR70 10kJx4 R26 R27 /INREQ R28 BR71 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 10kJx4 10KJ R29 R30 R31 R32 R33 33J C38 C39 C40 C41 C42 C43 C44 /OUTCS R34 10KJ (1,3,4) /RESET0 33J R35 C45 33J 33J JTG_TCK JTG_TMS JTG_TDI JTG_TDO C46 C47 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J /PCLPRO /FAXPRO /ESPRD /OUTACK MTAD4 MTAD5 MTAD6 MTAD7 PIDATA4 PIDATA5 PIDATA6 PIDATA7 BR66 4 3 2 1 10kJx4 5 6 7 8 33J 33J VCC3 VCC3 MTAD0 MTAD1 MTAD2 MTAD3 BR67 4 3 2 1 PIDATA0 PIDATA1 PIDATA2 PIDATA3 10kJx4 5 6 7 8
2/12
VCC3
(4) VSAMP
TP338
(1,4) CCD_TG
(4) CCD_RS
TP339
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
(4) BSAMP
TP340
BR27 4 3 2 1
10kJx4 5 6 7 8
(4) CCD_CP
TP341
D
MTAD8 MTAD9 MTAD10 MTAD11 BR28 4 3 2 1 10kJx4 5 6 7 8 BR68 4 3 2 1 10kJx4 5 6 7 8
(4) AFE_SDI
AFE_SDI
TP342
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
(4) CCD_PHI2
TP343
(4) CCD_PHI1
TP344
(4) AFE_SEN
TP345
(4) ADCLK TP347
TP346
(4) AFE_SCK
MTAD12 MTAD13 MTAD14 MTAD15
BR69 4 3 2 1
10kJx4 5 6 7 8
(4) AFE_DB[7..0] 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u C62 C63 C64 C65 C66 C67 C68
TP77 TP78 TP79 TP80 TP81 TP82
TP83 TP84 TP85
TP86 TP87 TP88
TP89 TP90 TP91
TP92 TP93 TP94
TP337
TP336
TP335 TP334 TP333 TP332 TP331 TP330 TP329 TP328 TP327
TP326 TP325
TP324 TP323
TP99 TP100 TP101
TP102 TP103 TP104 TP105
C59
C60
C61
JTG_TDO JTG_TDI
JTG_TMS JTG_TCK
/INREQ /OUTCS /OUTACK /ESPRD /FAXPRO /PCLPRO
MTAD15 MTAD14 MTAD13
MTAD12 MTAD11 MTAD10
MTAD9 MTAD8 MTAD7
MTAD6 MTAD5 MTAD4
MTAD3 MTAD2 MTAD1 MTAD0
PIDATA0 PIDATA1 PIDATA2
8 7 6 5
G3.3V TP356
BR29 AFE_DB7 0Jx4 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB4 BR31 AFE_DB3 0Jx4 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB0 TP95 TP96 TP97 TP98
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
TP352 TP353 TP354 TP355
1 2 3 4 BR30 1 2 3 4 BR32 R36 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 149
IC4
AFE_DB7 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB4 10kJx4 AFE_DB3 8 AFE_DB2 7 AFE_DB1 6 AFE_DB0 5 10kJx4 10kJ AFE_SDI
(10) CL
VCC3
PIDATA3 PIDATA4 PIDATA5 PIDATA6 PIDATA7
CLPWM VCC(AC) AFE_DB0 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB7 GND(AC) AFESCK VCC(CORE) ADCLK GND(CORE) AFE_SEN CCD_PH1 CCD_PH2 AFE_SDI CCD_CP BSAMP CCD_RS CCD_TG VSAMP GND(CORE) TD0 TDI TRSK TMS TCK VCC(CORE) /INREQ /OUTCS /OUTACK /ESPRD /FAXPRD /PCLPRD GND(AC) MDAT15 MDAT14 MDAT13 VCC(CORE) MDAT12 MDAT11 MDAT10 VCC(AC) MDAT09 MDAT08 MDAT07 GND(CORE) MDAT06 MDAT05 MDAT04 VCC(CORE) MDAT03 MDAT02 MDAT01 MDAT00 GND(AC) /INCS /INACK /OUTREQ GND(CORE) /HSYNC PIDATA0 PIDATA1 PIDATA2 VCC(AC) PIDATA3 PIDATA4 PIDATA5 PIDATA6 PIDATA7 /POCS
TP112 TP113 TP114 /POACK /PIREQ TP115 TP116
C
1 1
BR33 1 2 3 4 TP357 TP358 TP359
10kJx4 8 7 6 5
MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_BI2 MM_AI0
1 1
C69
47p 47p 47p 47p 47p N.M. 47p 47p N.M. 47p N.M.
1 2 3 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
TP106 TP107 TP108 TP109 TP110 TP111
VCC3
C48 C49 C50 C51 C52 C53 C54 C55 C56 C57 C58
8 7 6 5
TP348 TP349 TP350 TP351
0.1u
(5) MM_Y3 (5) MM_Y2 (5) MM_Y1
C
VCC3
R37 R38
10kJ 10kJ
MM_AI1 MM_AI2
(6) MM_PH_B (6) MM_BI0 (6) MM_BI1
MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_BI2
(3) MAD[12..0]
(6) MM_PH_A (6) MM_AI0 (6) MM_AI1
MM_AI0 MM_AI1 MM_AI2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
R39 10kJ
PODATA0 PODATA1 PODATA2 PODATA3 PODATA4 PODATA5 PODATA6 PODATA7 TP76
MAD3 MAD2 MAD1 MAD0 TP368 TP369 TP370 TP371 TP372 TP373
TP409 TP410 TP411 TP412
8 7 6 5
TP322
/TRANSST (1)
(3) BANK1 (3) BANK0 (3) /SDCS TP376 TP377 TP378 TP379
1 1 1 1 1
MAD10
TP413 TP422 TP423 TP424
RCV VPIN VMIN
/PRINTST (1) /SCANST (1) RCV (11) VPIN (11) VMIN (11)
(3) RAMDB[15..0]
(3) (3) (3) (3)
/SDRAS /SDCAS /SDWDE DQM0
TP425 TP426 TP427 TP428
1 1 1
1 2 3 4 BR34 1 2 3 4 BR35 1 2 3 4 BR36
33Jx4 8 7 6 TP374 5 TP375 33Jx4 8 7 6 5 33Jx4
R40 R41 R42 R43 BR63 33Jx4
33J 33J 33J 33J N.M.
TP321 TP320 TP319 TP318 N.M. N.M.
VPOUT (11) VMOUT (11) OEN (11) SUSPEND (11) VCC3
RAMDB7 RAMDB6 RAMDB5 RAMDB4 TP380 TP381 TP382 TP383 33Jx4 TP384 TP385 TP386 TP387 HG73C141HFV 33Jx4
1 1 1 1 1
VCC3
TP431 TP432 TP433 TP434
8 7 6 5
ASIC
TP67 TP54 TP53 TP52 TP51 TP50 TP49 TP48 TP47
1 2 3 4 1 1 1 1
8 7 6 5
BR62 33Jx4
PARAD0 PARAD1 PARAD2 PARAD3
TP317 TP316 TP315 TP314
C70
C71
C72
C73
N.M.
BR39 1 2 3 4
10kJx4 8 7 6 5
RAMDB7 RAMDB6 RAMDB5 RAMDB4
8 7 6 5
1 2 3 4 1 1
TP46 TP45
8 7 6 5
R404 R403 33J 33J
PARAD4 PARAD5 PARAD6 PARAD7 /REV FAULT TP309 TP308
TP313 TP312 TP311 TP310 /REV (13) /FAULT (13) PARAD[7..0] (13)
MEM_INT CLKSW /POACK /PIREQ
R253 R254 R255 R256
10kJ 10kJ 10kJ 10kJ
RAMDB15 RAMDB14 RAMDB13 RAMDB12 TP388 TP389 TP390 TP391 33Jx4
1 1 1
B
TP392 TP393 TP394 TP395 33Jx4 TP396 TP397 TP398 TP400
BR42 1 2 3 4
10kJx4 8 RAMDB3 7 RAMDB2 6 RAMDB1 5 RAMDB0
8 7 6 5
BR61 33Jx4
TP44 TP43 TP42 TP41
1 2 3 4 1 1 1
BR45 1 2 3 4
10kJx4 8 7 6 5
8 7 6 5
8 7 6 5
BR60 33Jx4 TP40 TP39 TP38 TP37
/ACK BUSY PE SLCT
TP307 TP306 TP305 TP304
/ACK (13) BUSY (13) PE (13) SLCT (13)
PODATA0 PODATA1 PODATA2 PODATA3
BR43 1 2 3 4
10kJx4 8 7 6 5
B
1 2 3 4 1
(3) DQM1 (3) SDCKE TP399 82Jx4 TP401 TP402 TP403 TP404 33Jx4 TP405 TP406 TP407 TP408 33Jx4
8 7 6 5
8 7 6 5
/INIT /SLCTIN /AUTOFD /STB
TP303 TP302 TP301 TP300 VCC3 /SCANSP (1)
/INIT (13) /SLCTIN (13) /AUTOFD (13) /STB (13) VCC3 VCC3
BR46 1 2 3 4
10kJx4 8 7 6 5
1 1 1 1
1 1 1
VCC3
223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 1
OP_CLK (4) OP_LATCH (4) OP_DATA (4) TM (4) TM_ (4) TP5 TP34 TP35 TP36 SPFON (4) MIRON (4) MPFS (5)
GND(CORE) MM_Y3 MM_Y2 MM_Y1 VCC(CORE) MM_PH_B MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_BI2 MM_PH_A MM_AI0 MM_AI1 MM_AI2 GND(AC) RAM_MAD3 RAM_MAD2 GND(CORE) RAM_MAD1 RAM_MAD0 RAM_MAD10 VCC(CORE) RAM_BANKS1 RAM_BANKS0 RAM_CS RAM_RAS RAM_CAS VCC(AC) RAM_WDE RAM_DQM0 GND(AC) RAM_DATA7 RAM_DATA6 RAM_DATA5 RAM_DATA4 GND(CORE) RAM_DATA3 RAM_DATA2 RAM_DATA1 RAM_DATA0 GND(AC) RAM_DATA15 RAM_DATA14 VCC(CORE) RAM_DATA13 RAM_DATA12 RAM_DATA11 RAM_DATA10 RAM_DATA9 RAM_DATA8 VCC(CORE) RAM_DQM1 RAM_CKE GND(AC) RAM_CLK_OUT GND(CORE) RAM_MAD12 RAM_MAD11 RAM_MAD9 VCC(CORE) RAM_MAD8 RAM_MAD7 VCC(AC) RAM_MAD6 RAM_MAD5 RAM_MAD4 GND(AC) CPUDATA15 CPUDATA14 CPUDATA13 CPUDATA12 CPUDATA11 CPUDATA10 CPUDATA9 CPUDATA8 1 1 1
HL (5) PR (5) CPFS2 (5)
VCC
OUTPUT
C75 22000p
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74
CPU_DATA7 CPU_DATA6 CPU_DATA5 CPU_DATA4 VCC(AC) CPU_DATA3 CPU_DATA2 CPU_DATA1 CPU_DATA0 GND(AC) MIRCNT /CPUSYNC MEM_INT ARB_INT VCC(CORE) CPU_AD8 CPU_AD7 CPU_AD6 CPU_AD5 GND(CORE) RAM_CLK_IN CPU_AD4 CPU_AD3 CPU_AD2 CPU_AD1 CPU_AD0 /CPUCS SFCLK48 GND(CORE) /CPUWR /CPURD /RESET VCC(CORE) PFCLK CLKSW GND(CORE) PFCLKOUT PFCLKIN GND(PLL) VCC(PLL) GND(PLL) VCC(PLL) TM2_15M /SYNC GND(AC) /VIDEO /LEND VCC(AC) OUTP00A OUTP01A OUTP02A OUTP03A OUTP04A OUTP05A OUTP06A OUTP15A VCC(CORE) OUTP07A OUTP08A GND(CORE) OUTP09A OUTP10A OUTP11A OUTP12A OUTP13A VCC(CORE) OUTP14A OUTP00B GND(AC) OUTP01B OUTP02B OUTP03B OUTP04B VCC(AC)
TP269
TP272 TP273
TP274 TP275
SG8002DC(48.0000MHz)
TP271
TP276
D7 D6 D5 D4
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8
D3 D2 D1 D0
TP268
TP287 TP4
TP286 TP288 TP289 TP290 TP291
TP292 TP293
TP294 TP295 TP296 TP297
MEM_INT
A9 A8 A7 A6
RAM_CLK_OUT A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
SFCLK48
PFCLK CLKSW
PFCLKOUT PFCLKIN
SYNC#
TP277 TP278
VCC3
(1,3) D[15..0]
/CS2
(5) RRS (5) LDEN
0.1u
(1) /LWR /RD (1,3) /ASIC_RST
VFM_24V
ARB_INT
VFMCNT_12V
(5) PTPULSE
(5) MRPS1 (5) MRPS2 (5) MRPS3 (5) CPFS1
VCC
OUTPUT
PFCLKIN
(1)
(5) MMD (5) PMD (5) TC (5) GRIDL (5) MC (5) BIAS
(1)
(5)
C232 22000p
C230
(5)
(5)
(4) MIRCNT (1) CPU_SYNC
SG8002DC(18.3856MHz)
(1,4,12)
N.C.
GND
(4) VIDEO# /LEND

R44 10kJ TP298
BR48 1 2 3 4
10kJx4 8 RAMDB11 7 RAMDB10 6 RAMDB9 5 RAMDB8
MAD12 MAD11 MAD9 MAD8
8 7 6 5
VCC3 R45 N.M. TP299 PFCLK R50 N.M. R49 10kJ PARAD0 PARAD1 PARAD2 PARAD3 R51 10kJ R48 N.M.
MAD7 MAD6 MAD5 MAD4
(3) SDCLK
R47
33J
1 2 3 4 BR37 TP435 1 TP436 2 TP437 3 TP438 4 BR40 TP439 1 TP440 2 TP441 3 TP442 4 BR41 TP443 1 TP444 2 TP445 3 TP446 4 BR44 TP429 1 TP430 2 TP447 3 TP448 4 BR47 TP414 1 TP415 2 TP416 3 TP417 4 BR49 TP418 1 TP419 2 TP420 3 TP421 4 BR50 RAM_CLK_OUT
8 7 6 5
RCV VPIN VMIN
BR51 1 2 3 4 BR52 1 2 3 4
10kJx4 8 7 6 5 10kJx4 8 7 6 5
TP449
C74 N.M.
/POREQ VCC(AC) /PIWT /PIACK GND(AC) /POACK /PIREQ GND(CORE) PODATA0 PODATA1 PODATA2 PODATA3 PODATA4 PODATA5 PODATA6 PODATA7 VCC(CORE) /TRANSST /RECEPTST /PRINTST /SCANST RCV VPIN VMIN GND(CORE) VPOUT VMOUT OEN GND(AC) SUSPEND IE1284_PARAD0 IE1284_PARAD1 VCC(AC) IE1284_PARAD2 IE1284_PARAD3 IE1284_PARAD4 IE1284_PARAD5 IE1284_PARAD6 IE1284_PARAD7 IE1284_REV VCC(CORE) IE1284_FAULT IE1284_ACK IE1284_BUSY IE1284_PE GND(CORE) IE1284_SLCT IE1284_INIT IE1284_SLCTIN VCC(CORE) IE1284_AUTOFD IE1284_STB TSP_MODE TSO0 /SCANSP VCC(AC) OPE_CLK GND(AC) OPE_LATCH OPE_DATA TM /TM VCC(CORE) OUTP14B OUTP13B OUTP12B OUTP11B OUTP10B OUTP09B OUTP08B GND(CORE) OUTP07B OUTP06B OUTP05B
148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75
C264
1000p
0J (1608) L13
X2
PARAD4 PARAD5 PARAD6 PARAD7 /INIT /SLCTIN /AUTOFD /STB
BR53 1 2 3 4
10kJx4 8 7 6 5
R53
33J SFCLK48
C76 0.1u CLK_CONT1
N.C.
GND
C77 82p
BR54 1 2 3 4
10kJx4 8 7 6 5
VCC3 VCC3 R52 SYNC# 10J C79 47p R409 N.M._10KJ (4) (/ASIC_RST) (1,4) /RESET1 TP451 R406 R407 R408 C256 N.M. 33J N.M. N.M. C257 47p TP452 /OA_RST (13) (1,5) POFF R236 N.M. CLK_CONT R375 N.M. PFCLKOUT
A
TP450 (/SYNC) (4) R374 N.M.
(1,3) A[20..0]
L10
0J (1608)
X3
R363
33J
CLK_CONT1
C231 120p
MCU PWB (Memory section) (AR-203E/5420)

FlashROM VPP Controll
VCC3
3/12
D
VCC3 J1,J2 VPP
Serial EE-PROM
VCC3
VCC3
C81 0.1u R56 10kJ N.M.
IC5
1 2 3
(1) SCL (1) SDA R59 N.M. R62
R58
1kJ
8 7 6 5 E0 E1 E2 VSS
VCC WC SCL SDA
1 2 3 4
24C02/24WC04/24WC08
RAMDB[15..0]
(2)
VCC3 VCC3 IC6
C
N.M. N.M.
SDRAM
VCC3
C
RAMDB15 RAMDB14 RAMDB13 RAMDB12 RAMDB11 RAMDB10 RAMDB9 RAMDB8
(1,2) A[20..0] 10kJ VCC3 RAMDB0 RAMDB1 RAMDB2 R66 10kJ A17 RAMDB7 RAMDB5 RAMDB6 RAMDB3 RAMDB4
FLASH ROM
R63 R64
R65
SRAM
IC7
IC8
I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7

/HWR (1,2,4) /RESET0 TP454 VPP (1) RY/BY R69 0J R68 0J MAD10 MAD0 MAD1 MAD2 MAD3 D15 D7 D14 D6 D13 D5 D12 D4 (2) DQM0 (2) /SDWDE (2) /SDCAS (2) /SDRAS (2) /SDCS (2) BANK0 (2) BANK1
6 7 10 11 22 23 26 27
D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A20
DQM1 (2) SDCLK (2) SDCKE (2)
R67
0J
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 C84 /RD A1 N.M. N.M. /CS0 (1) 0.1u D11 D3 D10 D2 D9 D1 D8 D0
1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32
VCC3 VCC3
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16
VDD VDD
8 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
VCC DQ0 VCCQ DQ1 DQ2 VSSQ DQ3 DQ4 VCCQ DQ5 DQ6 VSSQ DQ7 VCC LDQM WE CAS RAS CS BA0 BA1 A10 A0 A1 A2 A3 VCC
VSS DQ15 VSSQ DQ14 DQ13 VCCQ DQ12 DQ11 VSSQ DQ10 DQ9 VCCQ DQ8 VSS NC UDQM CLK CLKE NC A11 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 VSS
SDRAM (16bit x 4bank)
54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 TP458 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
C82 N.M.
MAD12 MAD11 MAD9 MAD8 MAD7 MAD6 MAD5 MAD4
C83
(1) /CS1 (1,2) /RD (1) /HWR N.M. N.M.
/RD /HWR
5 28 12
CS1 OE WE
0.1u
GND GND
A17 A1 Flash ROM C87 R70 C85 C86 C233 C234 0.1u 0.1u
9 25
A19 A18 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TP453 11 12 13 14 TP455 15 16 TP456 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A19 NC WE RP VPP WP RY/BY A18 A17 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A16 BYTE GND DQ15 DQ7 DQ14 DQ6 DQ13 DQ5 DQ12 DQ4 VCC DQ11 DQ3 DQ10 DQ2 DQ9 DQ1 DQ8 DQ0 OE GND CE A0
48 47 46 TP457 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
N.M.
N.M.
IS63LV1024L-12J-TR
VCC3
B
C88 0.1u C89 0.1u C90 0.1u C91 0.1u C92 0.1u C93 0.1u C94 0.1u
C235

IC7 LH28F800BJE-PBTL90(LHF80JZP) LH28F160BJE-BTL90(LHF16JT2) S29AL008D70TFI020# S29GL016A90TFIR20# OPEN OPEN 0J OPEN 0.1u OPEN OPEN 10kJ OPEN 22000p 64Mb(1Mx16bitx4bank) K4S641632K-UC75 128Mb(2Mx16bitx4bank) K4S281632I-UC60 IC6 Vendor/Type
(1,2) D[15..0]
C236
MAD[12..0] (2)
R81 R82 R86 R83 C86 C87
10kJ OPEN (J1,J2 in the case of N.M.:0J)
MCU PWB (Driver section 1) (AR-203E/5420)

VCC3
4/12
3.3V
VCC3 C80 0.1u VCC3 IC43 33J 33J 33J AFE_SDI#
5V/3.3V
IC9 TP496
Digital Input Multiprexer

5V AFE_SDI R15 0J TP17 TP18
IC10
D
R74 SIN1 10J 74LCX244 C96 0.1u 33p VCC3 74LCX244 C97 AFE_SDI R133 open AFE_SDI# C95 0.1u TP493
VCC
16
(11) USB_IN SIN1 SIN2 SIN3 (2) AFE_SDI (2) AFE_SEN (2) AFE_SCK TP497 R71 TP498 R72 TP499 R73 TP19 R130 0J
VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4

(USB_IN) (1) (SIN1) (1) (SIN2) (1) (SIN3) (1) AFE_SDI# (10) AFE_SEN# (10) AFE_SCK# (10) (2) VSAMP (1,2) CCD_TG (2) CCD_RS (2) BSAMP (2) CCD_CP (2) CCD_PHI2 (2) CCD_PHI1 (2) ADCLK
20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3
TP534 TP535 TP536 TP537 TP538 TP539 TP540 TP541 R54 56J R57 56J R61 100J R83 47J R46 56J R55 100J R60 56J R82 100J
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND 2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4
(7) (PPD1) (7) (POD) (7) (MFD) (7) (CED1) (7) (TCS) (7) (PMRDY) (7) DVS1 (7) (DRST)
4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 5 TP487 6 TP488
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
VSAMP# CCD_TG# CCD_RS# BSAMP# CCD_CP# CCD_PHI2# CCD_PHI1# ADCLK#
VSAMP# (10) CCD_TG# (10) CCD_RS# (10) BSAMP# (10) CCD_CP# (10) CCD_PHI2# (10) CCD_PHI1# (10) ADCLK# (10)
(8) (SELIN1) (8) (SELIN2) (8) (SELIN3)
TP484 TP485 TP486
11 10 9 7 8
A B C G
VSAMP# BSAMP# ADCLK# CCD_PHI1# CCD_PHI2# CCD_CP# CCD_RS# CCD_TG#
GND
74HC151 IC11 TP500 TP501 /RESET# /RESET1 (1,2) (D_CONT) (11) (/ASIC_RST) (2) (KEYIN1) (1) (KEYIN2) (1) /RESET# TP503 R78 TP11 TP12 C101 C98 0.1u 0.01uF N.M. N.M. C102 C255 100J TP502 (8) KEYIN1 (8) KEYIN2 (1,2,3) /RESET0 (1) D_CONT
5V/3.3V
3.3V
5V
TP507 TP508 TP509 TP510 TP511
R75 R76 R77 R79
33J 33J 1kJ 33J
IC12
VCC
R80 R81 SIN2 10J 74LCX244 10kJ C100 33p (10) AFE_DB#[7..0] VCC3 C99 0.1u TP494
16
(1,2,12) /ASIC_RST
(7) (PPD2) (7) (PPD3) (5) THOPEN (7) (CED2) (7) DSWS (7) (MMLD)
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND
VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4
20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3
C108 82p C124 82p C125 82p C126 N.M. C129 N.M. C130 82p C132 33p C133 82p
(7) (FANLK)
4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 5 TP489 6 TP490
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
VCC3 C262 0.1u VCC3 IC44 AFE_DB[7..0] (2)
11 10 9 7 8
A B C G
GND
74HC151
C
5V 5V (2) MIRCNT IC14
3.3V
3.3V
IC13
AFE_DB#0 AFE_DB#1 AFE_DB#2 AFE_DB#3 AFE_DB#4 AFE_DB#5 AFE_DB#6 AFE_DB#7
(7) (SPID) R86 SIN3 10J 33Jx4 C105 0.1u C103 0.1u 33p 74LCX244 C104 TP495 TP516 TP517 TP518 TP519
TP480 BR55
VCC
16
R85 10kJ
TP513 TP514 TP515
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10
1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND
VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4
20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3
AFE_DB0 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB7
(7) (PD1) (7) (PD2)
TP482 TP483
VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 5 6 7 8

(SPFMT0) (6) (SPFMT1) (6) (SPFMT2) (6) (SPFMT3) (6)
20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 4 3 2 1
74LCX244(open)
4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 5 TP491 6 TP492
(1) SPFMT0 (1) SPFMT1 (1) SPFMT2/MIRCNT (1) SPFMT3 (2) MIRON (2) SPFON
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND
11 10 9 7 8
A B C G
BR64 AFE_DB#0 AFE_DB#1 AFE_DB#2 AFE_DB#3
GND
74HC151
8 7 6 5
0Jx4 AFE_DB#4 AFE_DB#5 AFE_DB#6 AFE_DB#7
1 2 3 4
AFE_DB0 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB3
3.3V
IC15
5V
5V
5 6 7 8
33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J TP528 TP529 TP530 (SELIN1) (8) (SELIN2) (8) (SELIN3) (8) (OP_CLK) (8) (OP_DATA) (8) (OP_LATCH) (8) (TM) (6) (TM_) (6)
BR65
4 3 2 1
0Jx4
(1) SELIN1 (1) SELIN2 (1) SELIN3 (2) OP_CLK (2) OP_DATA (2) OP_LATCH (2) TM (2) TM_ R97 10kJ R128 10kJ R96 10kJ
VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4

TP520 TP521 TP522 TP523 TP524 TP525 TP526 TP527 C107 0.1u R87 R88 R89 R90 R91 R92 R93 R94
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND

74VHCT244
20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3
AFE_DB4 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB7
B
5V 5V VCC3

5V/3.3V
R98 N.M. IC18
3.3V 3.3V
Vcc 5 1 3
C109 47p NC7WZ17 C106 IC16 0.1u
5V
5 1 A1 A2 Y1 Y2 GND 6 4 2
C110 0.1u TP531 R100 33J (/SYNC) (2) mt_at_home# (1) (2) VIDEO#
(9) /SYNC (10) mt_at_home TP506
TP505
4 2 3
TP542 NC7ST08M5X
R95
100J
/VIDEO (9)
5V
VCC3
3.3V
VCC3 R99 10kJ IC35
3.3V
(1) STROBE
3.3V
C263 IC45 0.1u
5V
5 1 4 Vcc 5 2 3
TP543 R422 100J TP544 (STROBE) (8)
A
(8) FW
A
1 3
C258 0.1u(N.M.)
A1 A2
Y1 Y2 GND
NC7WZ17
6 4 2
TP270
TP533 R101
33J
(FW) (1)
NC7ST08M5X
C221 0.1u

VCC3 INT24V 24V R155 470kJ Q18 KRC102S R153 100J R191 4.7kJ R193 10kJ 12V PR# VCC3
5/12
BR72 10kJx4
4 3 2 1
5 6 7 8
IC19 D34 1SS355
(2) MC (2) BIAS (2) TC (2) GRIDL IC17A KIA393F (D) TP265 C134 TP28 TP26 + TP29 TP264 1uF/16V Q21 R195 (2) PR TP22 100J D35 1SS355 100J TP21 PR# R194
BR56 1 2 3 4 /MC (8) /BIAS (8) /TC (8) /GRIDL (8) /MCNT (9)
1.5kJx4 8 7 6 5
TP545 TP546 TP547 TP548
D
1
Q20 KRA119S
R146 1.5kF
3 1
(G) (S) 12V TP23
TP27
3 2
R192 10kJ
Q19 2SK3018
(1) MCNT
R370 1.5kJ (2) PTPULSE
TP549
2 4
TP551 R144 47kJ C160 2.2uF/10V
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3
/PR (8) /PR C162 0.1u D33 1SS355
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B E
1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C COM
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
KID65001AF
R138 10kJ
PGND
3 TP266
12V
IC17B
KRC102S
KIA393F
5
PGND 24V 5V D49 MTZ J22B VCC3 24V R413 N.M._10kJ R108 N.M._47kJ R109 /VFMCNT (9) N.M._4.7kJ 1/4W D1 VFMOUT (9) D4 PGND 1SS355 R106 10kF MA700 R107 4.3kF TP617 TP562 Q2 N.M._KTA1505S TP618 R102 1kF R103 1MF R104 7.5kF R105 1kJ 1.5kJx4 8 7 6 5 IC21 N.M._1.5kJ N.M._1.5kJ TP561 /CPFS1 (9) /CPFS2 (9) /MPFS (9) /RRS (9) 12V VCC3
7 6
-
TP479
VCC3
R419 N.M._10kJ
R418 N.M._10kJ
(2) CPFS1 (2) CPFS2 (2) MPFS (2) RRS TP554 TP555 TP556 TP557 TP558 TP559 TP560
BR57 1 2 3 4
(2) VFM_24V (2) VFMCNT_12V
R379 R380
IC20A KIA393F
3 2
+ -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B E
KID65001AF
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
TP619
4
FTH
12V C111 0.1u/50V
PGND D2 24V R388 47kJ TP606 CP16
VCC3 D3
VCC3
1 3 2
KDS226(open)
12V
1 3 2
KDS226
Q16
R386
0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM Q12 2SB1132 D55 (9) RTH_IN
IC22A KIA358F
3
D57
TP603
TP605
3 2
B C
+ -
R110 300J
R111 100J
1 TP620 4
12V C112 22000p
TP621 C113 0.1u C114 0.1u/50V
RTH (1)
2
TP607 RLS-73 CRH01 47kJ 0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM TP609 CP17 12V
4.7kJ 1/4W
KRC102S R389
Q17
R387
VCC3
12V
5V
3 C
D58 TP610 4.7kJ 1/4W D56
TP604
TP608
Q13 2SB1132
R112 1.2kF
R113 10kJ
8
TP622
IC20B KIA393F
B
1
RLS-73 PGND INT5V CRH01
KRC102S
5 6
R114 10kF
+ -
B
THOPEN (4)
C115 22000p
D5 1SS355 R84 10kJ IC24 TP613 R196 10kJ Q3 KRA119S
(S) 5V IC25 R117 10kJ Q4 KRC102S
HLOUT (8) (12) TCS_AN
R365 0J TP624

2 3
TP612
TP611
/MMD (9) MRPS_1 (6) MRPS_2 (6) MRPS_3 (6) /POFF (8) TP614 R405 0J
Analog Tonner Sensor Buffer

5V D46 5V R115 100J 1/4W 12V D47 VCC3
VCC3
(2) MMD (2) MRPS1 (2) MRPS2 (2) MRPS3 (1,2) POFF (2) HL FTH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B G
KID65503F
1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C NC
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1 3 2
R129 N.M. KDS226(open) IC22B KIA358F
1 3 2
KDS226(open)
R414 N.M._10kJ (D) Q11 2SK3018(open) (G)
Q14
/MMCLK (9)
(1) MMCLK
5 6
R364 0J
+ -
R366 N.M.
R142 10kJ(open)
TP623 R367 10kJ C237 N.M.
(TCS_AN) (1)
KRC102S
(2) MM_Y1 (2) MM_Y2 (2) MM_Y3 (2) PMD (1) PMCLK (2) LDEN (2) /LEND
MMref0 (6) MMref1 (6) MMref2 (6) /PMD (9) PMCLK_A (9) /LDEN (9) TP615
3 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B G
KID65503F R116 10kJ
1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C NC
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
SHOLD (9)
6/12
Scanner Motor Driver
Duplex Motor Driver

For AL2040 Model Only
(9) OUT_A(9) OUT_A+ (9) OUT_B+ (9) OUT_B24VSCMT (1) DMT0 5V IC26
O1 O2 O3 O4 16 9 7
/DMT0 (9) /DMT1 (9) /DMT2 (9) /DMT3 (9) 24VDupMT
R118 TP594 (1) DMT1 0.68J 1W (1) DMT2 (1) DMT3 TP593 MM_AI0 (2) PGND MM_AI1 (2) MM_PH_A (2) PGND TP592 C116 820p IC27 R120 1.5kJ
R119
0.68J 1W
R121 1.5kJ
3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 I1 NC NC I2 NC I3 NC NC I4 NC GND GND COM COM 1 8 17 18

TD62064AF
TP586
D6
PGND
C117 820p
MTZ J22B
5V
(2) MM_BI0 (2) MM_BI1 (2) MM_PH_B
R122 1kJ L6219DS R124 30kJ C119 820p
TP591
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 OUT 1A OUT 2A SENSE 2 COMP 2 OUT 2B GND GND I02 I12 PHASE 2 VREF 2 RC 2 VS SENSE 1 COMP 1 OUT 1B I01 GND GND I11 PHASE 1 VREF 1 RC 1 VSS
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
C118 820p TP587 PGND PGND C121 0.1u 24V PGND 24VSCMT CP2 0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM C122 47u/35V + 24VSPFMT CP3 0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM 24VDupMT C123 0.1u/50V CP1 0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM 5V PGND
R123 30kJ
R125 2kJ
R126 1kJ
R127 510J
C120 0.1u
PGND
(5) MMref0 (5) MMref1 (5) MMref2
TP588 TP589 TP590
PGND
PGND
SPF Motor Driver Tonner Motor Driver

24VSPFMT IC28 24V
4 3 2 1
5 6 7 8

Vs
SPMT_0 (9) SPMT_2 (9) SPMT_1 (9) IC29 SPMT_3 (9) (4) (TM) (4) (TM_) C222 R132 1J 2W R141 1J 2W 0.1u 5V
(4) (4) (4) (4)
(SPFMT0) (SPFMT2) (SPFMT1) (SPFMT3)
8 7 11 12 IN A IN A/ IN B IN B/ REF Sync Sense A Sense B

STA7100M
13
9 6 5 14 GND 10
C127 10u/35V R244 4.7kJ
C128 0.1u/50V
BR59
10kJx4
OUT A OUT A OUT A/ OUT A/ OUT B OUT B OUT B/ OUT B/
1 2 3 4 17 18 15 16
2 9 1 5
Vcc IN1 IN2 GND
Vs Vref OUT1 OUT2 N.C

TA7291AS
6 8 7 3 4
TMA_O (9) TMB_O (9)
5V
R131 1.2kJ
A
PGND
R134 300J
R135 620J
R136 1.2kJ
R137 100J
C131
0.1u
(5) MRPS_1 (5) MRPS_2 (5) MRPS_3
TP595 TP596 TP597
PGND
PGND
PGND
MCU PWB (Noise filter/Pull-up section) (AR-203E/5420)
7/12
VCC3 INT24V 5V R143 (9) 24V1(DSWS) 0.22J 2W D11 1SS355 R152 1kJ 2W D9 D10
D
1 3 2
PGND KDS226 KDS226 PGND
C135
C136
C137
C138
C139
C140
C141
C142
C143
D
1 3 2
R145 15kJ R147 4.7kJ R148 10kJ R149 10kJ R150 15kJ R151 10kJ
0.1u
N.M.
0.1u
0.1u
N.M.
N.M.
N.M.
N.M.
N.M.
C144
C145
C146
C147
C148
C149
C150
N.M.
N.M.
N.M.
N.M.
N.M.
0.1u
0.1u
C151 (9) SPID D12 1SS355 5V D13 TP585 (9) POD (9) PMRDY 5V (9) PPD3 (9) PD1 (9) PD2
C152
C153
C154
C155
C156
C157
C158
C159
R154 R156 R157 R158 R159 R160
1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ
(SPID) (4) (PPD3) (4) (PD1) (4) (PD2) (4) (POD) (4) (PMRDY) (4)
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
0.1u
N.M.
1 3 2
KDS226 D14 D15 D16 D17
R161 20kJ
R162 20kJ
C161
C163 1000p 1000p
C164 1000p
C165 1000p
C166 1000p
C167 1000p
1 3
DSWS (4) KDS226 R163 2.7kJ 0.1u C168 KDS226 KDS226 KDS226
1 3 2 2 2 3 3
C
5V
VCC3
R240 10J D18 D19
R241 10J
R242 10J
R243 10J
TP13
TP14
TP15
TP16
1 1 3 2
KDS226 KDS226
1 1 3 2
C223
C224
C225
C226
1000p
1000p
1000p
1000p
R164 10kJ
R165 10kJ
R166 15kJ
R167 10kJ
R377 10kJ
(12) DVSEL (12) TCS (9) MFD (9) MMLD (9) FANLK 5V
R168 R169 R170 R171 R378
1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ
DVS1 (4) (TCS) (4) (MFD) (4) (MMLD) (4) (FANLK) (4)
D21
D22
D50
C171
C172
C173
C248
1 3 2
KDS226 D20 1SS355
1 3 2
KDS226
1 3 2
KDS226
1000p
1000p
1000p
D51
ZENER_UDZS4.7B(open)
D52
B
R172 100J 2W IC30
24V
INT24V
ZENER_UDZS4.7B(open)
1000p
B
1 IN GND
C175 +
C169
C170
47u/35V
0.1u/50V
R394 100kJ
OUT
3
INT5V

2 KIA7805
0.1u C176 5V 47u/35V D23 D24 D25
VCC3
PGND
D26
1
L15 L5 ZJSR5101-223 (8) 3.3VIN C178 + 0.1u 22u/16V C180 R399 100kJ VCC3 (9) (9) (9) (8) PPD1 PPD2 SPPD PSW N.M.
1 3 2
KDS226
1 3 2
KDS226
1 3 2
KDS226
L14
0J (1608)
3
R173 15kJ R174 15kJ R175 7.5kJ R176 7.5kJ R177 7.5kJ
2
KDS226
R178 12kJ
R179 3.3kJ
L4 ZJSR5101-223(open)
(8) 12VIN
12V
C177
C179
R396
R180 R181 R182 R183
1kJ 1kJ 1kJ 1kJ
47u/25V
0.1u
100kJ
(PPD1) (PPD2) (SPPD) (PSW)
(4) (4) (1) (1)
(9) CED1 (9) CED2 (8) DRST 5V EN5V D27 C182 + 0.1u 22u/16V C184 D28 VCC3
R184 R185 R186
1kJ 1kJ 1kJ
(CED1) (4) (CED2) (4) (DRST) (4)
A
R397 100kJ
5V
C185
C186
C187
C188
D29
C189
C190
A
1 3 2
KDS226
C181
C183
1 3 2
KDS226
1000p
1000p
1000p
1000p
1 3 2
KDS226
1000p
1000p
22u/16V
0.1u
R398 100kJ
MCU PWB (Connector section 1) (AR-203E/5420)
8/12
To Operational PWB
EN5V
5V
To Power unit
CP7 CP8 INT24V
INT5V
0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM
CN1
(5) /BIAS (5) /GRIDL 3.3VIN (7) /POFF (5) 24V HLOUT (5) (7) PSW
/TC (5) /MC (5)
(7) DRST KEYIN2#
EN5V 5V (7) 12VIN (4) FW (5) /PR
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
0.1u/50V
C193
N.M._1608size
C
PGND Q6 KRC106S Q5 KRC106S
C194
B24B-PNDZS-1
0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM
CN2
(4) (OP_DATA) (4) (OP_LATCH) (4) (SELIN2) (4) (OP_CLK) (4) (SELIN1) (4) (STROBE) (4) (SELIN3) C195
C
KEYIN1#
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1000p IMSA-9619S-18A
PGND
3
(1) ONL
3
(1) PSL
R400 N.M._1608size
B
PGND
B
5V

D30 D31
1 3 2
KDS226
1 3 2
KDS226 R187 10kJ R188 10kJ
(4) KEYIN2 (4) KEYIN1
R189 R190
1kJ 1kJ C191 1000p C192
KEYIN2# KEYIN1#
1000p
MCU PWB (Connector section 2) (AR-203E/5420)

CN7 (7) CED1
9/12
INT24V
CN6
D
1 2 3
(5) /MMD (7) MMLD (5) /MMCLK B3B-PH-K-K 24V CN28
1 2 3 4 5
To Main motor To Cassette detect To Mecha. COUNTER

(Black)
C198
C199
B5B-PASK-1
1000p
1000p
PGND N.M._B03B-PH-K-R
(5) /MCNT
3 2 1
(Red)
24V
CN11 (5) /CPFS1
CN10
(5) VFMOUT (7) FANLK (5) /VFMCNT
1 2 3 4
B3B-PH-K-S
To Fan motor
(White)
1 2 3
To Cassette paper solenoid
B4B-PH-K-S
C200
C201
(White)
24V
1000p
1000p

24VDupMT CN13 B3B-PH-K-E (5) /RRS CN12
C
1 2 3
PGND
To Resist roller solenoid To 2nd. cassette

N.M.
(6) (6) (6) (6)
/DMT0 /DMT1 /DMT2 /DMT3
1 2 3 4 5
To Duplex motor
(Blue)
5V R203 200J 1/4W CN16 (7) PPD1

5V 24V
24V B05B-XASK-1
CN15
(7) 24V1(DSWS)
1 2
To Interlock switch
1 2 3
B3B-PH-K-R
C246
0.1u/50V
0.1u/50V
(Red)
To Paper pass detect

(5) /CPFS2 (7) PPD3 (7) PD2 (7) CED2
1000p 1000p 1000p
CN18
PGND
C205
C206
(Red)
Not mounted CPU Serial

5V R204 200J 1/4W CN17 (1) RxD (1) TxD (7) POD CN19 VCC3
(For debug)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13
2 4 6 8 10 12 14
B14B-PHDSS-B
PGND
C202
C203
5V
B
N.M._B4B-PH-K-S
INT5V
1 2 3 4
1 2 3
B3B-PH-K-S
To Paper out detect

(White)
PGND
C204
C247
B2P-VH-R
N.M._1608size
24V 5V
D42
(White)
KDS226 CN42 5V
To SPF unit To Mirror motor

CN4 (6) OUT_A+ (6) OUT_B+ (6) OUT_A(6) OUT_BR205 200J 1/4W CN22 (7) PPD2 (5) RTH_IN
(4) /SYNC
R206
1kJ
R207
200J 1/4W
24V
CN41
(5) /PMD (7) PMRDY (5) PMCLK_A
1 2 3 4 5
To Polygon motor
R208 200J 1/4W CN25 (7) PD1
5V
(6) SPMT_0 (6) SPMT_2 (6) SPMT_1 (6) SPMT_3 (7) SPID 24V CN26 (7) SPPD
B05B-CZHK-B
PGND
200J 1/4W
(Red)
(White)
R140

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B08B-CZHK-B
To LD
1 2 3 4
B4B-PH-K-R
(5) /LDEN (4) /VIDEO (5) SHOLD
1 2 3 4 5
B5B-PH-K-S
To HL unit
5V
5V
24VSPFMT CN24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
A
1 2 3
To Paper detect
B3B-PH-K-M
(5) /MPFS (7) MFD
1 2 3 4 5
To Multi unit
(Green)
B5B-PH-K-R
B12B-PH-K-S
To Toner motor
(Red)
CN23
(6) TMA_O (6) TMB_O
1 2
B2P-VH
(White)
MCU PWB (Scanner I/F section) (AR-203E/5420)
10/12
Copy Lamp Inverter

12V L6 220uH CP9 VCL 0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM TWKA-221K VCC3 CP6 0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM
To Scanner unit
EN5V
24V
Q9 2SJ537
CP10 0603FA1.5A/0603SFF150FM
R209 910J D43 D44 11EQS06 + C208 C209 R210 15kJ R211 12kJ
C207 47u/35V
1 3 2
KDS226 AFE_DB#0 AFE_DB#2 AFE_DB#4 AFE_DB#6
CN3 AFE_DB#1 AFE_DB#3 AFE_DB#5 AFE_DB#7 AFE_SEN# (4) AFE_SDI# (4) BSAMP# (4) VSAMP# (4) VCL VCL
R212
5.6kJ 1/4W
47u/35V R213 1kJ (4) mt_at_home C211 1000p
0.1u/50V
C210
33p
(2) CL
R214 15kJ
R215 56kJ
Q8 KTC3198
(4) AFE_SCK# (4) ADCLK# (4) CCD_PHI1# (4) CCD_PHI2# (4) CCD_CP# (4) CCD_RS# (4) CCD_TG#
32 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
FF4-32-S15D5
PGND
PGND
PGND
(4) AFE_DB#[7..0] AFE_DB#0 AFE_DB#1 AFE_DB#2 AFE_DB#3 AFE_DB#4 AFE_DB#5 AFE_DB#6 AFE_DB#7

4 3 2
MCU PWB (USB2.0 (FULL) I/F section) (AR-203E only)
11/12
D
(4) USB_IN
R216
24J
C
R217 10kJ 100p ZENER_6.2V C212 D45
(4) (D_CONT)
VCC3 R218 1.5kJ IC31
VCC3
(2) OEN
VCC MODE D+ DNC

TP566 0.1u
14 1 TP567 11 10 8 7
C214 TP568 TP569 R220 R222 24J 24J TP570 TP571 R219 N.M.
R420
N.M. L7 BLM18BB121SN1D BLM18BB121SN1D L8 C213 0.1u
(2) VPOUT (2) VMOUT 33J 33J 33J TP563 TP564 TP565
2 9 12 13 OE# SPEED VPO VMO/FSEO RCV VP VM SUSPEND

USB1T20
CN33
(2) RCV (2) VPIN (2) VMIN
R221 R223 R224
3 4 5 6 GND
1 2 3 4
+5V DD+ GND Shield

UBS21-4K2J00(ACON)
(2) SUSPEND
C215
C216 C217
N.M.
N.M.
N.M. D32 HZM6.2Z4MWA(open) L9 0J (1608) L16 0J (1608) F.G

4 3 2
MCU PWB (CRUM I/F section) (AR-203E/5420)
12/12
D
24V N.M. EN5V (5) TCS_AN (7) TCS (7) DVSEL R368 R369 N.M. 0J TP575 TP576 CN5
R376
To DV Unit (Analog Tonner Sensor)

1 2 3 4
B4B-PH-K-R
VCC3
R225 N.M. R226 10kJ
IC32
(Red)
3.3V
5 2
TP573 C218 0.1u D39 D40 (CRUMSDTA) 24V EN5V
Vcc B
5V
(1) CRUMSDTA
R139 1kJ
R231
0J
(1,2,4) /ASIC_RST
TP572
4 1 3 2
KDS226 R201 N.M._300J (CRUMSDTA) (CRUMSCL) R202 N.M._300J KDS226 R200 10J CN9
OE 3 2
GND
3 1
To DV Unit with CRUM (Analog Tonner Sensor)
TC7SBD385AFU(open)
R232 10kJ(open)
C
N.M._B10B-PHDSS-B
1 3 5 7 9
2 4 6 8 10
(White)
EN5V
3.3V
C220
5V
IC34
0.1u
5 1 4
TP574 FB1 (CRUMSCL)
(1) CRUMSCL
2 3
NC7ST08M5X(open) 0J (1608)
F-GND 1
FB2
0J (1608)

F-GND 2
FB3 0J (1608)
F-GND 3
FB4
0J (1608)
F-GND 4
PGND
MCU PWB (CPU section) (AR-M200/M201)

VCC3 C1 15PF R1 IC1 NM TP2 TP3 TP4 100P BR4 NM P60 R11 10KJ C6 C5 TP6 22J /ES_SRDY ES_CMD ES_STS 10KJX4 DMT0 DMT1 DMT2 DMT3 R392 10KJ /RES_NIC 1KJ 33J 33J RSV_IN0 TP7 /CS5# D3 D2 D1 D0 D7 D6 D5 D4 BR6 R12 12P BR7 CCD_TG R67 10KJ 15PF EXTAL /PRINTST /ES_PAGE R5 R9 10KJ 10KJ D11 D10 D9 D8 ARB_INT (FW) CPU_SYNC 100P BR5 CY25811SC R6 NM 0J R7 TP5 R20 330J R8 X1 AT-49 19.6608MHz 10KJX4 10KJX4 C3 C4 R3 0J R4 NM XTAL NM 0.1U /STBY NMI /WDTOVF R2 C2 BR1 BR2 BR3
1/16
VCC3
4
1 2 3 4
10KJX4
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
D15 D14 D13 D12
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
/CS0# /CS1# /CS2# /CS3#
1 2 3 4
10KJX4
7 6 4 3 VDD FRSEL S0 S1 8 7 6 5 XIN/CLKIN XOUT SSCLK VSS
TP1 1 8 5 2
8 7 6 5
4
1 2 3 4
10KJX4
8 7 6 5
R384 CPUCLK# /RESET1 (3) (5)
33J
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
NM_10KJX4 BR9
B. MCU PWB (AR-M200/M201)
(2) /PRINTST (2,3,4,5) /RD (3,4) /HWR (2) /LWR R13 R14 R15 TP729 TP734 TP735 EXTAL XTAL R16 R17 R18 33J 33J 33J 33J 33J 100J
TP724
/PRINTST /RD# /HWR# /LWR#
C70 NM
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
NM_10KJX4
CPUCLK /RD# /HWR# /LWR#
4 3 2 1
BR10
5 6 7 8
10KJX4
(9) (3) (2)
/RES_OA982 /RES_IOASIC /RES_GASIC
/RES_OA982 /RES_IOASIC /RES_GASIC
BR11 POFF R19 10KJ
33P
33P
33P
CPUCLK
/STBY NMI
/WDTOVF
/CS5# P60 CPU3.3 C369 NM C10 NM
(9) (9) (9) (4)
ES_STS ES_CMD /ES_SRDY RY/BY
ES_STS ES_CMD /ES_SRDY RY/BY R78 R364 R22
DMT0 (7) DMT1 (7) DMT2 (7) DMT3 (7) MMCLK (6) RESETOUT1 (5) /RES_NIC (15) BZR (11) CRUMSCL (16) CRUMSDA (16) /CS5 (13) DMT0 DMT1 DMT2 DMT3
1 2 3 4
10KJX4 BR12
8 7 6 5
SDA SCL
R21 R23
2KJ 2KJ
C7
C8
C9
BR13
TP8 TP9
TP19
TP20 TP21
TP22 TP23 TP24 TP25 TP26 TP27 TP28 TP29 TP30 TP31 TP32 TP33 TP34 TP35 TP36
3
102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65
IC2
TP37
SPFMT0 SPFMT1 SPFMT2 SPFMT3
1 2 3 4
10KJX4
8 7 6 5
/SCANSP /TRANSST /SCANST RY/BY
1 2 3 4
10KJX4
8 7 6 5
TP38 TP41 TP43 TP47
/RES_FAX
/RES_FAX (13)
(6) (6)
RTH (TCS_AN)
RxD TxD CRUMSDA
R24 R53 R52
10KJ 10KJ 10KJ
(8) (9)
(PSFANLK) /ES_PAGE
/ES_PAGE
P53/ADTRG P52/SCK2 Vss Vss P51/RxD2 P50/TxD2 PF0/BREQ PF1/BACK PF2/LCAS/ WAIT/BREQO PF3/LWR PF4/HWR PF5/RD PF6/AS VCC PF7/0 Vss EXTAL XTAL VCC STBY NMI RES WDTOVF P20/PO0/TIOCA3 P21/PO1/YICOB3 P22/PO2/TIOCC3 P23/PO3/TIOCD3 P24/PO4/TIOCA4 P25/PO5/TIOCB4 P26/PO6/TIOCA5 P27/PO7/TIOCB5 P63/TEND1 P62/DREQ1 P61/TEND0/CS5 Vss Vss P60/DREQ0/CS4 Vss
(2,5) VIDEO#
SCL RxD SDA TXD POFF
R51
33J
PROTECT
(6) TP56
LCDCONT
SCL RxD SDA TxD POFF D15 D14 D13 D12
(4) (12) (4) (12) (6)
1 2 3 4
8 BR16 7 33JX4 6 5 8 BR17 7 33JX4 6 5
/RES_OA982 /RES_GASIC /RES_IOASIC /RES_USB20 /RES_NIC /RES_FAX
R95 R132 R131 R94 R66 R26
10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ
C11
NM
HD6412321VF25(H8S/2321)
1 2 3 4
/SCANSP /SCANST /TRANSST 33J TP62 TP64 TP66 TP68 TP70 TP72 TP73 TP75 TP77
R25
(2) /SCANSP (2) /SCANST (2) /TRANSST (6) PMCLK (5) SPFMT3 (5) SPFMT2/MIRCNT (5) SPFMT1 (5) SPFMT0 (10) /RES_USB20 TP74 TP76 TP78
SPFMT3 SPFMT2 SPFMT1 SPFMT0 /RES_USB20
1 2 3 4 8 BR18 7 33JX4 6 5 1 2 3 4
D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4
103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 PG3/CS1 PG4/CS0 Vss NC VCC PC0/A0 PC1/A1 PC2/A2 PC3/A3 Vss PC4/A4 PC5/A5 PC6/A6 PC7/A7 PB0/A8 PB1/A9 PB2/A10 PB3/A11 Vss PB4/A12 PB5/A13 PB6/A14 PB7/A15 PA0/A16 PA1/A17 PA2/A18 PA3/A19 Vss PA4/A20/IRQ4 PA5/A21/IRQ5 PA6/A22/IRQ6 PA7/A23/IRQ7 P67/CS7/IRQ3 P66/CS6/IRQ2 Vss Vss P65/IRQ1 P64/IRQ0 AVcc Vref P40/AN0 P41/AN1 P42/AN2 P43/AN3 P44/AN4 P45/AN5 P46/AN6/DA0 P47/AN7/DA1 AVss Vss P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD P16/PO14/TIOCA2 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC P14/PO12/TIOCA1 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0 MD0 MD1 MD2 PG0/CAS PG1/CS3 PG2/CS2 8 BR19 7 33JX4 6 5
D3 D2 D1 D0
BR20
P35/SCK1 P34/SCK0 P33/RxD1 P32/RxD0 P31/TxD1 P30/TxD0 VCC PD7/D15 PD6/D14 PD5/D13 PD4/D12 Vss PD3/D11 PD2/D10 PD1/D9 PD0/D8 PE7/D7 PE6/D6 PE5/D5 PE4/D4 Vss PE3/D3 PE2/D2 PE1/D1 PE0/D0 VCC
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
(3) (2) (4) (4) 33JX4 TP81 TP82 TP83 TP84 TP85 TP86 TP87 TP88 TP89 TP90 TP91 TP92 TP93 TP94 TP95 TP96 TP97 TP98 TP99 TP100 TP101 TP102 TP103 TP105 TP106 TP107 TP108 TP79 TP80 H8S/2321
/CSIOASIC /CSGASIC /CSSRAM /CSFROM
5 6 7 8
4 3 2 1
/CS3# /CS2# /CS1# /CS0#
D[15..0]
(2,3,4,13)
C12 22P
C14 NM
C13 NM
C15 NM
BR21 8 7 33JX4 6 5
BR22 8 7 33JX4 6 5
BR23 8 7 33JX4 6 5
1 2 3 4
BR24 8 7 33JX4 6 5
1 2 3 4
BR25 8 7 33JX4 6 5 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
FB1 0J <1608> A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19
L1 NM_ZJSR5101-223TA
CPU3.3
TP109
A20
R50
VCC3
33J
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25

ARB_INT (FW) CPU_SYNC CCD_TG (SPPD) (PSW) ARB_INT (FW) CPU_SYNC mt_at_home# CCD_TG (SPPD) (PSW) (2) (5,9) (2) (5) (2,5) (8) (8) A[20..0] (2,3,4)
C19 10U/10V<2012>
MCU PWB (ASIC section) (AR-M200/M201)

FB2 NM_0J <1608> R30 R31 R32 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U R33 PIDATA[7..0] C27 C28 C29 C30 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C36 (9) R34 R35 R36 R37 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U R38 R40 R39 33J C38 C39 C40 C41 C42 C43 C44 BR29 33JX4 12P 12P 12P 12P 12P 12P 12P 12P R41 10KJ BR30 C291 C292 C293 C294 C295 C296 C297 C298 /RESET0 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U (4,5,9,12) 0.1U AFE_DB7 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB4 TP848 TP847 TP846 TP845 BR32 C48 C49 JTG_TDO JTG_TDI JTG_TMS JTG_TCK AFE_DB3 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB0 TP844 TP843 TP842 TP841 33J C45 /OUTCS 33J 33J 0.1U 0.1U 33J 33J PIDATA0 PIDATA1 PIDATA2 PIDATA3 33J 33J 0.1U 0.1U 33J G3.3V /PCLPRO /FAXPRO /OUTACK /INREQ 33J L2 ZJSR5101-223TA 33J VCC3 VCC3
2/16
(5)
VSAMP
TP837
(1,5)
CCD_TG
TP879
(5)
CCD_RS
TP878
(5)
BSAMP
TP835
BR26 4 3 2 1
10KJX4 5 6 7 8
(5)
CCD_CP
TP874
4
JTG_TCK JTG_TMS JTG_TDI JTG_TDO
(5)
AFE_SDI
AFE_SDI
TP834
(5)
CCD_PHI2
TP875
(5)
CCD_PHI1
TP873
BR27 4 3 2 1
10KJX4 5 6 7 8
BR28 33JX4 1 8 2 7 3 6 4 5
(5)
AFE_SEN
TP836
C46 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U
(5)
AFE_SCK
TP877
(14) AFE_DB[7..0]
0.1U
C58 C59 C60 C61 C62 C63 C64 C65 C66 C67 C68 C50
1 2 3 4
C51
8 33JX4 7 6 5 8 33JX4 7 6 5
/H_SYNC (9) G3.3V /INREQ /OUTCS /OUTACK /ESPRD /FAXPRO /PCLPRO
0.1U
VCC3
C47
(5)
ADCLK
TP876
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
PIDATA4 PIDATA5 PIDATA6 PIDATA7
C52
C53
C54
C55
C56
(14) TP110 TP111 TP112 TP113 TP114 TP115 TP116 TP117 TP118 TP119 TP120 TP121 TP122 TP123 TP124 TP125 TP126 TP127 TP128 TP129 TP742 TP741 TP740 TP739 TP738 TP737 TP736 TP325 TP270 TP630 TP628 TP627 TP507 TP500 TP498 TP495 TP493 TP490 TP486 TP471 TP468 TP462 TP403 TP402 TP382 TP364 TP351 TP140 TP130 TP131 TP132 TP133 TP134 TP135 TP136 TP137 TP138 TP139
CL
0.1U
1 2 3 4
C57
47P 47P 47P 47P 47P NM 47P 47P NM 47P NM
C37 10U/10V<2012>
C399 10U/10V<2012>
1 2 3 4 BR31 1 2 3 4 BR33 R42 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 149
IC4
AFE_DB7 8 AFE_DB6 7 AFE_DB5 6 AFE_DB4 5 10KJX4 AFE_DB3 8 AFE_DB2 7 AFE_DB1 6 AFE_DB0 5 10KJX4 10KJ AFE_SDI
CLPWM VCC(AC) AFE_DB0 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB7 GND(AC) AFESCK VCC(CORE) ADCLK GND(CORE) AFE_SEN CCD_PH1 CCD_PH2 AFE_SDI CCD_CP BSAMP CCD_RS CCD_TG VSAMP GND(CORE) TD0 TDI TRSK TMS TCK VCC(CORE) /INREQ /OUTCS /OUTACK /ESPRD /FAXPRD /PCLPRD GND(AC) MDAT15 MDAT14 MDAT13 VCC(CORE) MDAT12 MDAT11 MDAT10 VCC(AC) MDAT09 MDAT08 MDAT07 GND(CORE) MDAT06 MDAT05 MDAT04 VCC(CORE) MDAT03 MDAT02 MDAT01 MDAT00 GND(AC) /INCS /INACK /OUTREQ GND(CORE) /HSYNC PIDATA0 PIDATA1 PIDATA2 VCC(AC) PIDATA3 PIDATA4 PIDATA5 PIDATA6 PIDATA7 /POCS
VCC3
3
TP148 TP150
BR34 1 2 3 4 TP141 TP144 TP146 R44 33J TP142 TP143 TP145
10KJX4 8 7 6 5
MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_BI2 MM_AI0
/POREQ
(9)
C69
C400 10U/10V<2012>
C401 10U/10V<2012>
(6) (6) (6)
MM_Y3 MM_Y2 MM_Y1
3
/PIWR /PIACK /POACK /PIREQ (9) (9) (9) (9) PODATA[7..0] (9)
R45 R46
10KJ 10KJ
MM_AI1 MM_AI2
(7) (7) (7)
MM_PH_B MM_BI0 MM_BI1
MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_BI2
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 BR35 33JX4
VCC3
(4) TP163 TP165
MAD[12..0]
(7) (7) (7)
MM_PH_A MM_AI0 MM_AI1
MM_AI0 MM_AI1 MM_AI2
TP147 TP149 TP151 TP152 TP154 TP156 TP158 TP160 TP153 TP155 TP157 TP159 TP161 TP162 TP164 TP166
R47 10KJ
MAD3 MAD2 MAD1 MAD0 TP167 TP169 TP171
TP817 TP818 TP819 TP820
8 7 6 5
PODATA0 PODATA1 PODATA2 PODATA3 PODATA4 PODATA5 PODATA6 PODATA7
R48 R49
10J 10J
/PR_LINE /SC_LINE /TRANSST /PRINTST /SCANST RCV VPIN VMIN
(9) (9) (1) (1) (1)
33JX4
MAD10
TP821
(4) (4) (4) TP174 TP176 TP178 TP180 TP181 TP184 TP186 TP188 TP190 TP192 TP193
BANK1 BANK0 /SDCS
8 7 6 5
33JX4
TP168 TP170 TP172 TP173 TP175 TP177 TP179 TP182 TP183 TP185 TP187 TP189 TP191
(4)
RAMDB[15..0]
(4) (4) (4) (4)
/SDRAS /SDCAS /SDWDE DQM0
1 2 3 4 BR36 1 2 3 4 BR37 1 2 3 4 BR38
8 7 6 5
VCC3
33JX4
VCC3
PARAD[7..0]
(15)
TP891 TP885
TP854 TP855 TP856 TP857
BR41 1 2 3 4
10KJX4 8 RAMDB7 7 RAMDB6 6 RAMDB5 5 RAMDB4
8 7 6 5
MEM_INT CLKSW /POREQ /PIREQ
R356 R357 R358 R359
10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ
33JX4 TP196 TP198 TP200 TP202 HG73C141HFV(LF) TP205 TP206
ASIC
TP858 TP859 TP860 TP861
BR45 1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5
33JX4
TP194 TP195 TP197 TP199 TP201 TP203 TP204
/REV
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
BR52 1 2 3 4
10KJX4 8 7 6 5
TP862 TP863 TP864 TP865
8 7 6 5
33JX4
TP207 TP208 TP210 TP212 TP215 TP217 TP219
/FAULT /ACK BUSY PE SLCT /INIT /SLCTIN /AUTOFD /STB TP221 TP223 TP224 TP226 TP227 TP230
R54 1 2 3 4 R55
BR49 1 2 3 4 TP220 TP222 TP225
TP866 TP867 TP868 TP869
8 7 6 5
TP209 TP211 TP213 TP214 TP216 TP218
PARAD0 8 PARAD1 7 PARAD2 6 PARAD3 5 BR40 33JX4 PARAD4 8 PARAD5 7 PARAD6 6 PARAD7 5 BR43 33JX4 33J /REV_O 8 /FAULT_O 7 /ACK_O 6 BUSY_O 5 PE_O BR47 33JX4 33J SLCT_O
(15) (15) (15) (15) (15) (15)
BR55 1 2 3 4
10KJX4 8 7 6 5 VCC3
2
1 2 3 4
33JX4
BR53 1 2 3 4
(4) (4)
DQM1 SDCKE
8 7 6 5
8 7 6 5 BR46 33JX4
/SCANSP OP_CLK (1) (5) R56 10KJ VCC3
/INIT_I /SLCTIN_I /AUTOFD_I /STB_I
(15) (15) (15) (15) VCC3 VCC3
82JX4 TP228 TP229 TP231 TP233 TP235
RCV VPIN VMIN
MAD12 MAD11 MAD9 MAD8
TP822 TP823 TP824 TP825
CPU_DATA7 CPU_DATA6 CPU_DATA5 CPU_DATA4 VCC(AC) CPU_DATA3 CPU_DATA2 CPU_DATA1 CPU_DATA0 GND(AC) MIRCNT /CPUSYNC MEM_INT ARB_INT VCC(CORE) CPU_AD8 CPU_AD7 CPU_AD6 CPU_AD5 GND(CORE) RAM_CLK_IN CPU_AD4 CPU_AD3 CPU_AD2 CPU_AD1 CPU_AD0 /CPUCS SFCLK48 GND(CORE) /CPUWR /CPURD /RESET VCC(CORE) PFCLK CLKSW GND(CORE) PFCLKOUT PFCLKIN GND(PLL) VCC(PLL) GND(PLL) VCC(PLL) TM2_15M /SYNC GND(AC) /VIDEO /LEND VCC(AC) OUTP00A OUTP01A OUTP02A OUTP03A OUTP04A OUTP05A OUTP06A OUTP15A VCC(CORE) OUTP07A OUTP08A GND(CORE) OUTP09A OUTP10A OUTP11A OUTP12A OUTP13A VCC(CORE) OUTP14A OUTP00B GND(AC) OUTP01B OUTP02B OUTP03B OUTP04B VCC(AC)
TP719
R70
0J
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74
TP720 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
R68
0J
VCC3 VCC3 R314 0J
C75 22000P
MEM_INT
A9 A8 A7 A6
RAM_CLK_OUT A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
SFCLK48
PFCLK CLKSW
PFCLKOUT PFCLKIN
SYNC#
10P
12P
D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8

TP232 TP234 TP236 TP237 OP_LATCH OP_DATA TM TM_ (5) (5) (5) (5) TP238 TP239 TP241 TP240 TP242 TP243 TP244 TP245 TP246 TP247 TP248 TP249 TP250
C351
8 7 6 5
BR57 1 2 3 4
10KJX4 8 7 6 5
33JX4
R57 NM
R58 NM
NM
MAD7 MAD6 MAD5 MAD4
TP826 TP827 TP828 TP829
(4)
SDCLK
1 2 3 4 BR39 1 2 3 4 BR42 1 2 3 4 BR44 1 2 3 4 BR48 1 2 3 4 BR51 1 2 3 4 BR54 1 2 3 4 BR56 RAM_CLK_OUT
8 7 6 5
PARAD0 PARAD1 PARAD2 PARAD3 PFCLK TP743 PARAD4 PARAD5 PARAD6 PARAD7 R60 NM HL PR CPFS2 (6) (6) (6) R61 10KJ R62 10KJ /INIT /SLCTIN /AUTOFD /STB
BR58 1 2 3 4
10KJX4 8 7 6 5
33JX4
R59 33J
C74 NM
223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 GND(CORE) MM_Y3 MM_Y2 MM_Y1 VCC(CORE) MM_PH_B MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_BI2 MM_PH_A MM_AI0 MM_AI1 MM_AI2 GND(AC) RAM_MAD3 RAM_MAD2 GND(CORE) RAM_MAD1 RAM_MAD0 RAM_MAD10 VCC(CORE) RAM_BANKS1 RAM_BANKS0 RAM_CS RAM_RAS RAM_CAS VCC(AC) RAM_WDE RAM_DQM0 GND(AC) RAM_DATA7 RAM_DATA6 RAM_DATA5 RAM_DATA4 GND(CORE) RAM_DATA3 RAM_DATA2 RAM_DATA1 RAM_DATA0 GND(AC) RAM_DATA15 RAM_DATA14 VCC(CORE) RAM_DATA13 RAM_DATA12 RAM_DATA11 RAM_DATA10 RAM_DATA9 RAM_DATA8 VCC(CORE) RAM_DQM1 RAM_CKE GND(AC) RAM_CLK_OUT GND(CORE) RAM_MAD12 RAM_MAD11 RAM_MAD9 VCC(CORE) RAM_MAD8 RAM_MAD7 VCC(AC) RAM_MAD6 RAM_MAD5 RAM_MAD4 GND(AC) CPUDATA15 CPUDATA14 CPUDATA13 CPUDATA12 CPUDATA11 CPUDATA10 CPUDATA9 CPUDATA8
/IMC_READY KEYSC3 KEYSC2 KEYSC1 SPFON MIRON MPFS (9) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (6)
/POREQ VCC(AC) /PIWT /PIACK GND(AC) /POACK /PIREQ GND(CORE) PODATA0 PODATA1 PODATA2 PODATA3 PODATA4 PODATA5 PODATA6 PODATA7 VCC(CORE) /TRANSST /RECEPTST /PRINTST /SCANST RCV VPIN VMIN GND(CORE) VPOUT VMOUT OEN GND(AC) SUSPEND IE1284_PARAD0 IE1284_PARAD1 VCC(AC) IE1284_PARAD2 IE1284_PARAD3 IE1284_PARAD4 IE1284_PARAD5 IE1284_PARAD6 IE1284_PARAD7 IE1284_REV VCC(CORE) IE1284_FAULT IE1284_ACK IE1284_BUSY IE1284_PE GND(CORE) IE1284_SLCT IE1284_INIT IE1284_SLCTIN VCC(CORE) IE1284_AUTOFD IE1284_STB TSP_MODE TSO0 /SCANSP VCC(AC) OPE_CLK GND(AC) OPE_LATCH OPE_DATA TM /TM VCC(CORE) OUTP14B OUTP13B OUTP12B OUTP11B OUTP10B OUTP09B OUTP08B GND(CORE) OUTP07B OUTP06B OUTP05B
148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75
BR59 1 2 3 4 BR60 1 2 3 4
10KJX4 8 7 6 5 10KJX4 8 7 6 5
VCC3 FB3 0J <1608> C76 0.1U TP251 8 TP252 X2 SFCLK48A R63 NM_33J SFCLK48 TP892
PFCLKOUT
X5 AT-49(18.3856MHz)
VCC
OUTPUT
C77 NM_12P
1
1 N.C. GND 4
NM_SG8002DC(48MHz) IC9 TP727 TP872 R75 NM TP882 TP254 TP257 S0 S1 SFCLK48A SFCLK48B R92 NM S1 TP256 TP253 TP258 C402 12P R65 33J SFCLK48B
PFCLKIN
C107
C108
R69 TP746 (/SYNC) 10J C80 47P (1,3,4) TP747 (5)
(5) (1) (1)
MIRCNT CPU_SYNC ARB_INT
CPFS1 (6) MRPS3 (6) MRPS2 (6) MRPS1 (6) LDEN (6) RRS (6) PTPULSE (6) GASIC_READY (12) (1) /CSGASIC (1) /LWR (1,3,4,5) /RD (1,5) (6) (6) (6) (6) (6) TP881 (3,5) (/ASIC_RST) C97 VIDEO# /LEND MMD PMD TC GRIDL TP255 TP259 TP260 TP261 RSV_OUT0 RSV_OUT1 RSV_OUT2 FWREN (5) R133 33J
SYNC#
7 6 4 3
R73 NM R79 0J C411 0.1U
VDD FRSEL S0 S1
XIN/CLKIN XOUT SSCLK VSS

CY25814SC
1 8 5 2
C375 X7 AT-49(12MHz)
12P
(1,3,4,13) D[15..0]
A[20..0]
(1)
/RES_GASIC
1000P R134 NM
(6) MC (6) BIAS (6) VFMCNT_12V (6) VFM_24V (9) /FPOFF
MCU PWB (I/O ASIC section) (AR-M200/M201)
3/16
4
IO ASIC
3
(11) (11) (11) RSV_OUT17 RSV_OUT16 IOIC3.3V 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U (RSV_SOL) PSFM (7) (6) INFOLED PSL SPUS SRVC (11) (11) (7) (7) SELIN1 SELIN2 SELIN3
RSV_OUT15 RSV_OUT14 RSV_OUT13 RSV_OUT12 RSV_OUT11 RSV_OUT10 RSV_OUT9 RSV_OUT8 FB13 0J <1608> L15 NM_ZJSR5101-223TA VCC3
(11) TP271 TP272 TP273 TP274 TP636 TP275 TP276 TP277 TP278 TP279 TP306 TP280 TP281 IOIC3.3V
KEYIN
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
C568
C662
C575
C660
C574
C569
C663
(1) (1) (1,2,4,5) (1,4) /RD /HWR /CSIOASIC TP285 TP287
CPUCLK#
(1,2,4) A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 TP294 TP296 D15 D14 TP635
A[20..0]
GND YIN(PD50K)(5VFS) SELC(OD,5VFS) SELB(OD,5VFS) SELA(OD,5VFS) gnd XCE_EXT PORTG0(PD50K) PORTG1(PD50K) PORTG2(PD50K) PORTG3(PD50K) PORTG4(PD50K) PORTG5(PD50K) PORTG6(PD50K) PORTG7(PD50K) vdd PORTF0(PD50K) PORTF1(PD50K) PORTF2(PD50K) PORTF3(PD50K) PORTF4(PD50K) PORTF5(PD50K) PORTF6(PD50K) PORTF7(PD50K) GND
TP282
100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76
IC52
LCDDB4 LCDDB5 LCDDB6 LCDDB7 LCDE LCDRS /ES_CRDY MCNT
(5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (9) (6)
2
SC65892(IO ASIC) <LQFP100>
(2,5) (/ASIC_RST)
TP811
C700
C304 10U/10V<2012>
C98
(1) /RES_IOASIC
(1,2,4,13) D[15..0]
SFTMT0 SFTMT1 SFTMT2 SFTMT3
(7) (7) (7) (7)
R135 33J R136 NM
1000P
D13 D12 D11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 VDD PHICLK gnd XCE0(PU50K) CE1(PU50K) XOE(PU50K) XWR(PU50K) A4(PU50K) A3(PU50K) A2(PU50K) A1(PU50K) A0(PU50K) XRST(Sch) vdd D7(PU50K) D6(PU50K) SMC(SCAN)(PD50K) SIN(SCAN)(PD50K) SOUT(SCAN) AMC(SCAN)(PD50K) SCK(SCAN) D5(PU50K) D4(PU50K) D3(PU50K) VDD VDD PORTE0(PD50K) PORTE1(PD50K) PORTE2(PD50K) PORTE3(PD50K) PORTE4(PD50K) PORTE5(PD50K) PORTE6(PD50K) PORTE7(PD50K) gnd PORTD0(PD50K) PORTD1(PD50K) PORTD2(PD50K) PORTD3(PD50K) PORTD4(PD50K) PORTD5(PD50K) PORTD6(PD50K) PORTD7(PD50K) gnd PORTC0(PD50K) PORTC1(PD50K) PORTC2(PD50K) PORTC3(PD50K) PORTC4(PD50K) VDD
75 74 TP283 73 TP284 72 TP286 71 TP288 70 TP289 69 TP290 68 TP291 67 TP292 66 65 TP293 64 TP295 63 62 TP297 61 TP298 60 TP299 59 TP300 58 TP301 57 56 TP832 55 TP302 54 TP303 53 TP304 52 TP305 51
(PMRDY) (MMLD) (FANLK) THOPEN
(8) (8) (8) (6)
RSV_IN2
2
R706 NM_10KJ
GND D2(PU50K) D1(PU50K) D0(PU50K) PORTA7(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA6(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA5(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA4(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA3(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA2(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA1(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTA0(PD50K)(5VFS) vdd PORTB7(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB6(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB5(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB4(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB3(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB2(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB1(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTB0(PD50K)(5VFS) PORTC7(PD50K) PORTC6(PD50K) PORTC5(PD50K) GND
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
D10 D9 D8
TP314 TP315 TP316 TP317 TP318 TP319 TP320 TP321 TP322 TP323 TP324
NM_10KJ
R122
R263
(PPD1) (PPD2) (PPD3) (POD) (SPID) (CED1) (CED2) (DRST)
(8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8)
NM_10KJ

VCC3 R707 4.7KJ RSV_IN1 BL MSU_ST1 (11) (13) /ES_CRDY DSWS (TCS) DVS1 (PD1) (PD2) (SCOD) (SRJD) (MFD) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) (8) LCDE LCDRS
VCC3
R10 4.7KJ
MSU_ST1
MCU PWB (Memory section) (AR-M200/M201)
4/16
FlashROM VPP Controll
4
VCC3
Serial EE-PROM
VCC3 J1,J2 R74 10KJ (9) TP889 R77 NM NM VPP
VCC3
VCC3
C82 0.1U
IC5
1 2 3
(1) SCL (1) SDA
R76
100J
8 7 6 5
VCC WC SCL SDA
E0 E1 E2 VSS
1 2 3 4
CAT24WC08LI
R80
RAMDB[15..0]
(2)
3
VCC3 VCC3 IC6 NM NM 10KJ VCC3
(1,2,3)
A[20..0]
VCC3 RAMDB0 RAMDB1 RAMDB2 R84 10KJ TP327 TP329 A17 RAMDB5 RAMDB6 RAMDB7 RAMDB3 RAMDB4
RAMDB15 RAMDB14 RAMDB13 RAMDB12 RAMDB11 RAMDB10 RAMDB9 RAMDB8
R81
R82
R83
IC7
IC8
I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7

TP888 R86 TP349 (1) RY/BY NM (1,3) /HWR (2,5,9,12) /RESET0 (9) VPP TP344 TP346 TP347 TP332 TP334 TP336 TP338 TP340 TP342 TP343 TP345 D15 D7 D14 D6 D13 D5 D12 D4
6 7 10 11 22 23 26 27
D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A20 TP326 TP328 TP330 TP331 TP333 TP335 TP337 TP339 TP341
DQM0 /SDWDE /SDCAS /SDRAS /SDCS BANK0 BANK1
TP850 TP849 TP813 TP840 TP838 TP853 TP839 (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) MAD10 MAD0 MAD1 MAD2 MAD3 D11 D3 D10 D2 D9 D1 D8 D0
TP851 TP816 TP812 TP852
DQM1 SDCLK SDCKE
(2) (2) (2) R85
0J
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 TP348 TP350 TP352 TP354 TP356 TP358 TP360 TP362 /RD TP367 TP369 A1
1 2 3 4 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 29 30 31 32
VCC3 VCC3
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16

(1,2,3,5) /CSFROM (1)
VDD VDD
8 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
VCC DQ0 VCCQ DQ1 DQ2 VSSQ DQ3 DQ4 VCCQ DQ5 DQ6 VSSQ DQ7 VCC LDQM WE CAS RAS CS BA0 BA1 A10 A0 A1 A2 A3 VCC
VSS DQ15 VSSQ DQ14 DQ13 VCCQ DQ12 DQ11 VSSQ DQ10 DQ9 VCCQ DQ8 VSS NC UDQM CLK CLKE NC A11 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 VSS
SDRAM (16bit x 4bank)
54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
MAD12 MAD11 MAD9 MAD8 MAD7 MAD6 MAD5 MAD4
C84
C85
C83 NM
TP726
2
NM NM A17 A1 S29AL016D70TFI020 22000P
(1) /CSSRAM (1,2,3,5) /RD (1,3) /HWR
5 28 12
CS1 OE WE
0.1U
0.1U
NM
NM
GND GND
9 25
A19 A18 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 TP353 TP355 TP357 TP359 TP361 TP363 TP365 TP366 TP368
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A19 NC WE RP VPP WP RY/BY A18 A17 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A16 BYTE GND DQ15 DQ7 DQ14 DQ6 DQ13 DQ5 DQ12 DQ4 VCC DQ11 DQ3 DQ10 DQ2 DQ9 DQ1 DQ8 DQ0 OE GND CE A0
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25
2
NM NM
IS63LV1024L-12J-TR
C352
C353
R88
C86
C87
C354
(1,2,3,13) D[15..0]
C355

VCC3 C88 0.1U C89 0.1U C90 0.1U C91 0.1U C92 0.1U C93 0.1U
C94 0.1U
C95 0.1U
MAD[12..0] (2)
MCU PWB (Driver section 1) (AR-M200/M201)

3.3V
VCC3 IC13 (2) (2) (2) R89 NM IC11 TP814 1KJ 33J /RESET1 (11) /SYNC TP376 (1) /RESET# (9,10) /RESET# R121 R101 (/ASIC_RST) 100J TP833 100J TP378 (16) /ASIC_RST R119 R120 (2,3) /OP_RST OP_CLK OP_DATA OP_LATCH R96 R97 R98 (OP_CLK) (OP_DATA) (OP_LATCH) /FAX_RST /NIC_RST (11) (11) (11) (13) (15) 33J 33J 33J
5/16
3.3V 5V
5V VCC3
3.3V
Reset Circuit
Vcc 1 A1 A2 GND
NC7WZ17
VCC3
VCC3
(2,4,9,12) /RESET0
4
Y1 Y2 2 4 6
TP377 NM C105 0.1U C310 C311 NM 47P C104 0.01U (14) mt_at_home C99 C96 0.1U TP381
VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4

5
R91 33J (/SYNC) mt_at_home# (2) (1)
20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 3
R27 100KJ 74LCX244
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND
IC3 (2,4,9,12)
VDD VOUT
TP383
/RESET0
C290
C16
GND
CT
TP786
1U<2012> 0.1U
BU4212F
C17
C18 NM
0.01U IC16 (2) VCC3 BR61 MIRCNT
3.3V
VCC3
3.3V
ASIC Reset
3.3V
5 6 7 8
(SPFMT0) (SPFMT1) (SPFMT2) (SPFMT3) R93 10KJ (7) (7) (7) (7) 33JX4 C110 0.1U (11) FW
3.3V
VCC3 IC14
R28
33J
(1)
RESETOUT1
TP386
/ASIC_RST
(16)
VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4

TP384 TP385 TP387 TP388 TP389 TP390 TP391
20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 4 3 2 1
(1) SPFMT0 (1) SPFMT1 (1) SPFMT2/MIRCNT (1) SPFMT3 (2) MIRON (2) SPFON 74LCX244
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND 1 3

C376
Vcc A1 A2 Y1 Y2 GND
NC7WZ17
5 6 4 2
TP393 TP394 C103 0.1U R100 33J (FW) (1,9)
R29 10KJ
C26 47P
3
(1,2) VIDEO# TP718 /VIDEO (11) R109 100J TP396 TP397 TP398 (KEYSC1) (KEYSC2) (KEYSC3) (TM) (TM_) 0.1U (11) (11) (11) (7) (7)
OP Reset
IC20
3.3V
5V
NM
5V
R64
33J
(2,3) (/ASIC_RST)
TP395
/OP_RST
(9,10)
C79 47P
R345 1KJ
(2) (2) (2) (2) (2) 33P
KEYSC1 KEYSC2 KEYSC3 TM TM_
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND

74VHCT244
VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4
20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3
C117
C114
R71 10KJ
R72 10KJ
5V VCC3 R223 NM_0J IC26 R224 0J
3.3V
20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3
TP900 TP899 TP898 TP897 TP896 TP895 TP894 TP893 LCDDB4# LCDDB5# LCDDB6# LCDDB7# LCDE# LCDRS# (11) (11) (11) (11) (11) (11) 0.1U
(3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
LCDDB4 LCDDB5 LCDDB6 LCDDB7 LCDE LCDRS
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND

74LCX244 C115
VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4
VCC3 R110 IC23 (2) (2) (2) AFE_SDI AFE_SEN AFE_SCK R361 R370 R371 33J 33J 33J AFE_SDI# AFE_SEN# AFE_SCK# (PB_NOE) (PB_NAE0) (PB_NWE) (/RD) R373 R374 R375 R376 33J 33J 33J 33J AFE_SDI# AFE_SEN# AFE_SCK# (14) (14) (14) NM_100J AFE_SDI# AFE_SEN# AFE_SCK# C129 NM C130 NM C131 NM
VCC3
R226 NM_10KJ
C255 0.1U IC19 VSAMP# CCD_TG# CCD_RS# BSAMP# CCD_CP# CCD_PHI2# CCD_PHI1# TC74VHC244FT C127 0.1U ADCLK#
1
(2) (1,2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) VSAMP CCD_TG CCD_RS BSAMP CCD_CP CCD_PHI1 CCD_PHI2 ADCLK

(PB_NOE) (PB_NAE0) (PB_NWE) VCC3 R237 10KJ (2) FWREN (/RD) (9,10) PB_NOE (9,10) PB_NAE0 (9,10) PB_NWE (1,2,3,4) /RD
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND

74LCX244 C128 0.1U
VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4

20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3
(PB_NOE) (PB_NAE0) (PB_NWE) (/RD)
(13) (13) (13) (13)
C306 NM C307 NM C308 NM C309 NM
IC46
1 4 2
NM_TC7SH32FU
1
2 4 6 8 11 13 15 17 1 19 10 1A1 1A2 1A3 1A4 2A1 2A2 2A3 2A4 1G 2G GND VCC 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 20 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3
TP412 TP413 TP414 TP415 TP416 TP417 TP418 TP419 R332 R333 R336 R338 R344 R354 R355 R360 VSAMP# 33J CCD_TG# 33J CCD_RS# 33J 33J BSAMP# CCD_CP# 33J CCD_PHI1# 33J CCD_PHI2# 33J ADCLK# 33J VSAMP# CCD_TG# CCD_RS# BSAMP# CCD_CP# CCD_PHI1# CCD_PHI2# ADCLK# (14) (14) (14) (14) (14) (14) (14) (14) C116 NM C120 NM C121 NM C122 NM C123 NM C124 NM C125 NM C126 NM

24V 12V 24V PR# R363 R300 470KJ R301 4.7KJ R303 10KJ 12V VCC3 VCC3
6/16
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
R268
R269
R270
R271
IC25
TP792 TP785 TP790 TP789 Q18 KRC102S IC17A KIA393F 47KJ C312 TP432 TP431 1U<2012> R297 47KJ D36 1SS355 C367 2.2U<2012> R302 10KJ 12V C379 0.1U R298 1.5KF R299 100J (D) TP429 (2) PTPULSE /MC /BIAS /TC /GRIDL /MCNT (11) (11) (11) (11) (12)
IC17B
BR63 1 2 3 4
1.5KJX4 8 7 6 5
3 TP424
+
TP425
3
TP433
4
4
R362 PSFMOUT (12) 4.7KJ1/4W<3216> (S)
(2) (2) (2) (2) (3) (3) TP430
1
(G)
TP427
Q19 2SK3018
KIA393F
5 6
MC BIAS TC GRIDL MCNT PSFM
R395 1.5KJ R396 1.5KJ
TP420 TP421 TP422 TP423 TP426 TP428 TP435
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C COM
Q7 KTA1505S
2
-
+ -
10KJ
10KJ
KID65001AF D51 1SS355
R265
R266
PGND VCC3 12V 24V 5V D52 MTZ J22B 24V R413 NM_10KJ R108 TP438 D1 NM_47KJ R112 TP444 /VFMCNT NM_4.7KJ1/4W<3216> VFMOUT D4 1SS355 VCC3 D2 0603SFF150FM/32-2 Q12 2SB1132 D55 (12) CRH01 47KJ TP454 0603SFF150FM/32-2 R387 CP17 12V C112 22000P RTH_IN PGND (12) (12) Q2 NM_KTA1505S R106 10KF MA700 R107 4.3KF TP436 IC21 R102 1KF R103 1MF R104 7.5KF
PGND
VCC3
VCC3
R105 1KJ
IC22A KIA393F
R419 NM_10KJ
R418 NM_10KJ
TP781
3 2
+ -
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B E
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
TP434
FTH
(2) (2) (2) (2) NM_1.5KJ NM_1.5KJ TP447 TP437 TP439 TP440 TP441 TP442 TP445 TP446 TP443 /CPFS1 /CPFS2 /MPFS /RRS (12) (12) (12) (12)
CPFS1 CPFS2 MPFS RRS
TP784
BR62 1 2 3 4
1.5KJX4 8 7 6 5
(2) VFM_24V (2) VFMCNT_12V
TP723 TP722
R379 R380
12V C111 0.1U/50V<1608>
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B E
KID65001AF 24V R388 TP448 47KJ CP16
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
PGND
VCC3 D3 12V
1 3 2
NM_KDS226
1 3 2
KDS226
3
R386
Q16
3
D57 TP451 RLS-73
TP449
TP450
3
8
IC53A
B C
4.7KJ1/4W<3216>
3 2
+ -
TP452
R113 300J
R114 100J
TP453
RTH
(1)
KRC102S R389
KIA358F-EL/P 12V C118
C113 0.1U 0.1U/50V<1608>
Q17
3 C
D58 TP457 RLS-73 PGND INT5V CRH01 4.7KJ1/4W<3216> D56
TP455
TP456
E B
Q13 2SB1132
VCC3
12V
VCC3
VCC3
KRC102S
R118 1.2KF
R124 4.7KJ
8
TP458
IC22B KIA393F
5 6
+ -
R414 NM_10KJ D5 1SS355 TP459 R90 10KJ IC24 R296 10KJ Q3 KRA119S R123 10KF
THOPEN
(3)
Q14
/MMCLK
(12)
C119 22000P
(1) MMCLK
2 1
2
TP800 TP795 TP793 TP794 TP802 TP803 TP804
R142 NM_10KJ
KRC102S
2
2 3
TP460
(2) (2) (2) (2) (1) (2) TP461 TP801 KID65503F
/MMD MRPS_1 MRPS_2 MRPS_3 /POFF
(12) (7) (7) (7) (11)
LCD Contrast Buffer

D66 VCC3
VCC3 EN5V D67
5V
MMD MRPS1 MRPS2 MRPS3 POFF HL FTH
VCC3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B G 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C NC
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1 3 2
R115 100J1/4W<3216> NM_KDS226 R316 NM KDS226
1 3 2
IC27
MM_Y1 MM_Y2 MM_Y3 PMD PMCLK LDEN /LEND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3
SHOLD (11)
1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B G
1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C NC
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
(1) HLOUT (11)
LCDCONT 12KF
TP469
TP797 TP799
TP464
MMref0 MMref1 MMref2 /PMD PMCLK_A /LDEN
(7) (7) (7) (11) (11) (11)
R264
KRC102S
R368 NM
R116 10KJ
KIA358F-EL/P R307 7.5KF EN5V
R308 NM C407 NM C305 0.1U
KRC102S
D61 1SS355
R378 0J
100J
100J

Analog Tonner Sensor Buffer
D59 5V EN5V R129 NM IC45B 5V
TP805 TP806 TP807
R117 10KJ
TP798
Q4
TP553 IC45A R393 0J R394 NM
(LCDCONT)
(11)
3 2
+ -
Q15
KID65503F
TP472
TP473
NM_2SB1197K TP476 C398 R383 NM 0.1U
INT24V VCC3 12V D60
D45 1SS355
TP466
1 3 2
NM_KDS226
1 3 2
NM_KDS226
Q20 KRA119S
1
5
+ R366 0J IC53B R381 NM
Q21
R339
R304
3 TP467 3
/PR (11) /PR
PR
PR#
7 6
-
TP470 KIA358F-EL/P
TP474
TP475
(16)
TCS_AN
TP463
5 6
+ -
TP465 KIA358F-EL/P R382 10KJ C371 NM
(TCS_AN)
(1)
PGND
7/16
Scanner Motor Driver
4
24VSCMT 5V R143 IC31 0.68J 1W IC32 (1) TP480 (1) TP482 TP484 TP485 (1) DMT3 DMT2 DMT1 TP478 R145 1.5KJ TP477 TP479 (1) DMT0
(12) (12) (12) (12)
OUT_AOUT_A+ OUT_B+ OUT_B-
4
Duplex Motor Driver
O1 O2 O3 O4 9 16 7 2
/DMT0 /DMT1 /DMT2 /DMT3 (12) (12) (12) (12) 24VDupMT
R144
0.68J 1W
R146 1.5KJ TP481 MM_AI0 PGND MM_AI1 MM_PH_A TP487 PGND R149 30KJ C136 820P (2) (2) (2) C133 820P
TP483
PGND
C134 820P
3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 I1 NC NC I2 NC I3 NC NC I4 NC GND GND COM COM

TD62064AF
5V
(2) (2) (2)
MM_BI0 MM_BI1 MM_PH_B
17 18
1 8
D8
TP488 L6219DS
R147 1KJ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 OUT 1A OUT 2A SENSE 2 COMP 2 OUT 2B GND GND I02 I12 PHASE 2 VREF 2 RC 2 VS SENSE 1 COMP 1 OUT 1B I01 GND GND I11 PHASE 1 VREF 1 RC 1 VSS
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
MTZ J22B
C135 820P TP489 5V PGND PGND C138 0.1U
R148 30KJ
R150 2KJ
R151 1KJ
R152 510J
C137 0.1U
PGND
PGND
(6) (6) (6)
MMref0 MMref1 MMref2
PGND PGND
3
(3) (3) 24VSPFMT IC34 24V (3) (3) SFTMT0 SFTMT1 SFTMT2 SFTMT3 TP491 TP492 TP494 TP496 TP497 TP499
Shifter Motor Driver

IC33
3
O1 O2 O3 O4 2 7 9 16
/SFTMT0 /SFTMT1 /SFTMT2 /SFTMT3 (12) (12) (12) (12) 24VSFTMT
SPF Motor Driver
Vs
24VSCMT SPMT_0 SPMT_2 SPMT_1 SPMT_3 (11) CP3 0603SFF150FM/32-2 24VDupMT (11) C139 47U/35V + C140 0.1U/50V <1608> 24VSPFMT (11) CP2 0603SFF150FM/32-2 (11)
13
CP1 0603SFF150FM/32-2
3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18
I1 NC NC I2 NC I3 NC NC I4 NC GND GND
(5) (5) (5) (5)
(SPFMT0) (SPFMT2) (SPFMT1) (SPFMT3)
8 7 11 12 IN A IN A/ IN B IN B/ REF Sync Sense A Sense B

STA7100M PGND CP5 0603SFF150FM/32-2 R157 1J 2W R158 1J 2W 24VSPFSOL CP6 0603SFF150FM/32-2 24VSFTMT
COM COM
TD62064AF PGND
1 8
D9
4 3 2 1
9 6 5 14 GND 10
MTZ J22B
BR66
10KJX4
OUT A OUT A OUT A/ OUT A/ OUT B OUT B OUT B/ OUT B/
1 2 3 4 17 18 15 16
5 6 7 8
5V
R159 1.2KJ
RSPF Solenoid Driver

PGND 24VSPFSOL D41 D42 D43 1SS355 1SS355 1SS355
R160 300J
R161 620J
R162 1.2KJ
R163 100J
C141
0.1U
(6) (6) (6)
MRPS_1 MRPS_2 MRPS_3

TP501 (3) (RSV_SOL) NM_1.2KJ R406 NM_10KJ TP502 (3) 24V SRVC 1.2KJ R407 10KJ TP503 + (3) SPUS 1.2KJ R408 10KJ R404 R403 TP505 R275 TP504 C143 R164 4.7KJ C142 10U/35V 0.1U/50V<1608>
PGND
PGND
PGND
/RSV_SOL Q25 NM_2SD1781K
(11)
Tonner Motor Driver
/SRVC Q24 2SD1781K
(11)
5V
R309 NM_0J <1608>
R312 0J <1608>
TP506 Q23 2SD1781K
/SPUS
(11)
IC36
2 Vcc IN1 IN2 GND N.C

TA7291AS
Vs Vref OUT1 OUT2 4 3 7 8
(5)
(TM)
(5)
(TM_)
TMA_O TMB_O
(12) (12)
1
PGND
C145 0.1U/50V<1608>
C144 NM_10U/10V<2012>
PGND
MCU PWB (Noise filter/Pull-up section) (AR-M200/M201)

VCC3 5V
8/16
VCC3
4
D10 D11 D12 D13
C146
C147
C148
C149
C150
C151
C152
C153
C154
4
3
R167 15KJ R168 15KJ R169 15KJ R170 4.7KJ R171 4.7KJ R172 4.7KJ R173 15KJ R174 4.7KJ
1 3 2
INT24V R175 (12) 24V1(DSWS) 0.22J 2W D14 1SS355 (12) (11) 5V POD PMRDY R179 1KJ 2W KDS226 KDS226 KDS226 KDS226
1 3 2 2 2 3
0.1U
NM
0.1U
0.1U
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
C155
C156
C157
C158
C159
C160
C161
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
0.1U
0.1U
C162
C163
C164
C165
C166
C167
C168
C169
C170
(11) (11) (11) (12) (12) (12)
SCOD SPID SRJD PPD3 PD1 PD2
R176 R177 R178 R180 R181 R182 R183 R184
1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ
(SCOD) (SPID) (SRJD) (PPD3) (PD1) (PD2) (POD) (PMRDY)
(3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (3)
0.1U PGND PGND
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
NM
D15 C171 C172 1000P
D16
D17
D18
C173 1000P
C174 1000P
C175 1000P
C176 1000P
C177 1000P
C178 1000P
1 3
D19
1 3 2
KDS226 KDS226 KDS226 KDS226
1 3 2 2 3
1000P
2
5V D20
1SS355
1
TP508
3 2
KDS226
R185 20KJ
R186 20KJ
3
DSWS 5V R187 2.7KJ 0.1U D21 D22 D37 C179 (3)
VCC3
VCC3
1 3 2
KDS226 KDS226
1 3 2 2
KDS226
1 3
R188 1KJ R189 1KJ R190 15KJ R191 4.7KJ R340 4.7KJ R377 4.7KJ
R192 10J
R193 10J
R194 10J
R195 10J
R196 10J
R197 10J
TP509 TP515 TP516 TP517 TP518 (16) (16) (12) (12) (12) (12) VCC3 R202 0J D23 R203 0J R204 0J R205 0J D24 MFD MMLD FANLK PSFANLK DVSEL TCS R305 R306 100J 100J TP831 TP830
TP510
TP511
TP512
TP513
TP514
C180
C181
C182
C183
C184
C185
1000P
1000P
1000P
1000P
1000P
1000P
R198 R199 R200 R201 R367 R372 C186 D54 C187 C188 C189 C372 C380
1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ
DVS1 (TCS) (MFD) (MMLD) (FANLK) (PSFANLK)
(3) (3) (3) (3) (3) (1)
1 3 2
KDS226
1 3 2
KDS226
1 3 2
KDS226
UDZS3.9B
D63
2
INT24V D25 1SS355 5V VCC3
D62
UDZS3.9B
1000P
1000P
1000P
1000P
1000P
1000P
24V R206 100J 2W IC37 D26 D27 D28 D29
C190
C191

1 IN GND
C192 +
47U/35V
R125 100KJ 0.1U/50V<1608>
OUT
3
INT5V
1 3 2
1 3 2
KDS226 KDS226
1 3 2
KDS226 R207 15KJ R208 15KJ R209 4.7KJ R210 4.7KJ R211 4.7KJ
1 3 2
KDS226 R212 12KJ R213 3.3KJ
PGND 47U/35V 0.1U
2 KIA7805
C193
FB4 0J <1608> FB5 NM_0J <1608> L5 ZJSR5101-223TA (11) C195 + 0.1U 22U/16V C197 3.3VIN VCC3
(12) (12) (11) (11)
PPD1 PPD2 SPPD PSW
R214 R215 R216 R217
1KJ 1KJ 1KJ 1KJ
(PPD1) (PPD2) (SPPD) (PSW)
(3) (3) (1) (1)
L4 NM_ZJSR5101-223TA
(11)
12VIN
12V
C194
C196
(12) (12) (11)
CED1 CED2 DRST 5V VCC3
R218 R219 R220
1KJ 1KJ 1KJ
(CED1) (CED2) (DRST)
(3) (3) (3)
47U/25V
R126 100KJ 0.1U/50V<1608>
R128 100KJ
D30
D31
C198
C199
C200
C201
D32
C202
C203
1 3 2
KDS226
1 3 2
KDS226
1000P
1000P
1000P
1000P
1 3 2
KDS226
1000P
1000P
5V EN5V C205 22U/16V + C207 0.1U R130 100KJ
C204
C206
R127 100KJ
22U/16V
0.1U
MCU PWB (IMC2 section 1/2) (AR-M200/M201)

IC38 _SDRAM_DATA[15:0] SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] BR67 IC39 _SDRAM_DATA[15:0] 100JX4 BR68 100JX4
9/16
(2)
/PIWR
(2) BR69 100JX4
PIDATA[7..0]
(2) (2)
/PIACK /PIREQ
4
BR70 100JX4 VCC3
4
R346 10KJ SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] VCC3 R221 NM
PIDATA7 PIDATA6 PIDATA5 PIDATA4 PIDATA3 PIDATA2 PIDATA1 PIDATA0 SDRAM_BANK[1:0]
TP519 TP521 TP523 TP525 TP527 TP529 TP531 TP533 TP535 TP537 TP539 TP541 TP543 TP545 TP547 TP549 TP551
119 120 124 125 126 127 128 129 131 132 133 134 135 137 138 141 142 PI_LINE_SYNC/GP_D6 PI_TR_TGEN PI_TGEN6 PI_TGEN5 PI_TGEN4 PI_TGEN3 PI_TGEN2 PI_TGEN1 PI_TGEN0 PI_DATA7 PI_DATA6 PI_DATA5 PI_DATA4 PI_DATA3 PI_DATA2 PI_DATA1 PI_DATA0 SDRAM_DATA0 SDRAM_DATA1 SDRAM_DATA2 SDRAM_DATA3 SDRAM_DATA4 SDRAM_DATA5 SDRAM_DATA6 SDRAM_DATA7 SDRAM_DATA8 SDRAM_DATA9 SDRAM_DATA10 SDRAM_DATA11 SDRAM_DATA12 SDRAM_DATA13 SDRAM_DATA14 SDRAM_DATA15 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
74 73 72 68 67 66 65 63 62 61 60 58 57 56 55 53
SDRAM_DATA0 SDRAM_DATA1 SDRAM_DATA2 SDRAM_DATA3 SDRAM_DATA4 SDRAM_DATA5 SDRAM_DATA6 SDRAM_DATA7 SDRAM_DATA8 SDRAM_DATA9 SDRAM_DATA10 SDRAM_DATA11 SDRAM_DATA12 SDRAM_DATA13 SDRAM_DATA14 SDRAM_DATA15 TP520 TP522 TP524 TP526 TP528 TP530 TP532 TP534 TP536 TP538 TP540 TP542 TP544 TP546 TP548 TP550
_SDRAM_DATA0 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 _SDRAM_DATA8 _SDRAM_DATA9 _SDRAM_DATA10 _SDRAM_DATA11 _SDRAM_DATA12 _SDRAM_DATA13 _SDRAM_DATA14 _SDRAM_DATA15
VCC3 _SDRAM_DATA[15:0] _SDRAM_DQMB0 _SDRAM_DQMB1 _SDRAM_DATA8 TP808 _SDRAM_DQMA1 _SDRAM_DQMA0 ROM_CS_L TP728 RY_BY
(12) (12) TP561 TP563 R225 R227 R228 R229 VCC3 SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] 33J 33J 33J SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L 33J ROM_CS_L R222 R390 33J 33J _SDRAM_CS0_L _SDRAM_CS1A_L
OA_RX OA_TX
RY_BY
R351
10KJ
RY_BY
SDRAM_DQMA0 SDRAM_DQMB0 SDRAM_DQMA1 SDRAM_DQMB1
109 107 106 105
SDRAM_DQMA0 SDRAM_DQMB0 SDRAM_DQMA1 SDRAM_DQMB1 TP552 TP554 TP556 TP558
1 BR71 2 3 4
8 33JX4 7 6 5
_SDRAM_DQMA0 _SDRAM_DQMB0 _SDRAM_DQMA1 _SDRAM_DQMB1 TP730 TP731 TP732 TP733
SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 SDRAM_ADDR12 SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1 SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L
IO0 IO1 IO2 IO3 IO4 IO5 IO6 IO7 IO8 IO9 IO10 IO11 IO12 IO13 IO14 IO15/A-1
29 31 33 35 38 40 42 44 30 32 34 36 39 41 43 45
_SDRAM_DATA0 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 TP809 TP810 TP901 TP902 TP909 TP910 TP911 SDRAM_ADDR0
SDRAM_CS0_L SDRAM_CS1A_L SDRAM_CS1B_L ROM_CS_L VCCW 13 111 110 101 11 28 26 WE OE CE VCC RY/BY 37 15
33JX4 NM 10KJ
104 102 77 75
TP570 TP572 TP574 VCC3
SDRAM_CS0_L SDRAM_CS1A_L TP565 TP567
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 48 17 16 9 10 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20
VPP
(4)
SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L
C208 NM C209 0.1U
TP557 TP559 TP560 TP562 TP564 TP566 TP568 TP569 TP571 TP573 TP575 TP576 TP578 TP580 TP582 TP584 TP586 33JX4 TP744 TP745
143 145 146 147 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 159 160 161 162 163 165 166 167 PP_HIDRIVE/USART1_RX PP_DRIVE/USART1_TX PP_NINIT PP_NFAULT PP_NSELECTIN PP_NAUTOFD PP_SELECT PP_PERROR PP_BUSY PP_NACK PP_DATA7 PP_DATA6 PP_DATA5 PP_DATA4 PP_DATA3 PP_DATA2 PP_DATA1/USART1_CK PP_DATA0 PP_NSTROBE 47 14 12 BYTE WP/ACC RESET GND GND 46 27
R230 33JX4 R232 NM 22000P NM
168 169 170 BASE_CLK/GP_PWM1 CLK_EXT/GP_PWM2 MAIN_CLK/GP_PWM0

33JX4 SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1 33J TP610 R233 C210 R235 R236 33J 4.7KJ _SDRAM_CLK _SDRAM_CLK _SDRAM_CKE SDRAM_BANK[1:0] (2,4,5,12) /RESET0 R231
CLK_EXT
TP589 TP591 TP593
8M/16M Flash ROM
(13)
PB_NCS1
(10,13) PB_DATA[7:0]
SDRAM_ADDR0 SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 SDRAM_ADDR12 SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1 SDRAM_CLK SDRAM_CKE 79 78
TP608 R234 SDRAM_CKE
100 99 97 96 95 94 92 91 90 89 85 82 80 84 83
3
OA3.3V
PB_DATA7 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA0
TP577 BR72 TP579 TP581 TP583 TP585 BR73 TP587 TP588 TP590 TP592 BR74 TP594 TP595 TP597 TP599 BR75 TP601 TP603 TP605
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
SDRAM_ADDR0 SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 SDRAM_ADDR12
BR76 1 33JX4 2 3 4 BR77 1 2 3 4 33JX4
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 7
(10) (5,10)
PB_NCS3 PB_NAE0
(5,10) (5,10) C212 0.01U SDRAM_ADDR[12:0] C213 1U<2012> TP619 TP620 TP621 TP622 TP623 TP624 TP625 TP626
PB_NWE PB_NOE
PLLCS_VDDA
C211 NM IC40 _SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
178 180 181 182 183 185 186 187 188 189 190 194 195 196 197 198 REG_A9/PB_NCS1 REG_A8/PB_NCS2 REG_AD7/PB_DATA7 REG_AD6/PB_DATA6 REG_AD5/PB_DATA5 REG_AD4/PB_DATA4 REG_AD3/PB_DATA3 REG_AD2/PB_DATA2 REG_AD1/PB_DATA1 REG_AD0/PB_DATA0 REG_ADDR_VALID/PB_NCS0 REG_RD_L/PB_NCS3 REG_WR_L/PB_NAE0 REG_CS_L/PB_NAE1 REG_RDY/PB_NWE INTERRUPT_L/PB_NOE PLLCS_VSSA 6 199 201 202 203 204 205 207 208 GP_C0/PB_ADDR0 GP_C1/PB_ADDR1 GP_C2/PB_ADDR2 GP_C3/PB_ADDR3 GP_C4/PB_ADDR4 GP_C5/PB_ADDR5 GP_C6/PB_ADDR6 GP_C7/PB_ADDR7 PLLSS_VDDA 149
(10,13) PB_ADDR[7:0]
PB_ADDR0 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR2 PB_ADDR3 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR5 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR7
BR78 1 33JX4 2 3 4 BR79 1 2 3 4 33JX4 TP629 TP631 TP632 TP633 TP634 OA3.3V C214 0.01U C215 1U<2012>
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
(1) (1)
ES_CMD ES_STS
(1,5) (10) (10)
(FW) DT_ACKB DT_REQB
(13)
MODEM_IN
1 2 8 9 11 12 13 14 GP_B0/USART0_TX GP_B1/USART0_RX GP_B2/USART0_CK GP_B3/ANA_SD1 GP_B4/DT_ACKB GP_B5/DT_REQB GP_B6/DT_ACKA GP_B7/DT_REQA PLLSS_VSSA 148
SDRAM_BANK[1:0]
SDRAM_ADDR0 SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 SDRAM_ADDR12 SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1
23 24 25 26 29 30 31 32 33 34 22 35 36 20 21
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 BA0 BA1
DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 DQ9 DQ10 DQ11 DQ12 DQ13 DQ14 DQ15
TP788 TP787 TP780 TP779 _SDRAM_CLK VCC3 _SDRAM_CLK TP796 _SDRAM_CS0_L SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L TP791 _SDRAM_CKE _SDRAM_DQMA0 _SDRAM_DQMA1
2 4 5 7 8 10 11 13 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 19 16 17 18 38 37 15 39 CS WE CAS RAS CLK CKE LDQM UDQM
_SDRAM_DATA0 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 _SDRAM_DATA8 _SDRAM_DATA9 _SDRAM_DATA10 _SDRAM_DATA11 _SDRAM_DATA12 _SDRAM_DATA13 _SDRAM_DATA14 _SDRAM_DATA15 VCC3
(1) (3) (1) (10) TP638 TP639 TP640
/ES_PAGE /ES_CRDY /ES_SRDY WAKEUP
(12) OA982_READY
15 16 19 21 22 23 GP_D0/ADC_A0 GP_D1/ADC_A1 GP_D2/ADC_A2 GP_D3/ADC_CLK GP_D4/ADC_DATA GP_D5/ADC_NCS

OA3.3V
VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ VDD VDD VDD

FB6 0J <1608> C239 NM L6 NM_ZJSR5101-223TA
49 43 9 3 27 14 1
VCC3
(2) /IMC_READY (13) MDM_IRQ (10) SUSPEND(USB2.0) C397 10U/10V<2012> C396 10U/10V<2012> C395 10U/10V<2012>
C235 0.1U
C236 0.1U
C237 0.1U
C238 0.1U
C217 10U/10V<2012>
2
OA3.3V C218 0.1U C219 0.1U C220 0.1U C221 0.1U C222 0.1U C223 0.1U C224 0.1U C225 0.1U
R238
(2) (10) (2) (2)
/SC_LINE INT_USBD /PR_LINE /FPOFF
/FPOFF
TP642 TP643 TP644 TP645 TP646 TP647 TP648
24 26 28 29 30 31 32 34 GP_A0 GP_A1 GP_A2/DC_CHY1 GP_A3/DC_CHX1 GP_A4/DC_PWM1 GP_A5/DC_CHY0 GP_A6/DC_CHX0 GP_A7/DC_PWM0
C216 NM
10KJ
(2)
/H_SYNC
VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO VDD_IO
C226 0.1U
3 20 25 33 46 59 71 81 93 103 115 130 144 158 171 184 200
VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ
52 46 12 6
C248 0.1U TP912
C249 0.1U
C250 0.1U
2
40 N.C VSS VSS VSS
HY57V561620FTP-H-C
(2) (2)
/POREQ /POACK
54 41 28
/FPOFF
R239
10KJ
33JX4
VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE VDD_CORE

C227 0.1U C228 0.1U C229 0.1U C230 0.1U C231 0.1U C232 0.1U C233 0.1U
18 36 70 88 122 140 174 192
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
C366
C362
C381
C382
C383
C384
C385
C386

PODATA7 PODATA6 PODATA5 PODATA4 PODATA3 PODATA2 PODATA1 PODATA0
1 2 3 4 BR80 1 2 3 4 BR81 175 176 USB_DM USB_DP
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5
37 38 39 40 42 43 44 45 47 48 49 50 51 52 PO_LINE_SYNC/ANA_SCLK PO_PAGE_SYNC/ANA_NCS PO_REQ/ANA_SD0 PO_ACK/PDATA0/PDS0 PO_DONE/PDATA2/PDS2 PO_WR/PDATA1/PDS1 PO_DATA7/LHEAT/PAS_M PO_DATA6/LCTRL/CFIRE2 PO_DATA5/AGATE/CFIRE1 PO_DATA4/ACLK/MFIRE2 PO_DATA3/PENABLE/MFIRE1 PO_DATA2/PLOAD PO_DATA1/PCLK PO_DATA0/PDATA3/PAS_C
C234 0.1U
SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]
IC44 _SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
33JX4
(2) PODATA[7..0]
C240 0.1U
C241 0.1U
C242 0.1U
C243 0.1U
C244 0.1U
C245 0.1U
C246 0.1U
C247 0.1U
(5,10) /OP_RST
TP665
(1) /RES_OA982 TP666
R137 33J R138 NM
C100 1000P (12)
TRST_L
(2,4,5,12) /RESET0
R343
NM_0J
(12) (12) (12) (12)
TDO TCK TMS TDI
TDO TCK TMS TDI
112 113 114 116 117 118 RESET_L TDO TCK TMS TDI TRST_L TEST_MODE0 TEST_MODE1 172 177
SDRAM_BANK[1:0] VCC3
R342
4.7KJ
TRST_L VCC3 R245 R246
NM NM
TP667 TP668
VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO VSS_IO
10 27 41 54 64 76 86 98 108 123 136 150 164 179 193 206
SDRAM_ADDR0 SDRAM_ADDR1 SDRAM_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 SDRAM_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 SDRAM_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 SDRAM_ADDR8 SDRAM_ADDR9 SDRAM_ADDR10 SDRAM_ADDR11 SDRAM_ADDR12 SDRAM_BANK0 SDRAM_BANK1 TP925
23 24 25 26 29 30 31 32 33 34 22 35 36 20 21
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 BA0 BA1
DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8 DQ9 DQ10 DQ11 DQ12 DQ13 DQ14 DQ15
_SDRAM_CS1A_L SDRAM_WE_L SDRAM_CAS_L SDRAM_RAS_L _SDRAM_CLK _SDRAM_CLK TP926 _SDRAM_CKE _SDRAM_DQMA0 _SDRAM_DQMA1
2 4 5 7 8 10 11 13 42 44 45 47 48 50 51 53 19 16 17 18 38 37 15 39 CS WE CAS RAS CLK CKE LDQM UDQM
_SDRAM_DATA0 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 _SDRAM_DATA8 _SDRAM_DATA9 _SDRAM_DATA10 _SDRAM_DATA11 _SDRAM_DATA12 _SDRAM_DATA13 _SDRAM_DATA14 _SDRAM_DATA15 VCC3
R247 R248
4.7KJ 4.7KJ
VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ VDDQ VDD VDD VDD

C265 NM
49 43 9 3 27 14 1 52 46 12 6 VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ VSSQ
VCC3
VCC3
1
5 4 XIN XOUT
OA-982 TP669
C252 33P
VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE VSS_CORE
17 35 69 87 121 139 173 191
C300 0.1U
C299 0.1U
C302 0.1U
C301 0.1U
X4 AT-49(18.3856MHz) R249 0J
XIN
R240 R241 R242 R243 R244
10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ NM_10KJ
TDO TCK TMS TDI TRST_L
XOUT
C254 33P CLK_EXT R250 4.7KJ
R369 NM
_SDRAM_DATA0 _SDRAM_DATA1 _SDRAM_DATA2 _SDRAM_DATA3 _SDRAM_DATA4 _SDRAM_DATA5 _SDRAM_DATA6 _SDRAM_DATA7 _SDRAM_DATA8 _SDRAM_DATA9 _SDRAM_DATA10 _SDRAM_DATA11 _SDRAM_DATA12 _SDRAM_DATA13 _SDRAM_DATA14 _SDRAM_DATA15
BR82 1 2 3 4 BR83 1 2 3 4 BR84 1 2 3 4 BR85 1 2 3 4
8 10KJX4 7 6 5 8 10KJX4 7 6 5 8 10KJX4 7 6 5 8 10KJX4 7 6 5
C256 0.1U _SDRAM_CS1A_L _SDRAM_CS0_L _SDRAM_CKE C303 NM C251 NM C253 47P TP930
C263 0.1U
C264 0.1U
CLK_EXT
40
N.C
VSS VSS VSS

HY57V561620FTP-H-C
54 41 28
MCU PWB (IMC2 USB2.0 section 2/2) (AR-M200/M201)

ISP33 0J <1608> L11 C271 0.1U C257 0.01U C258 0.01U C259 0.01U C260 0.01U
10/16
VCC3
C270 0.1U
GND
FG
ISP33
GND
C266 0.1U C267 0.1U C268 0.1U C269 0.1U
GND
ISP33 C273 18P 0J <1608> TP670 L13 C272 15P X6 C261 10U/10V<2012> AT-49(12MHz) C262 0.1U
VCC3
TP907 C403 VCC3 TP783 VCC3 R254 NM TP871 TP677 R257 10KJ VCC3 R260 10KJ IC41 R262 1.5KJ L8 TP704 TP706 TP705 TP709 (5,9) /OP_RST R272 12KF NM VCC3 10KJ 10KJ (9) TP707 R274 0J INT_USBD R258 R259 10KJ NM TP683 TP685 C101 1000P PB_NOE PB_NWE (1) /RES_USB20 R273 (9) (9) DT_REQB DT_ACKB TP702 DLW21SN900SQ2 R255 10KJ R261 10KJ VCC3 (9) WAKEUP (9) SUSPEND(USB2.0) R253 1.2KJ
0.1U
3
C405 R111 1MF
100KJ
0.1U
R399
C406 10U/10V<2012> PB_ADDR7 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR5 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR3 TP700 TP699 TP698 TP697 TP696 PB_ADDR[7:0] (9,13)
C404 1U<2012>
R267 NM_<1608>
TP880
CN1 UBR23-4K2200
L7
C274 0.01U
SUSPEND WAKEUP BUS_CONF/DA0 VCC(3V3) MODE0/DA1 DGND XTAL1 XTAL2 VCC1V8 VBUS VCC(I/O) DATA15 DATA14 DATA13 DATA12 DATA11
BLM21PG600SN1
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
FG
SHIELD GND +D -D +5V
5 4 3 2 1
PB_ADDR2 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR0 PB_DATA7 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA4 ISP1583BS PB_DATA3 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA0 R256 10KJ
TP695 TP694 TP693 TP692 TP691 TP690 TP689 TP688 TP687 TP686 TP684
PB_DATA[7:0] (9,13)
USB2.0 DEV1
R139 33J R310 NM
L9
DA2 CS_N RW_N/RD_N DS_N/WR_N CS0_N CS1_N AD0 AD1 AD2 VCC(I/O) AD3 AD4 AD5 AD6 AD7 VCC1V8
BLM21PG600SN1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
AGND RPU DP DM AGND RREF RESET_N EOT DREQ DACK DIOR DIOW DGND INTRQ READY/IORDY INT
DATA10 DATA9 DATA8 DATA7 DATA6 DATA5 DATA4 VCC(I/O) DATA3 DATA2 DATA1 DATA0 ALE/A0 DGND MODE1 N.C. DGND
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
TP675 TP701
R251
R252
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
VCC3 TP782 TP870 0.1U TP681 VCC3 IC42 R401 R400 TP682 10KJ 10KJ
5 4 2 3
TC7SH08FU TP708 C408 0.1U TP703
IC183
(9)
PB_NCS3
5 1
(5,9)
PB_NAE0
TP908
(5,9) (5,9)
PB_NOE PB_NWE
PB_NOE PB_NWE
C410 0.1U
TC7SH126FU
VCC3
(9,13) PB_DATA[7:0] IC43
5 2
C409 0.1U TC7SH04FU
(9)
DT_ACKB
4 1
PB_DATA0 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA7
C370

DIE
VCC3
MCU PWB (Connector section 1) (AR-M200/M201)

To Power unit To Operational PWB
EN5V VCC3 5V INT5V INT24V
11/16
4
CN2
0603SFF150FM/32-2 CP8
EN5V 5V 24V HLOUT (6) D33 /POFF 24V (6)
(8) (5) (6)
EN5V 5V 12VIN FW /PR
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
3.3VIN 5V (8) CP10 /TC /MC (6) (6)
0603SFF150FM/32-2
(6) (6)
/BIAS /GRIDL
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 1 3 2
R347 KDS226 (3) KEYIN (5) (5) (5) (1) (KEYSC3) (KEYSC2) (KEYSC1) BZR R277 1KJ (SELIN1) (SELIN2) (SELIN3) NM_<1608> R276 10KJ
C275
C276
B24B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN)
0.1U/50V<1608>
(White)
NM_<1608> PGND PGND C277 1000P (6) (LCDCONT) R353 0J PGND
(3)
PSL
R350
0J
(8) (8) (5) (5)
(LCDRS) (LCDE) (LCDDB4) (LCDDB5) (LCDDB6) (LCDDB7) DRST PSW (OP_DATA) (OP_CLK) (5) (OP_LATCH)
3
(3) (3) INFOLED BL R352 R331 NM NM
0603SFF150FM/32-2 CP9
CN3
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FF4-32-S15D5 NM 1000P NM R365 100J 0J 0J 1000P 1000P R385 R398 NM
C364
C278
C279
5V
5V 24VSPFSOL
5V
R278
R140
200J1/4W<3216>
CN29 R141
200J1/4W<3216>
200J1/4W<3216>
(8) (8) (8) (7) (7) (7) SCOD /RSV_SOL /SPUS /SRVC
(7) (7) (7) (7) (8) 24VSPFMT (8) (7) (7) (7) (7) SPID SPMT_3 SPMT_1 SPMT_2 SPMT_0
SPMT_0 SPMT_2 SPMT_1 SPMT_3 SPID
SPPD
200J1/4W<3216>
CN30
R349
24VSPFMT
SRJD
(8)
SPPD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
B24B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
(5)
LCDDB7#
R295
100J C358 100P
C363
(LCDDB7)
(3)
SELIN1
R330
100J C361 100P
C280
To SPF unit
5V
To RSPF unit
C365
(SELIN1)
B12B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
(5)
LCDDB6#
R294
100J C357 100P
(LCDDB6)
(3)
SELIN2
R329
100J C360 100P
(SELIN2)
(5)
LCDDB5#
R293
100J C356 100P
(LCDDB5)
(3)
SELIN3
R328
100J C359 100P

(5) LCDDB4# R292 100J C349 100P (LCDDB4)
(SELIN3)
To LSU
(5)
LCDE#
R291
0J C347 100P
(LCDE)
5V INT5V
D65 24V CN41 R290 (5) LCDRS# 100J C317
(LCDRS)
1
CN42 (6) (8) (6) /PMD PMRDY PMCLK_A
KDS226
1 2 3 4 5
To Polygon motor
100P
(5)
/SYNC
R282 PGND
1KJ
B05B-CZHK-B(LF)(SN)(V)
To LD
(6) (5) (6)
/LDEN /VIDEO SHOLD
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
B08B-CZHK-B(LF)(SN)(V)
MCU PWB (Connector section 2) (AR-M200/M201)

5V 24V R283 200J1/4W<3216> 1/4W
12/16
Not mounted To HL unit CPU Serial
VCC3 CN13 (1) (1) RxD TxD
INT24V
CP21 CN10 CN11 (8) B2P-VH-R(LF)(SN) (6) RTH_IN 24V1(DSWS)
(For debug)
4
4
1 2
(8) PPD2
0J <1608>
CN12
To Main motor
(Red)
B5B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) 0.1U/50V<1608> 0.1U/50V<1608>
To Interlock switch
1 2 3 4 5
(6) (8) (6)
/MMD MMLD /MMCLK
1 2 3 4 5
C281
C282
B5B-PASK-1(LF)(SN) C283 C284
1000P
1000P
(White)
(White)
1 2 3 4
B4B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
PGND 5V PGND R284 200J1/4W<3216> CN14 24V (6) CN15 (6) B5B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN) /CPFS1 (8) MFD /MPFS 24V
(White)
CN16
1 2 3 4 5
To Multi unit
OA982 JTAG & Serial

VCC3
(6) (8) (6)
VFMOUT FANLK /VFMCNT
1 2 3 4
To VF Fan motor
(Red)
B3B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
1 2 3
To Cassette paper solenoid
CN17 TCK /RESET0 OA_TX OA_RX
B4B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
C285
C286
(White)
1 3 5 7 9
2 4 6 8 10
1000P
1000P
(White)
3
24V 24V 5V CN18 (6) (6) (8) (8) (8) 1000P 1000P 1000P B14B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) PD2 CED2 PPD3 /CPFS2 /RRS
To 2nd. cassette
(9) TRST_L (9) TMS (9) TDO (9) TDI (9) TCK (2,4,5,9) /RESET0 (9) OA_TX (9) OA_RX
TCK /RESET0 B10B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) OA_TX OA_RX
PGND
1 2 3
CN19 B3B-PH-K-E(LF)(SN)
To Resist roller solenoid

NM
24VDupMT
CN20
(Blue)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13
2 4 6 8 10 12 14
(White)
C287 C288 C289
C373
C374
B05B-XASK-1(LF)(SN)
NM_<1608>
(7) (7) (7) (7)
/DMT0 /DMT1 /DMT2 /DMT3
1 2 3 4 5
To Duplex motor
To PS Fan motor
CN35 (6) (8) PGND PSFMOUT PSFANLK
PGND CN21 (8) CED1
3 2 1
NM_B03B-PASK-1(LF)(SN)
1 2 3
To Cassette detect
24V CN23
C368 1000P
(White)
CN22
B3B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)
(Black)
5V R285 200J1/4W<3216> CN24 (8) PPD1 (6) /MCNT
(7) (7) (7) (7)
OUT_A+ OUT_B+ OUT_AOUT_B-
1 2 3 4
To Mirror motor
PGND
B4B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN)
3 2 1
NM_B3B-PH-K-R
To Mecha. COUNTER
(Red)
(Red)
1 2 3
To Paper pass detect
NM
R288
24VSFTMT
390J
(White)
CN27 TP712 D38 CN28 (8) PD1
R287
TP710 D39 D40
R289
B3B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
TP711
NM

B3B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN)
(Red)
CN25
(7) (7) 5V R286 200J1/4W<3216> CN26
TMA_O TMB_O
1 2
To Toner motor
LED for Checker
B2P-VH(LF)(SN)
(White)
VCC3
(8)
POD
1 2 3
To Paper out detect
VCC3
VCC3
(7) (7) (7) (7)
/SFTMT0 /SFTMT1 /SFTMT2 /SFTMT3
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3
To Shifter motor
B5B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
To Paper detect
B3B-PH-K-M(LF)(SN)
NM_LT1P67A Q9 NM_KRC106S 3 LT1P67A (2) GASIC_READY
TP713
NM_LT1P67A Q10 NM_KRC106S 3
TP714
(9) OA982_READY
(White)
(Green)
MCU PWB (Modem I/F Connector) (AR-M200/M201)

(9,10) PB_DATA[7:0]
13/16
4
To Modem PWB
(9,10) PB_ADDR[7:0]
BR91 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 #PB_DATA7 #PB_DATA6 #PB_DATA5 #PB_DATA4 #PB_DATA3 #PB_DATA2 #PB_DATA1 #PB_DATA0 24V VCC3 EN5V BR90 33JX4
33JX4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
(5) C102 0.1U (1) /RES_FAX CP11 BR92 CP13 (9) PB_NCS1 (5) (PB_NAE0) (5) (PB_NWE) (5) (PB_NOE) TP903 0J <1608> L16 VCC3 D46 CN5 R311 1KJ 33JX4
0603SFF150FM/32-2
0603SFF150FM/32-2
(9)
MDM_IRQ
(MDM_IRQ)
PB_NCS1 (PB_NAE0) (PB_NWE) (PB_NOE) (/FAX_RST) #MDM_IRQ
CP12 0J <1608> L14 PGND
TP904
1 3 2
KDS226
0603SFF150FM/32-2
/FAX_RST
R313 100J R325 NM
PB_ADDR7 PB_ADDR6 PB_ADDR5 PB_ADDR4 PB_ADDR3 PB_ADDR2 PB_ADDR1 PB_ADDR0
PB_DATA7 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA0 BR93 33JX4 5 4 6 3 7 2 8 1 5 4 6 3 7 2 8 1 #PB_ADDR7 #PB_ADDR6 #PB_ADDR5 #PB_ADDR4 #PB_ADDR3 #PB_ADDR2 #PB_ADDR1 #PB_ADDR0
(/FAX_RST) (PB_NWE) PB_NCS1 #PB_ADDR1 #PB_ADDR3 #PB_ADDR5 #PB_ADDR7 #PB_DATA1 #PB_DATA3 #PB_DATA5 #PB_DATA7 MCU_nCS MCU_D0 MCU_D2 MCU_D4 MCU_D6 MODEM_IN B40B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN)
39 37 35 33 31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
40 38 36 34 32 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
#MDM_IRQ (PB_NOE) (PB_NAE0) #PB_ADDR0 #PB_ADDR2 #PB_ADDR4 #PB_ADDR6 #PB_DATA0 #PB_DATA2 #PB_DATA4 #PB_DATA6 MCU_INT (/RD) MCU_D1 MCU_D3 MCU_D5 MCU_D7
(1,2,3,4)
D[15..0]
VCC3
R315 10KJ
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 BR88 33JX4
BR89 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
33JX4 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
R391 (3) 1KJ VCC3 D47 MSU_ST1 R317
(1)
/CS5
TP725
(9) MODEM_IN (5) (/RD)
100J
MCU_D7 MCU_D6 MCU_D5 MCU_D4 MCU_D3 MCU_D2 MCU_D1 MCU_D0 MODEM_IN (/RD) MCU_nCS MCU_INT
C378
NM
1 3 2
KDS226
C323 NM
C324 NM
C328 NM
C335 NM
C336 NM
C337 NM
C330 10KJ
C321 10KJ
C333 10KJ
C327 10KJ
C334 NM
C331 NM
C329 NM
C320 10KJ
C332 10KJ
C326 10KJ
C322 10KJ
C325 NM

D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 MSU_ST1 PB_DATA7 PB_DATA6 PB_DATA5 PB_DATA4 PB_DATA3 PB_DATA2 PB_DATA1 PB_DATA0 (MDM_IRQ)
MCU PWB (Scanner I/F section) (AR-M200/M201)
14/16
4
Copy Lamp Inverter
To Scanner unit
12V EN5V
24V
CP18 0603SFF150FM/32-2 VCL TWKA-221K VCC3
Q5 2SJ537
L12 220UH 0603SFF150FM/32-2
CP14
CP15 0603SFF150FM/32-2 TP886 L17 1J <1608>
3
D48
R318 910J
3
1 3 2
KDS226 R322 12KJ R320 1KJ (5) C342 1000P mt_at_home CN4
3
AFE_DB#1 AFE_DB#3 AFE_DB#5 AFE_DB#7 AFE_SEN# AFE_SDI# BSAMP# VSAMP# VCL VCL (5) (5) (5) (5)
C338 47U/35V 47U/35V
+ D49 11EQS06 C340 R319 15KJ 0.1U/50V<1608>
+ C339
(2)
CL
R323 15KJ
R324 56KJ
Q6 KTC3198
5.6KJ1/4W<3216>
C341
33P
R321
AFE_DB#0 AFE_DB#2 AFE_DB#4 AFE_DB#6 (5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5) (5) AFE_SCK# ADCLK# CCD_PHI1# CCD_PHI2# CCD_CP# CCD_RS# CCD_TG#
32 30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2
31 29 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 1
FF4-32-S15D5
PGND
PGND
PGND
2
(2) AFE_DB[7..0] AFE_DB0 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB7 BR86 33JX4 1 8 2 7 3 6 4 5 1 8 2 7 3 6 4 5 BR87 33JX4 AFE_DB#0 AFE_DB#1 AFE_DB#2 AFE_DB#3 AFE_DB#4 AFE_DB#5 AFE_DB#6 AFE_DB#7

B C D
AFE_DB0 AFE_DB1 AFE_DB2 AFE_DB3 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB7
C109C318C132C314C313C319C315C316 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P
MCU PWB (NIC I/F section) (AR-M200/M201)
15/16
4
VCC3
EN5V
CP19
0603SFF150FM/32-2
CP20 TP906 L19 0J <1608>
TP905 L18 0J <1608>
0603SFF150FM/32-2
3
CN39
To NIC PWB
C106
(1) /RES_NIC
R326 1KJ R327 NM PARAD0 PARAD1 PARAD2 PARAD3 PARAD4 PARAD5 PARAD6 PARAD7 TP672 TP673 TP674 TP676 TP678 TP679 TP680 TP717
0.1U
(5)
/NIC_RST
8 7 6 5 8 BR94 33JX4 7 6 5 BR95 33JX4
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
(2) C388 C387 C389 C391 C390 C392 C393 C394
PARAD[7..0]
12P
(2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2) (2)
/ACK_O BUSY_O PE_O SLCT_O /FAULT_O /STB_I /AUTOFD_I /SLCTIN_I /INIT_I /REV_O
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 /ACK_O BUSY_O PE_O SLCT_O /FAULT_O /STB_I /AUTOFD_I /SLCTIN_I /INIT_I /REV_O R402
NM
VCC3
EN5V
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
24FMN-BTK-A
C345 0.1U
C346 0.1U
C343 0.1U
C344 0.1U

B C D
MCU PWB (CRUM I/F section) (AR-M200/M201)

24V TP721 (6) (8) (8) NM_B4B-PH-K-R TCS DVSEL TCS_AN CN6 R348 NM
16/16
4
CRUM Control
VCC3
EN5V
1 2 3 4
To DV Unit (To Analog Tonner Sensor)
(Red)
R335 10KJ
R334 NM
IC49
3.3V 5V
(CRUMSDA) TP884
Vcc
(1) CRUMSDA
TP883
R337
0J
(5) 24V EN5V
/ASIC_RST
TP715
OE
GND
C348 0.1U
TC7SBD385AFU
R341 10KJ D34 D35
To DV Unit with CRUM (To Analog Tonner Sensor)

3
1 3
R279 10J KDS226 R280 (CRUMSDA) (CRUMSCL) R281 300J 300J KDS226 CN7
1 2
3
1 3 5 7 9 2 4 6 8 10
EN5V
3.3V
(White)
C350
5V
B10B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
IC51 TP887 (CRUMSCL)
0.1U
5 1
(1)
CRUMSCL
2 3
TC7SET08F
FB8 FB10 FB14
2
F-GND 1
0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>
2

F-GND 3
FB11
F-GND 6
FB9 FB15
F-GND 2
F-GND 4
F-GND 7
FB12
1
1
F-GND 5
PGND
OPE PWB (7SEG) (AR-203E/5420)

a1 a2 b1 f2 g2 g3 b3 e3 d2 d3 c3 c2 e2 d1 c1 b2 f3 a3 f1 g1 e1
1/1
4
LEDM
LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A NM_LTL-1LHEE-002A LTL-1LHG-002A PE LED71 LED91 LED76 LED73 LED70 ME ZPL DU21 RPL g3 DU22 AE LED75 LED69 MPL LED60 f3 e3 d3 c3 b3 a3 LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A
+5V
LEDM
Q305 2SB1197K 3
TP1
R424 10kJ
R425 1kJ LTL-1LHEE-002A LTL-1LHEE-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A g2 SPFL LED67 LED68 5VEN LED74 LED78 LED80 LED92 LED102 LED77 LED79 LED81 JPL CS1L DPL EXL EXD EXN CS2L DAA1 SCNL f2 e2 d2 c2 b2 a2
C. OPE PWB (AR-203E/5420)
Q304 2SB1197K 3
R426 10kJ
LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHEE-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHEE-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A g1 SJAL LED89 LED90 LED94 LED96 LED98 LED101 LED93 LED95 LED97 LED99 BPL 1ENR TPL 3RE 2RE 1RE NOR DAA2 2ENR PSL ONL R364 R363 R365 150J TP16 TP12 TP11 TP10 TP8 TP7 TP6 TP5 TP23 TP24 TP25 TP26 TP27 TP22 TP14 TP9 TP21 TP20 TP19 TP18 TP13 TP15 TP17 R429 1kJ R366 150J R378 150J R367 150J R368 150J R369 150J R370 150J R371 150J R372 150J R420 150J R379 150J R422 150J R373 150J R374 150J R375 150J R376 150J R377 150J 470J 470J f1 e1 d1 c1 b1 a1 PML LED72 ONLL LED61
TP2
R427 1kJ
Q306 2SB1197K 3
TP3
3
13 6 9 7 11 12 10 8 42 41 43 45 46 40 38 33 34 36 37 39 31 /Q9 /Q7 /Q3 /Q4 /Q5 /Q6 /Q8 /Q1 /Q2 /Q28 /Q21 /Q24 /Q22 /Q26 /Q27 /Q25 /Q23 /Q11 /Q10 /Q12 /Q13 /Q14 /Q15
IC304 LC7935AN
R428 10kJ
3
47
IC304 DUPK SW29 SKQNABD010 EXUPK SW17 SKQNABD010 EXDWK SW18 SKQNABD010 EXMODK
/Q29
/Q30
VCC
/STROBE
BEO
/LATCH
S IN
CLOCK
S OUT
GND1
GND2
GND3
GND4
GND5
/Q32
/Q31
/Q20
/Q19
/Q18
/Q17
15
16
63
51
49
50
30
64
19
14
35
44
62
18
17
48
/Q16
+5V
32
SW24 SKQNABD010 ZUPK
+5V +5V TP41 TP39 22000PF R411 1.5KJ R339 R418 R419 R421 1KJ TP51 6 1KJ IC306 1KJ 1KJ R423 1.5KJ R412 1.5KJ TP38 TP37 TP36 TP40 C348
TP35
TP34 TP33 TP32
TP31 TP30
TP29 TP28 ZDWK +5V R394 4.7KJ R399 4.7KJ R397 4.7KJ R396 4.7KJ CRSK
SW23 SKQNABD010 SW22 SKQNABD010 SW19 SKQNABD010 BPK
18FMN-BMTTR-A-TB or IMSA-9619S-18C-TB
C342
C343
47uF/16V
22000PF
R408 R410 R409 150J 150J
R406 4.7KJ
R398 4.7KJ
R403 4.7KJ
TP46 TP47 TP48
TP42 TP43 TP44 TP45
W Y
R395 4.7KJ
150J
SW30 SKQNABD010 10UPK SW25 SKQNABD010 MAGK SW20 SKQNABD010
C346
C344 C345
C328
5
+5V +5V C350 0.1uF
200PF 5VEN PSL ONL
200PF 200PF 200PF
2
16
D318 D315 1SS133 D314 1SS133 1SS133 D317 1SS133 R416 510J 1KJ 1KJ 510J R414 TP52 TP54 D313 1SS133
C329 1000p
C336 1000p
C330 1000p
CN304
C340 1000p
C332 1000p
C338 1000p
C339 1000p
C331 1000p
GND
A B C G 8
R401 4.7KJ R393 4.7KJ R392 4.7KJ R391 4.7KJ R400 4.7KJ R405 4.7KJ
C333 1000p
C347 1000p
S3B-PH-K-S C354 SKQNABD010 D319 D312 D320 1SS133 1SS133 1SS133 N.M. D316 1SS133 D311 1SS133
N.M.
N.M.
N.M. C349 0.1uF
C334 1000p
C335 1000p
GND
74HC151
A B C G 8
C341 1000p
11 10 9 7
C337 1000p
R431 4.7KJ
C355
NM_1000p

VCC D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 4 TP58 R390 TP59R389 3 TP60R388 2 TP61R387 1 15 TP62R386 14 TP63R402 13 TP64R385 12 TP65R384 11 10 9 7
100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J +5V SCNK OLK CLK R413 TP66 TP67 TP68 TP69 TP70 TP71 TP55 TP56 TP57 +5V PSW SW16 C351 C353 C352 R383 R382 R381 R407 R380 R404 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 1UPK R417 1KJ R415 74HC151 TP53 IC305 6 W D0 D1 5 Y D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 16 VCC D7
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
D-GND DRST 5V KIN2 PSW ONL PSL D-GND 5VEN OP-DATA OP-LATCH SELIN2 OP-CLK SELIN1 OP-STB SELIN3 KIN1 D-GND
D-GND DRST 5V PSW KIN2 KIN1 OP-STB OP-CLK OP-LATCH OP-DATA SELIN1 SELIN2 SELIN3 D-GND 5VEN PSL ONL D-GND
TP49 TP50
2
SW21 SKQNABD010 SW26 SKQNABD010 SW27 SKQNABD010
CN303
DRST
1 2 3
D-GND
4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12
SW28 SKQNABD010
+5V +5V CN305 R430 100J CVOP
1
1 2 3
NM_ S3B-PH-K-R (RED)
OPERATION PWB (LED/LCD section) (AR-M200/M201)

LCDDB7# LCDDB6# LCDDB5# LCDDB4# LCDE# LCDRS# LED_V1 LED301 C332 100p C327 100p 100p C328 100p C329 100p C330 100p C331 C331 100p 100p LED302 LED304 LED303
1/3
5V
Q303 KRA225S
COPY
LTL-1LHG-002A Q304 KRA225S LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHEE-002A OPEN
CS1L
HPL
SJAL
5VEN
2 3
LED_V2 LED308 LED307 LED314 LED309
R344 100J
To LCD
IC301
PRINT
LCDRS LCDDB[7..4] LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LCDE R332 R331 R330 R329 R333 100J R334
CS2L
SPFL
BPL
LCDCONT 100J
R335
0J LCDRS#
2 1
LED_V3 LED306 LED305 LED310
Q305 KRA225S
LCDDB4 LCDDB5 LCDDB6 LCDDB7
100J 100J 100J 100J
LCDE# LCDDB4# LCDDB5# LCDDB6# LCDDB7#
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0.1u 0.1u
GND V5 VDD RS R/W E DB4 DB5 DB6 DB7

GPM181C0
SCAN
LTL-1LHG-002A TP13 TP14 LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A
FAX
RPL
R328 10kJ
D. OPERATION PWB (AR-M200/M201)
D304 ZENER_3.3V C338 C333
3
R325 0J R326 0J
TP12
R324 0J
TP3 TP2 TP1 DATA1 TP4
10
11
12
IC304 TB62725AF
/OUT0
/OUT1
/OUT2
/OUT3
/OUT4
/OUT5
/OUT6 R-EXT 15 1 GND
VCC
S-IN
CLOCK
/LATCH
/ENABLE
16
13
2
TP5 TP6 TP6 TP7 TP8 TP9 TP10
14
S-OUT
/OUT7
C308
Open
KRC106S

C323 open R306 OPEN C322 0.1u R305 0J 3.3V R327 820J 100J 100J PSL C305 1000p 1000p open KRC106S C306 C307 Q307 R303 TP11 R304 100J R302
3.3V
5VEN
R323 10KJ
LED311
PSL
LTL-1LHG-002A
OP-DATA OP-CLK
3 2
TP15
R301
470J
Q302
OP-LATCH
OPERATION PWB (KEY / Buzzer section) (AR-M200/M201)

5VEN
2/3
4
BZ301
4
1
D301
2
PS1720P02 1SS133 KEY321 KEY320 KEY322 KEY316 KEY306 KEY314 KEY312 R339 D302 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 10kJ KEY301
ESRT NM6K
SKQNABD010
NM2K
RAT
NM9K
RK
NM1K
MODK
SKQNABD010
Q306
1SS133 KEY325 KEY323 KEY318 KEY309 KEY315 KEY313
KEY311
KEY302
3
SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010
LK
D303
NM8K
CLK
NM0K
SHPK
ENT
NM4K
SKQNABD010
BPK
SKQNABD010
BZR
1SS133 KEY324 KEY319 KEY317 KEY308 KEY307
KEY305
KEY304
KEY303
KRC106S
MENU CAK
SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010
NM5K
NM3K
ASTK
EXP
SKQNABD010
NM7K
SKQNABD010
2SIDE
SKQNABD010
5V
IC303
16 VCC
TP19 TP16 1 TP17 2 TP18 3
KEYSC1 KEYSC2 KEYSC3 C321 0.1u
R338 R337 R336
1kJ 1kJ 1kJ
A B C
C318
C319
C320
6 4 5 G1 G2A G2B GND

74HC238 F-KEYSC1 F-KEYSC2 F-KEYSC3
Open
Open
Open
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7
TP20 TP21 TP22 TP23
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7
2
TP24
IC302
6 W Y
F-KEYIN1
2
F-KEYIN2 F-KEYIN3 F-KEYIN4 F-KEYIN5 F-KEYIN6 F-KEYIN7
KEYIN 5V
R318
33J
TP25
5V
C315
16 VCC
C312 0.1u C337 Open R342 2kJ TP34 TP35 TP36
2kJ
2kJ
2kJ
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12
R314 R313 R312 R311 R307 R308 R309 R310
100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J 100J
R346
R347
R348

C335 Open R341 2kJ C334 Open R340 2kJ C313 Open R319 2kJ C314 Open R320 2kJ C316 Open
47pF
R321 2kJ
C317 Open
R322 2kJ
C336 Open
R343 2kJ
8 GND
74HC151
A B C G
11 10 9 7
SELIN3 SELIN2 SELIN1
R317 R316 R315
1kJ 1kJ 1kJ
C311
C310
C309
Open
Open
Open
KEY310
PSW
1
SKQNABD010 C304 Open
PSW
OPERATION PWB (Connector section) (AR-M200/M201)
3/3
To MCU PWB
5V 5VEN
3.3V
C303 0.1u 47uF/16v 0.1u 47uF/16v 0.1u
C324
C302
C325
C301
C326
CN302
47uF/16v
To FAX Key PWB
TP37
To Drum Initial Detector
TP38
CN301
CN303 DRST
3
LCDDB[7..4]
TP39 TP40 TP41 TP42 TP43 TP44 TP45 TP46 TP47 TP48 TP49 TP50 TP51 TP52 TP53 SELIN1 SELIN2 SELIN3 KEYIN KEYSC3 KEYSC2 KEYSC1 BZR LCDCONT LCDRS LCDE
1 2 3
S3B-PH-K-S
LCDDB4 LCDDB5 LCDDB6 LCDDB7 DRST
TP54 PSL PSW OP-DATA OP-CLK BM15B-GHS-TBT OP-LATCH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
F-KEYSC3 F-KEYSC2 F-KEYSC1 F-KEYIN7 F-KEYIN6 F-KEYIN5 F-KEYIN4 F-KEYIN2 F-KEYIN3 F-KEYIN1 LED_V3 LED_V2 LED_V1 DATA1
TP55 TP56
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
TP57

B C D
R352
Open
32FMN-BMTTR-A-TB
[14] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES

[Preparation]
Write the download data (extension .dwl) into the main unit. A USB port is required for the PC. Create "MaintenanceTool" flooder in the PC, and copy the following files to the folder.
2)
Select "Option" "Serial Number Setting" on the menu bar.
Necessary for program download

Maintenance.exe ( Tool program) ProcModelQ.fmt ProcModelQ.mdl
Driver
Drivers/Vista/Mainte.inf (For Windows Vista) Drivers/2kXP/Mainte.inf (For Windows XP/2000) Drivers/Win9xME/Mainte.inf (For Windows Me/98SE) Drivers/Win9xME/UsbScan.sys (For Windows Me/98SE) 3) Set the serial number according to the following.
Download file
Download file (extension .dwl) Note: Copy the download data file (extension .dwl) to the folder in which the maintenance program is included. When making a folder for the maintenance tool in the PC, do not put a long folder name in the absolute path. [Example] Erroneous case: c:\Mainte nance Tool Download Proper case: c:\MaintenanceTool
1. Initial setting (Serial number setting procedures)

The serial number is set to the PC which is used for downloading. Setting is required once only, and there is no need to set again when rebooting the program. Note: This setting is required only when downloading the default data of E2PROM, and is not required when downloading firmware only. 1) PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/ 5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu. (Only to set the serial number, the PC should not be connected to the machine.) Product Code (P): Enter number (0 99) Enter the product code of "3." ID Code(I): Enter number (0 99) Assign an individual code to each PC uses "Maintenance.exe." After completion setting, press [OK]/[ENTER] key. 4) The serial number has been assigned.
2. Download procedures
1) Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key ( ) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) 3) Connect machine and the PC with a USB cable. (Connect it to the USB port on the main unit without fail. PC side: Boost "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/ 5420/M200/M201 series" in the Select Model menu.
AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201 series
AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201 series
AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 14 - 1
4) 5)
PC side: Check that the "Simulation Command List" tree is displayed on the integration maintenance program. PC side: When the integration maintenance program is boosted and "The copier is not turned on." is displayed at the bottom of display, select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu bar.
8)
PC side: Specify the download file (*****.dwl) to be used.
9)
PC side: When a download file is specified, downloading is performed automatically.
6)
PC side: Check that trees are displayed in the "Special (MCU/ IMC2/Facsimile)" folder in the integration maintenance program. (If trees are not displayed, check that the USB connector is connected, and select "Reconnect" in procedure 5) again.)
10) PC side: When download is completed, the following message is displayed.
7)
PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" in the main tree to develop its sub trees, and double-click "Download DWL Data Area" in the sub trees.
Note: Since, however, the machine enters the download data write state, do not turn OFF the power of the machine at this moment. 11) Main unit side: Wait until "0FF" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD COMPLETE!" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. When "0FF" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD COMPLETE!" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201), download is completed. Turn OFF the power of the machine, and disconnect the USB cable. 12) Terminate the integration maintenance program, and turn ON the machine again. Download is completed with the above procedures.
Note: When another machine is connected, connect the USB cable again and select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu bar of the integration maintenance program. Repeat the above procedures from 5).
4)
PC side: Check that the "Simulation Command List" tree on the integration maintenance program.
5)
* Inhibition during download (Important)

If download is failed, the next download may not be executed. Use great care not to execute the following items during download. Never turn off the machine. Never disconnect the download cable (USB cable).
PC side: Boot the integration maintenance program. If "The copier is not turned on." is displayed, select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu bar.
* If the above inhibition item occurs during downloading, turn OFF/ON the power.
1) When "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel, execute the download procedure again. If "d" is not displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is not displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel, turn OFF the power and press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key ( ) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) and turn ON the power. Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel, and execute the download procedure again. If "d" is not still displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is not still displayed for the AR-M200/M201), replace the MCU with a new one.
2)
6)
PC side: Check that trees are displayed on "Special (MCU/ IMC2/Facsimile" in the integration maintenance program. (If trees are not displayed, check that the USB cable is connected and select "Reconnect" again in procedure 5).
3. Version acquisition procedures

1) Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel of the main unit. (Press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key ( ) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) 3) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. PC side: Boost "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/ 5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu.
AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201 series
7)
PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" in the main tree items to develop its sub trees. Select "Get Version" in the sub trees.
4)
PC side: Check that "Simulation Command List" tree is displayed in the integration maintenance program.
5) 8) Check that the following display is shown.
PC side: Boot the integration maintenance program. If "The copier is not turned on." is displayed on the lower side of the display, select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu bar.
With the above procedures, version acquisition is completed. The display of "**.**" means its version is not downloaded. The downloaded versions are displayed in a version number as shown in "MCU Boot Version" and "MCU program Version". 6) PC side: Check that trees are displayed on "Special (MCU/ IMC2/Facsimile" in the integration maintenance program. (If trees are not displayed, check that the USB cable is connected and select "Reconnect" again in procedure 5).
4. EEPROM data acquisition procedure

EEPROM data is acquired to the PC. Use this procedure as data maintenance of EEPROM. 1) Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel of the main unit. (Press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key ( ) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) 3) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/ 5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu.
AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201 series
7)
PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" to develop its sub trees, and select "Upload EEPROM Data Area" in the sub trees.
5. Installing procedures
<USB integration maintenance program installation> Driver installation is made on plug-and-play. <Installation on Windows Vista> 1) Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key ( ) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) 3) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. The [Found New Hardware] display is shown as below. Select [Locate and install driver software (recommended)].
8)
PC side: Enter a desired file name, and select "Save."
Note: A message to confirm the administrator of the computer is displayed. Press [Agree] button. 4) 9) PC side: When upload is completed, the complete message is displayed. The [Found New Hardware - DOWNLOAD] display is shown. Click [I don't have the disc. Show me other options.].
With the above procedure, the EEPROM data acquisition is completed. Data acquired by the EEPROM data acquisition procedure are saved in a file with extension of .eep.
5)
When the following display is shown, select [Browse my computer for driver software (advanced)].
8)
The path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Maintenance.inf) is displayed. Press [Next] button.
6)
The following display is shown.
9)
When the following display is shown, select [Install this driver software anyway].
10) When the following display is shown, close [Close] button to complete installation. 7) Press [Browse] button, specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Maintenance.inf), and press [OK] button.
<Installation on Windows XP> 1) Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key ( ) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) 3) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. The following display is shown. Select [Install from a list or specific location] and press <Next> button.
5)
Select the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) and press <OK> button. (Suppose that the driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\2kXp folder.)
6)
Check the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), and press <Next> button.
4)
Select [Include this location in the search;]. If the search location is not the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), select <Browse>. If the search location is the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver, press <Next> button to go to procedure 7).
7)
When the following display is shown, press [Continue Anyway] button.
8)
When the following display is shown, installation is completed. Press <Finish> button.
5)
Select [Specify a location] and press <Next> button.
6) With the above procedures, installation (on Windows XP) of the integration maintenance program is completed. <Installation on Windows 2000> 1) Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key ( ) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) 3) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. Check that the Found New Hardware Wizard is displayed, and press <Next> button.
Select [Include this location in the search;]. If the search location is not the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), select <Browse>. If the search location is the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver, press <Next> button to go to procedure 9).
7)
Specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), and press <Open> button.
4)
Select [Search for a suitable driver for my device] and press <Next> button.
8)
Check that the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press <OK> button. (Suppose that the maintenance tool driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\2kXp folder.)
<Installation on Windows Me> 1) Main unit side: Execute simulation No. 49-01 (Flash ROM program write mode). Check that "d" is displayed (or "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed for the AR-M200/M201) on the operation panel. (Press and hold [Clear] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key ( ) (or [ZOOM]/[COPY RATIO] key for the AR-M200/M201) together, and turn on the power simultaneously.) 2) 3) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable. The following display is shown on the PC side. Select [Specify the location of the driver], and press <Next> button.
9)
Press <Next> button to start installation.
4)
Select [Specify a location], specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) as the search location, and press <Next> button. If the search location does not include the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), press <Browse> button to specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf). (Suppose that the maintenance tool driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\Win9xMe folder.)
10) When the following display is shown, installation is completed. Press <Finish> button.
11) Restart the PC. With the above procedures, installation (on Windows 2000) of the integration maintenance program is completed.
5)
Select the folder which includes maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf), and press <OK> button. (Suppose that the driver is included in C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\Win9xMe folder.)
6)
Check that the path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press <Next> button.
7)
When the following display is shown, installation is completed. Press <Finish> button.
8)
Restart the PC.
With the above procedures, installation (on Windows ME) of the integration maintenance program is completed.
Memo
Memo
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWBs of this model employs lead-free solder. The LF marks indicated on the PWBs and the Service Manual mean Lead-Free solder. The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder> Solder composition code (Refer to the table at the right.) Solder composition Sn-Ag-Cu Sn-Ag-Bi Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu Sn-Zn-Bi Sn-In-Ag-Bi Sn-Cu-Ni Sn-Ag-Sb Bi-Sn-Ag-P Bi-Sn-Ag Solder composition code a b z i n s p
Lead-Free
5mm
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread. Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident. Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the exclusive-use soldering iron is recommendable.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting point of lead-free solder is about 220C, which is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature of components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when completion of soldering is confirmed. Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently. If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron tip after completion of soldering work. If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT

(Danish) ADVARSEL ! Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering. Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren. (English) Caution ! Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturers instructions. (Finnish) VAROITUS Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (French) ATTENTION Il y a danger dexplosion s il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mme type ou dun type quivalent recommand par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux instructions du fabricant. (Swedish) VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
(German) Achtung Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien. Als Ersatzbatterien drfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden. Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA) "BATTERY DISPOSAL" THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY (MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS. "TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGES" CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE MMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANSE) QUI DOIT TRE TRAITE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES INFORMATIONS SUR LES MTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT 2008 BY SHARP CORPORATION

All rights reserved. Printed in Japan. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
Microsoft, Windows, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and ReaderTM are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries. IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation. All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION Digital Document System Group CS Promotion Center Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2008 April Printed in Japan

AR M201 Service Manual

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

AR M201 Service Manual

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SERVICE MANUAL

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM/DIGITAL COPIER

AR-203E AR-203E X AR-M200 AR-M201 AR-5420

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT

Model AR-203E 20CPM 15PPM

Multi-bypass paper feed section

Tray paper feed section

Multi-bypass paper feed section

Resolution Type Voltage Power consumption

Power source Power consumption

Copy speed (CPM) Copy speed (CPM) Copy speed (CPM)

4. GDI printer (AR-203E only)

5. SPLC printer (AR-M200/M201)

6. Scan function (AR-203E/M200/M201)

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS

Drum Drum fixing plate

B. Asia Subsidiary (AR-203E/M201)

Drum Drum fixing plate

Drum Drum fixing plate

Drum Drum fixing plate

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 1

3. Production control number (lot No.) identification

Normal operating condition

Temperature: 20 - 25C Humidity: 65 5%RH

Acceptable operating condition

Humidity (RH) 85% 60%

Humidity (RH) 90% 60%

Humidity (RH) 90%

Production control label attachment position

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 2

4. Toner cartridge replacement

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 3

[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES

1 USB connector (AR-203E) 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 6

USB connector (AR-M200/M201)

Front cover Transfer charger

Side cover Charger cleaner

Fusing unit release lever

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 1

*1: Toner cartridge replacement

) indicator indicate the

Start indicator Power save indicator

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 2

Application number SC2 SC3 SC4 SC5 SC6

4) Press the start (

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 3

Shows the current copy ratio.

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 4

4. Motors and solenoids

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 5

5. Sensors and switches

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 6

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 7

7. Cross sectional view

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 8

[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION

3. Checking packed components and accessories

Drum cartridge (installed in unit)

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 1

Protective pins CAUTION tape

5. Removing protective packing materials

6. Developer unit installation

AR-203E/5420/M200/M201 UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 2